[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2020229910A1 - Information processing device - Google Patents

Information processing device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020229910A1
WO2020229910A1 PCT/IB2020/053907 IB2020053907W WO2020229910A1 WO 2020229910 A1 WO2020229910 A1 WO 2020229910A1 IB 2020053907 W IB2020053907 W IB 2020053907W WO 2020229910 A1 WO2020229910 A1 WO 2020229910A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
conductive film
information
region
electrically connected
information processing
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/IB2020/053907
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
楠紘慈
初見亮
久保田大介
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co Ltd filed Critical Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co Ltd
Priority to JP2021519017A priority Critical patent/JPWO2020229910A1/ja
Priority to CN202080035047.5A priority patent/CN113811936A/en
Priority to US17/609,115 priority patent/US11886250B2/en
Priority to KR1020217036914A priority patent/KR102894646B1/en
Publication of WO2020229910A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020229910A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Priority to JP2025002807A priority patent/JP2025061105A/en
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
    • G09G3/20—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
    • G09G3/22—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters using controlled light sources
    • G09G3/30—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters using controlled light sources using electroluminescent panels
    • G09G3/32—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters using controlled light sources using electroluminescent panels semiconductive, e.g. using light-emitting diodes [LED]
    • G09G3/3208—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters using controlled light sources using electroluminescent panels semiconductive, e.g. using light-emitting diodes [LED] organic, e.g. using organic light-emitting diodes [OLED]
    • G09G3/3225—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters using controlled light sources using electroluminescent panels semiconductive, e.g. using light-emitting diodes [LED] organic, e.g. using organic light-emitting diodes [OLED] using an active matrix
    • G09G3/3233—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters using controlled light sources using electroluminescent panels semiconductive, e.g. using light-emitting diodes [LED] organic, e.g. using organic light-emitting diodes [OLED] using an active matrix with pixel circuitry controlling the current through the light-emitting element
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/03—Arrangements for converting the position or the displacement of a member into a coded form
    • G06F3/041—Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means
    • G06F3/042—Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means by opto-electronic means
    • G06F3/0421—Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means by opto-electronic means by interrupting or reflecting a light beam, e.g. optical touch-screen
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133—Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/136—Liquid crystal cells structurally associated with a semi-conducting layer or substrate, e.g. cells forming part of an integrated circuit
    • G02F1/1362—Active matrix addressed cells
    • G02F1/1368—Active matrix addressed cells in which the switching element is a three-electrode device
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F1/00—Details not covered by groups G06F3/00 - G06F13/00 and G06F21/00
    • G06F1/16—Constructional details or arrangements
    • G06F1/1613—Constructional details or arrangements for portable computers
    • G06F1/1615—Constructional details or arrangements for portable computers with several enclosures having relative motions, each enclosure supporting at least one I/O or computing function
    • G06F1/1616—Constructional details or arrangements for portable computers with several enclosures having relative motions, each enclosure supporting at least one I/O or computing function with folding flat displays, e.g. laptop computers or notebooks having a clamshell configuration, with body parts pivoting to an open position around an axis parallel to the plane they define in closed position
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F1/00—Details not covered by groups G06F3/00 - G06F13/00 and G06F21/00
    • G06F1/16—Constructional details or arrangements
    • G06F1/1613—Constructional details or arrangements for portable computers
    • G06F1/1633—Constructional details or arrangements of portable computers not specific to the type of enclosures covered by groups G06F1/1615 - G06F1/1626
    • G06F1/1637—Details related to the display arrangement, including those related to the mounting of the display in the housing
    • G06F1/1641—Details related to the display arrangement, including those related to the mounting of the display in the housing the display being formed by a plurality of foldable display components
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F1/00—Details not covered by groups G06F3/00 - G06F13/00 and G06F21/00
    • G06F1/16—Constructional details or arrangements
    • G06F1/1613—Constructional details or arrangements for portable computers
    • G06F1/1633—Constructional details or arrangements of portable computers not specific to the type of enclosures covered by groups G06F1/1615 - G06F1/1626
    • G06F1/1637—Details related to the display arrangement, including those related to the mounting of the display in the housing
    • G06F1/1652—Details related to the display arrangement, including those related to the mounting of the display in the housing the display being flexible, e.g. mimicking a sheet of paper, or rollable
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F1/00—Details not covered by groups G06F3/00 - G06F13/00 and G06F21/00
    • G06F1/16—Constructional details or arrangements
    • G06F1/1613—Constructional details or arrangements for portable computers
    • G06F1/1633—Constructional details or arrangements of portable computers not specific to the type of enclosures covered by groups G06F1/1615 - G06F1/1626
    • G06F1/1675—Miscellaneous details related to the relative movement between the different enclosures or enclosure parts
    • G06F1/1677—Miscellaneous details related to the relative movement between the different enclosures or enclosure parts for detecting open or closed state or particular intermediate positions assumed by movable parts of the enclosure, e.g. detection of display lid position with respect to main body in a laptop, detection of opening of the cover of battery compartment
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F1/00—Details not covered by groups G06F3/00 - G06F13/00 and G06F21/00
    • G06F1/16—Constructional details or arrangements
    • G06F1/1613—Constructional details or arrangements for portable computers
    • G06F1/1633—Constructional details or arrangements of portable computers not specific to the type of enclosures covered by groups G06F1/1615 - G06F1/1626
    • G06F1/1684—Constructional details or arrangements related to integrated I/O peripherals not covered by groups G06F1/1635 - G06F1/1675
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/03—Arrangements for converting the position or the displacement of a member into a coded form
    • G06F3/041—Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means
    • G06F3/0416—Control or interface arrangements specially adapted for digitisers
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0487—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser
    • G06F3/0488—Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser using a touch-screen or digitiser, e.g. input of commands through traced gestures
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09F—DISPLAYING; ADVERTISING; SIGNS; LABELS OR NAME-PLATES; SEALS
    • G09F9/00—Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09F—DISPLAYING; ADVERTISING; SIGNS; LABELS OR NAME-PLATES; SEALS
    • G09F9/00—Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements
    • G09F9/30—Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements in which the desired character or characters are formed by combining individual elements
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
    • H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
    • H10K59/40—OLEDs integrated with touch screens
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
    • H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
    • H10K59/60—OLEDs integrated with inorganic light-sensitive elements, e.g. with inorganic solar cells or inorganic photodiodes
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
    • H10K85/00—Organic materials used in the body or electrodes of devices covered by this subclass
    • H10K85/20—Carbon compounds, e.g. carbon nanotubes or fullerenes
    • H10K85/211—Fullerenes, e.g. C60
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F2203/00—Indexing scheme relating to G06F3/00 - G06F3/048
    • G06F2203/041—Indexing scheme relating to G06F3/041 - G06F3/045
    • G06F2203/04102—Flexible digitiser, i.e. constructional details for allowing the whole digitising part of a device to be flexed or rolled like a sheet of paper
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
    • G06V—IMAGE OR VIDEO RECOGNITION OR UNDERSTANDING
    • G06V40/00—Recognition of biometric, human-related or animal-related patterns in image or video data
    • G06V40/10—Human or animal bodies, e.g. vehicle occupants or pedestrians; Body parts, e.g. hands
    • G06V40/12—Fingerprints or palmprints
    • G06V40/13—Sensors therefor
    • G06V40/1318—Sensors therefor using electro-optical elements or layers, e.g. electroluminescent sensing
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
    • H10K59/00—Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
    • H10K59/10—OLED displays
    • H10K59/12—Active-matrix OLED [AMOLED] displays
    • H10K59/126—Shielding, e.g. light-blocking means over the TFTs
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10K—ORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
    • H10K77/00—Constructional details of devices covered by this subclass and not covered by groups H10K10/80, H10K30/80, H10K50/80 or H10K59/80
    • H10K77/10—Substrates, e.g. flexible substrates
    • H10K77/111—Flexible substrates
    • Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02E—REDUCTION OF GREENHOUSE GAS [GHG] EMISSIONS, RELATED TO ENERGY GENERATION, TRANSMISSION OR DISTRIBUTION
    • Y02E10/00—Energy generation through renewable energy sources
    • Y02E10/50—Photovoltaic [PV] energy
    • Y02E10/549—Organic PV cells

Definitions

  • One aspect of the present invention relates to an information processing device or a semiconductor device.
  • One aspect of the present invention is not limited to the above technical fields.
  • the technical field of one aspect of the invention disclosed in the present specification and the like relates to a product, a method, or a manufacturing method.
  • one aspect of the invention relates to a process, machine, manufacture, or composition (composition of matter). Therefore, more specifically, the technical fields of one aspect of the present invention disclosed in the present specification include semiconductor devices, display devices, light emitting devices, power storage devices, storage devices, their driving methods, or methods for manufacturing them. Can be given as an example.
  • An information processing apparatus using an imaging panel having an insulating surface of a substrate and a plurality of imaging pixels on the insulating surface is known (Patent Document 1).
  • the imaging pixels include a plurality of windows that transmit visible light arranged in a matrix, a grid-like photoelectric conversion element that extends between the plurality of windows and supplies a signal, and a detection circuit to which the signal is supplied. ..
  • One aspect of the present invention is to provide a novel information processing apparatus having excellent convenience, usefulness, or reliability.
  • one of the issues is to provide a new information processing device or a new semiconductor device.
  • One aspect of the present invention is an information processing device having a functional panel, a first surface, a second surface, a third surface, a fourth surface, and a fifth surface. ..
  • the functional panel comprises a region 231 which comprises a first region, a second region, a third region, a fourth region and a fifth region.
  • the second region has a function of displaying in one direction
  • the third region is sandwiched between the first region and the second region, and the third region can be bent.
  • the fifth region is sandwiched between the first region and the fourth region, and the fifth region can be bent.
  • the fourth region has a function of displaying in one direction when the third region and the fifth region are bent.
  • the first surface comprises a first region and a light emitting element, which emits light.
  • the second surface includes a second region and a photoelectric conversion element, which has a function of converting light into an electric signal.
  • the third surface is sandwiched between the first surface and the second surface, the third surface can be bent, and the third surface comprises a third region.
  • the fourth surface comprises a fourth area.
  • the fifth surface is sandwiched between the first surface and the fourth surface and can be bent to include a fifth area.
  • the photoelectric conversion element faces the light emitting element as the third surface bends.
  • one aspect of the present invention is the above-mentioned information processing apparatus including the above-mentioned light having a wavelength of 650 nm or more and 1000 nm or less.
  • one aspect of the present invention is the above-mentioned information processing device in which the light emitting element contains a luminescent organic compound.
  • one aspect of the present invention is the above-mentioned information processing device in which the photoelectric conversion element contains fullerene.
  • a part of the configuration used for the light emitting element can be used as a part of the photoelectric conversion element configuration.
  • the hole transport layer used in the light emitting element can be used in the hole transport layer of the photoelectric conversion element.
  • the electron transport layer used for the light emitting element can be used for the electron transport layer of the photoelectric conversion element.
  • one aspect of the present invention is the above-mentioned information processing device in which the functional panel includes a first drive circuit, a second drive circuit, and a region.
  • the first drive circuit supplies the first selection signal
  • the second drive circuit supplies the second selection signal and the third selection signal
  • the second region includes the first pixel
  • the first pixel includes a first pixel circuit, a light emitting element, a second pixel circuit, and a photoelectric conversion element.
  • the first pixel circuit is supplied with the first selection signal, and the first pixel circuit acquires an image signal based on the first selection signal.
  • the light emitting element is electrically connected to the first pixel circuit, and the light emitting element emits light based on the image signal.
  • the second pixel circuit is supplied with the second selection signal and the third selection signal during the period when the first selection signal is not supplied, and the second pixel circuit is based on the second selection signal. , Acquire the imaging signal. Further, the second pixel circuit supplies an image pickup signal based on the third selection signal.
  • the photoelectric conversion element is electrically connected to the second pixel circuit, and the photoelectric conversion element generates an imaging signal.
  • the functional panel comprises a first conductive film, a second conductive film, a third conductive film, a fourth conductive film, and a fifth conductive film.
  • the above-mentioned information processing apparatus including the sixth conductive film and the seventh conductive film.
  • the first conductive film is supplied with the second selection signal, and the seventh conductive film is supplied with the third selection signal.
  • the second pixel circuit comprises a first switch, a second switch, a third switch, a first transistor, a first capacitance and a first node.
  • the first switch is based on the potential of the first terminal electrically connected to the photoelectric conversion element, the second terminal electrically connected to the first node, and the first conductive film. It has a function to control the conducting state or the non-conducting state.
  • the second switch is based on the potential of the first terminal electrically connected to the first node, the second terminal electrically connected to the second conductive film, and the potential of the third conductive film. It also has a function to control the conductive state or the non-conductive state.
  • the first capacitance includes a conductive film that is electrically connected to the first node and a conductive film that is electrically connected to the fourth conductive film.
  • the first transistor includes a gate electrode that is electrically connected to the first node and a first electrode that is electrically connected to the fifth conductive film.
  • the third switch has a first terminal electrically connected to the second electrode of the first transistor, a second terminal electrically connected to the sixth conductive film, and a seventh conductive film. It has a function of controlling a conductive state or a non-conducting state based on the potential of the film.
  • the imaging signal generated by the photoelectric conversion element can be transferred to the first node by using the switch.
  • the imaging signal generated by the photoelectric conversion element can be stored in the first node by using a switch.
  • a switch can be used to bring the pixel circuit and the photoelectric conversion element into a non-conducting state.
  • the correlated double sampling method can be applied.
  • the noise included in the image pickup signal can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to provide a new information processing apparatus having excellent convenience, usefulness, or reliability.
  • the functional panel comprises an eighth conductive film, a ninth conductive film, a tenth conductive film, an eleventh conductive film, and a twelfth conductive film.
  • the eighth conductive film is supplied with a first selection signal
  • the first pixel circuit includes a fourth switch, a fifth switch, a second transistor, a second capacitance and a second node.
  • the second transistor has a gate electrode electrically connected to the second node, a first electrode electrically connected to the light emitting element, and a second electrode electrically connected to the twelfth conductive film.
  • the electrodes are provided.
  • the fourth switch is based on the potential of the first terminal electrically connected to the second node, the second terminal electrically connected to the tenth conductive film, and the eighth conductive film.
  • the fifth switch has a function of controlling a conductive state or a non-conducting state, and the fifth switch is based on the potential of the first terminal electrically connected to the eleventh conductive film and the potential of the ninth conductive film. It has a function to control the conductive state or the non-conductive state, and the second capacitance is electrically connected to the conductive film electrically connected to the second node and the second electrode of the fifth switch. It has a conductive film.
  • the image signal can be stored in the second node.
  • the potential of the second node can be changed using a switch.
  • the intensity of the light emitted by the light emitting element can be controlled by using the potential of the second node.
  • one aspect of the present invention is the above-mentioned information processing apparatus in which the functional panel includes a readout circuit, a thirteenth conductive film, a fourteenth conductive film, and a fifteenth conductive film.
  • the readout circuit includes an amplification circuit and a sampling circuit, the amplification circuit includes a third transistor, and the third transistor has a gate electrode electrically connected to the thirteenth conductive film and a sixth conductive film (j). It includes a first electrode electrically connected to the 14th conductive film and a second electrode electrically connected to the 14th conductive film.
  • the sampling circuit includes a first terminal, a second terminal and a third terminal, the first terminal is electrically connected to the sixth conductive film, and the second terminal is electrically connected to the fifteenth conductive film.
  • the third terminal is provided with a function of supplying a signal that changes based on the potential of the first terminal.
  • the imaging signal can be acquired from the pixel circuit.
  • a correlated double sampling method can be applied.
  • a sampling circuit can be provided for each conductive film.
  • the difference signal of the pixel circuit can be acquired for each conductive film.
  • the operating frequency of the sampling circuit can be suppressed.
  • noise can be reduced.
  • one aspect of the present invention is the above-mentioned information processing device in which the functional panel includes a functional layer.
  • the functional layer includes a first pixel circuit and a second pixel circuit.
  • the semiconductor film used for the first pixel circuit can be formed.
  • the manufacturing process can be simplified. As a result, it is possible to provide a new information processing apparatus having excellent convenience, usefulness, or reliability.
  • one aspect of the present invention is the above-mentioned information processing apparatus in which a region includes a group of pixels and another group of pixels.
  • a group of pixels are arranged in the row direction, a group of pixels contains a first pixel, a group of pixels is electrically connected to an eighth conductive film, and a group of pixels is electrically connected to a first conductive film. Connected to.
  • the other group of pixels is arranged in the column direction intersecting the row direction, the other group of pixels includes the first pixel, the other group of pixels is electrically connected to the tenth conductive film, and the other.
  • a group of pixels is electrically connected to the sixth conductive film.
  • imaging information can be acquired from a plurality of pixels.
  • image information can be supplied to a plurality of pixels.
  • one aspect of the present invention is the above-mentioned information processing device in which the first region includes the second pixel.
  • the second pixel includes a light emitting element.
  • one aspect of the present invention is the above-mentioned information processing device having a control unit.
  • the control unit is supplied with image information and control information, the control unit generates information based on the image information, the control unit generates a control signal based on the control information, and the control unit supplies the information and the control signal.
  • the function panel is supplied with information and the control signal, the first pixel emits light based on the information, and the second pixel emits light based on the information.
  • image information can be displayed using the light emitting element.
  • one aspect of the present invention is an information processing device having an input unit and a display unit.
  • the display unit includes a function panel, the input unit includes a detection area, the input unit detects an object close to the detection area, and the detection area includes an area overlapping the first pixel.
  • the position information can be input by using a finger or the like close to the display unit as the pointer.
  • the position information can be associated with the image information displayed on the display unit.
  • one aspect of the present invention is an information processing device including an arithmetic unit and an input / output device.
  • the arithmetic unit is supplied with input information or detection information, the arithmetic unit generates control information and image information based on the input information or detection information, and the arithmetic unit supplies control information and image information.
  • the input / output device supplies input information and detection information
  • the input / output device is supplied with control information and image information
  • the input / output device includes a display unit, an input unit, and a detection unit.
  • the display unit includes a function panel, the display unit displays image information based on control information, the input unit generates input information, and the detection unit generates detection information.
  • control information can be generated based on the input information or the detection information.
  • the image information can be displayed based on the input information or the detection information.
  • one aspect of the present invention includes one or more of a keyboard, a hardware button, a pointing device, a touch sensor, an illuminance sensor, an imaging device, a voice input device, a line-of-sight input device, and an attitude detection device. , The above information processing device.
  • the arithmetic unit can generate image information or control information based on the information supplied by the various input devices. As a result, it is possible to provide a new information processing apparatus having excellent convenience, usefulness, or reliability.
  • FIGS. 1A to 1C are diagrams for explaining the configuration of the information processing apparatus according to the embodiment.
  • 2A and 2B are diagrams for explaining the configuration of the information processing device according to the embodiment
  • FIGS. 2C and 2D are diagrams for explaining the configuration of pixels of the information processing device according to the embodiment.
  • 3A to 3C are block diagrams illustrating the configuration of the functional panel according to the embodiment.
  • 4A to 4C are circuit diagrams for explaining the configuration of the functional panel according to the embodiment.
  • FIG. 5 is a circuit diagram illustrating the configuration of the functional panel according to the embodiment.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating the operation of the function panel according to the embodiment.
  • 7A to 7C are diagrams for explaining the configuration of the functional panel according to the embodiment.
  • FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view illustrating the configuration of the functional panel according to the embodiment.
  • 9A and 9B are cross-sectional views illustrating the configuration of the functional panel according to the embodiment.
  • 10A and 10B are cross-sectional views illustrating the configuration of the functional panel according to the embodiment.
  • 11A and 11B are cross-sectional views illustrating the configuration of the functional panel according to the embodiment.
  • 12A to 12D are diagrams for explaining the configuration of the display device according to the embodiment.
  • FIG. 13 is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of the input / output device according to the embodiment.
  • 14A to 14C are diagrams for explaining the configuration of the information processing apparatus according to the embodiment.
  • 15A and 15B are flowcharts for explaining the driving method of the information processing apparatus according to the embodiment.
  • 16A to 16C are diagrams for explaining a method of driving the information processing apparatus according to the embodiment.
  • 17A to 17C are diagrams for explaining a method of driving the information processing apparatus according to the embodiment.
  • 18A to 18E are diagrams for explaining the configuration of the information processing apparatus according to the embodiment.
  • 19A to 19E are diagrams for explaining the configuration of the information processing apparatus according to the embodiment.
  • 20A and 20B are diagrams for explaining the configuration of the information processing apparatus according to the embodiment.
  • FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of an information processing device according to an embodiment.
  • 22A to 22C are diagrams for explaining the configuration of the information processing apparatus according to the embodiment.
  • 23A and 23B are diagrams for explaining the configuration of the information processing device according to the embodiment, and
  • FIGS. 23C and 23D are diagrams for explaining the configuration of pixels of the information processing device according to the embodiment.
  • the information processing device of one aspect of the present invention has a functional panel, a first surface, a second surface, a third surface, a fourth surface, and a fifth surface.
  • the functional panel comprises a first to a fifth region, the second region is displayed in one direction, and the third region is sandwiched and bent between the first region and the second region.
  • the fifth region is sandwiched between the first and fourth regions and can be bent, and the fourth region is one in the state where the third region and the fifth region are bent. It has a function to display in the direction of.
  • the first surface comprises a first region and a light emitting element, the light emitting element emits light, the second surface has a second region and a photoelectric conversion element, and the photoelectric conversion element converts light into an electric signal.
  • the third surface is sandwiched between the first surface and the second surface and can be bent and includes a third area
  • the fourth surface includes a fourth area and a fifth surface. Is sandwiched between a first surface and a fourth surface, can be bent, has a fifth region, and the photoelectric conversion element faces the light emitting element as the third surface is bent.
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of an information processing device according to an aspect of the present invention.
  • FIG. 1A is a diagram for explaining a state in which the information processing apparatus according to one aspect of the present invention is deployed
  • FIGS. 1B and 1C are diagrams for explaining a state in which a part of the information processing apparatus shown in FIG. ..
  • FIG. 2A is a diagram for explaining a state in which a part of the information processing apparatus according to the present invention is bent and a finger is inserted in the gap
  • FIG. 2B is a diagram drawn from an angle different from that of FIG. 2A.
  • .. 2C and 2D are diagrams for explaining the pixel configuration of the information processing apparatus according to one aspect of the present invention.
  • a variable having an integer of 1 or more as a value may be used as a code.
  • (p) containing a variable p having a value of one or more integers may be used as a part of a code for specifying any of the maximum p components.
  • (m, n) including a variable m having a value of one or more integers and a variable n may be used as a part of a code for specifying any of a maximum of m ⁇ n components.
  • the information processing apparatus described in this embodiment includes a functional panel 700, a surface 210 (1), a surface 210 (2), a surface 210 (3), a surface 210 (4), and a surface 210 (5). And (see FIG. 1A).
  • the functional panel 700 includes an area 231.
  • the region 231 includes a region 231 (1), a region 231 (2), a region 231 (3), a region 231 (4), and a fifth region 231 (5).
  • the area 231 (2) has a function of displaying in one direction (for example, the direction indicated by the arrow Z in the drawing).
  • the region 231 (3) is sandwiched between the regions 231 (1) and the region 231 (2), and the region 231 (3) can be bent (see FIGS. 1B and 1C).
  • the region 231 (5) is sandwiched between the region 231 (1) and the region 231 (4), and the region 231 (5) can be bent.
  • the region 231 (4) has a function of displaying in one direction (for example, the direction indicated by the arrow Z in the drawing) when the region 231 (3) and the region 231 (5) are bent (see FIG. 1C). ..
  • the surface 210 (1) includes a region 231 (1) and a light emitting element 550 (1).
  • the light emitting element 550 (1) emits light h1 (see FIG. 1A).
  • the surface 210 (2) includes a region 231 (2) and a photoelectric conversion element PD (2).
  • the surface 210 (3) is sandwiched between the surface 210 (1) and the surface 210 (2), and the surface 210 (3) can be bent (see FIGS. 1B and 1C). Further, the surface 210 (3) includes a region 231 (3).
  • the surface 210 (4) comprises a region 231 (4).
  • the surface 210 (5) is sandwiched between the surface 210 (1) and the surface 210 (4), and the surface 210 (5) can be bent. Further, the surface 210 (5) includes a region 231 (5).
  • the photoelectric conversion element PD (2) has a function of converting light h1 into an electric signal. Further, the photoelectric conversion element PD (2) faces the light emitting element 550 (1) as the surface 210 (3) bends (see FIGS. 1C, 2A and 2B).
  • the transmittance for the light emitted by the light emitting element 550 (1) can be known.
  • the change in transmittance with time can be known.
  • the light h1 includes light having a wavelength of 650 nm or more and 1000 nm or less.
  • a light emitting element that emits light having a wavelength of 400 nm or more and 1000 nm or less can be used.
  • the transmittance for the light emitted by the light emitting element 550 (1) such as a finger can be known.
  • the change over time in blood flow can be known.
  • the pulse can be known.
  • the distribution of veins can be known.
  • it can be used for biometric authentication.
  • it can be used for healthcare applications.
  • it is possible to provide a new information processing apparatus having excellent convenience, usefulness, or reliability.
  • the light emitting element 550 (1) contains a light emitting material.
  • a luminescent organic compound can be used in the light emitting device 550 (1).
  • the light emitting element 550 (1) includes a light emitting unit.
  • the light emitting unit includes one region in which an electron injected from one side recombines with a hole injected from the other side.
  • the light emitting unit includes a light emitting material, and the light emitting material emits energy generated by recombination of electrons and holes as light.
  • the hole transport layer and the electron transport layer can be used for the light emitting unit.
  • the hole transport layer is arranged on the positive electrode side of the electron transport layer, and the hole transport layer has higher hole mobility than the electron transport layer.
  • a luminescent material, a hole transport layer and an electron transport layer can be used for the light emitting device 550.
  • the photoelectric conversion element PD (2) includes a photoelectric conversion material.
  • a photoelectric conversion material For example, fullerenes can be used for the photoelectric conversion element PD (2).
  • an electron accepting material and an electron donating material can be used as the photoelectric conversion material.
  • a laminated film of an electron accepting material and an electron donating material can be used as the photoelectric conversion material.
  • a mixed film of an electron accepting material and an electron donating material can be used as the photoelectric conversion material.
  • a film in which an electron accepting material and an electron donating material are bulk heterobonded can be used as the photoelectric conversion material.
  • a co-deposited film of an electron-accepting material and an electron-donating material can be used for the photoelectric conversion layer.
  • a phthalocyanine derivative can be used as an electron donating material, and a fullerene derivative or the like can be used as an electron acceptor.
  • the photoelectric conversion layer, the hole transport layer, and the electron transport layer can be used for the photoelectric conversion element PD (2).
  • the photoelectric conversion layer is sandwiched between the hole transport layer and the electron transport layer, and the photoelectric conversion layer contains a photoelectric conversion material.
  • the hole transport layer that can be used for the light emitting element 550 (1) can be used for the photoelectric conversion element PD (2).
  • the electron transport layer that can be used for the light emitting element 550 (1) can be used for the photoelectric conversion element PD (2).
  • a hole transport layer that can be produced in the same step can be used for the light emitting element 550 (1) and the photoelectric conversion element PD (2).
  • an electron transport layer that can be produced in the same process can be used for the light emitting element 550 (1) and the photoelectric conversion element PD (2).
  • a part of the configuration used for the light emitting element 550 (1) can be used as a part of the configuration of the photoelectric conversion element PD (2).
  • the hole transport layer used in the light emitting element 550 (1) can be used in the hole transport layer of the photoelectric conversion element PD (2).
  • the electron transport layer used for the light emitting element 550 (1) can be used for the electron transport layer of the photoelectric conversion element PD (2).
  • FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of an information processing device according to an aspect of the present invention.
  • FIG. 22A is a diagram for explaining a state in which the information processing apparatus according to one aspect of the present invention is deployed
  • FIGS. 22B and 22C are diagrams for explaining a state in which a part of the information processing apparatus shown in FIG. 22A is bent. ..
  • FIG. 23A is a diagram for explaining a state in which a part of the information processing apparatus according to the present invention is bent and a finger is inserted in the gap
  • FIG. 23B is a diagram drawn from an angle different from that of FIG. 23A.
  • .. 23C and 23D are diagrams for explaining the pixel configuration of the information processing apparatus according to one aspect of the present invention.
  • the information processing apparatus shown in FIGS. 22 and 23 is different from the information processing apparatus shown in FIGS. 1 and 2 in that the area 231 (5) is not provided between the areas 231 (1) and 231 (4). Is different.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a functional panel that can be used in the information processing apparatus of one aspect of the present invention.
  • FIG. 3A is a block diagram of a functional panel
  • FIGS. 3B and 3C are diagrams illustrating a part of FIG. 3A.
  • FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a functional panel that can be used in the information processing apparatus of one aspect of the present invention.
  • FIG. 4A is a circuit diagram of the pixel circuit 530S (j) of the functional panel
  • FIG. 4B is a circuit diagram illustrating a part of the amplifier circuit of the functional panel
  • FIG. 4C is a sampling circuit SC (j) of the functional panel. It is a circuit diagram.
  • FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a functional panel that can be used in the information processing apparatus of one aspect of the present invention.
  • FIG. 5 is a circuit diagram of the pixel circuit 530G (i, j) of the function panel.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating the operation of a functional panel that can be used in the information processing apparatus of one aspect of the present invention.
  • the functional panel described in this embodiment has a drive circuit GD, a drive circuit RD, and a region 231 (see FIG. 3A).
  • the area 231 includes the area 231 (2) (see FIG. 1A).
  • the drive circuit GD supplies a first selection signal
  • the drive circuit RD supplies a second selection signal and a third selection signal
  • the area 231 (2) includes pixels 703 (i, j).
  • the pixel 703 (i, j) includes a pixel circuit 530G (i, j), a light emitting element 550G (i, j), a pixel circuit 530S (i, j), and a photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j) (FIG. 3B). And see Figure 3C).
  • the pixel circuit 530G (i, j) is supplied with the first selection signal, and the pixel circuit 530G (i, j) acquires an image signal based on the first selection signal.
  • the conductive film G1 (i) can be used to supply the first selection signal (see FIG. 3B).
  • the image signal can be supplied using the conductive film S1g (j).
  • the operation of supplying the first selection signal and causing the pixel circuit 530G (i, j) to acquire the image signal can be referred to as “writing” (see FIG. 6).
  • the light emitting element 550G (i, j) is electrically connected to the pixel circuit 530G (i, j), and the light emitting element 550G (i, j) emits light based on the image signal (see FIGS. 3B and 3C).
  • the light emitting element 550G (i, j) includes an electrode 551G (i, j) that is electrically connected to the pixel circuit 530G (i, j) and an electrode 552 that is electrically connected to the conductive film VCOM2. (See FIGS. 5 and 10A).
  • ⁇ Configuration Example 1 of Pixel Circuit 530S (i, j) The pixel circuit 530S (i, j) is supplied with the second selection signal and the third selection signal during the period when the first selection signal is not supplied (see FIG. 6). Further, the pixel circuit 530S (i, j) acquires an image pickup signal based on the second selection signal, and supplies the image pickup signal based on the third selection signal.
  • the conductive film TX (i) can be used to supply a second selection signal
  • the conductive film SE (i) can be used to supply a third selection signal (see FIGS. 3B and 4A). ..
  • the operation of supplying the second selection signal and causing the pixel circuit 530S (i, j) to acquire the imaging signal can be referred to as “imaging” (see FIG. 6). Further, the operation of reading the image pickup signal from the pixel circuit 530S (i, j) can be referred to as “reading”. Further, the operation of supplying a predetermined voltage to the photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j) is "initialization”, and the operation of exposing the initialized photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j) to light for a predetermined period is “initialization”. "Exposure” and the operation of reflecting the voltage changed with exposure on the pixel circuit 530S (i, j) can be called “transfer”. Further, SRS in the figure corresponds to an operation of supplying a reference signal used in the correlated double sampling method, and “output” corresponds to an operation of supplying an imaging signal.
  • one frame of image information can be written in 16.7 ms. Specifically, it can operate at a frame rate of 60 Hz.
  • the image signal can be written to the pixel circuit 530G (i, j) at 15.2 ⁇ s.
  • one frame of image information can be retained for a period corresponding to 16 frames.
  • the imaging information of one frame can be photographed and read out in a period corresponding to 16 frames.
  • it can be initialized at 15 ⁇ s, exposed at 1 ms or more and 5 ms or less, and transferred at 150 ⁇ s. Alternatively, it can be read in 250 ms.
  • the photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j) is electrically connected to the pixel circuit 530S (i, j), and the photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j) generates an imaging signal.
  • the photoelectric conversion element PD (2) described in the first embodiment can be used for the photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j).
  • the photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j) has an electrode 551S (i, j) electrically connected to the pixel circuit 530S (i, j) and an electrode 552 electrically connected to the conductive film VPD. Provide (see FIGS. 4A and 9A). Further, the electrode 552 used for the light emitting element 550G (i, j) can be used for the photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j). This makes it possible to simplify the configuration and manufacturing process of the functional panel.
  • a plurality of pixels can be used for the pixel 703 (i, j). For example, it is possible to use a plurality of pixels that display colors having different hues. It should be noted that each of the plurality of pixels can be paraphrased as a sub-pixel. Alternatively, a plurality of sub-pixels can be combined into a set and can be paraphrased as a pixel.
  • the colors displayed by the plurality of pixels can be additively mixed or subtracted.
  • pixels 702B (i, j) for displaying blue, pixels 702G (i, j) for displaying green, and pixels 702R (i, j) for displaying red are used for pixels 703 (i, j). be able to. Further, each of the pixels 702B (i, j), the pixels 702G (i, j) and the pixels 702R (i, j) can be paraphrased as sub-pixels (see FIG. 7B).
  • a pixel displaying white or the like can be used for the pixel 703 (i, j) in addition to the above set.
  • pixels for displaying cyan, pixels for displaying magenta, and pixels for displaying yellow can be used for the pixels 703 (i, j).
  • a pixel that emits infrared rays can be added to the above set and used for the pixel 703 (g, h) (see FIG. 7C).
  • pixels 702N (g, h) that emit light including light having a wavelength of 650 nm or more and 1000 nm or less can be used for the pixel 703 (g, h).
  • Pixels 703 (i, j) are supplied with a second selection signal during the period in which one image signal is held.
  • the pixel circuit 530G (i, j) holds one image signal
  • the pixel 703 (i, j) uses the light emitting element 550G (i, j) and is based on the image signal. , Can emit light (see FIG. 6).
  • the pixel circuit 530S ( i, j) are supplied with a second selection signal.
  • the intensity of the light emitted by the light emitting element 550G (i, j) can be controlled by using the image signal.
  • the subject can be irradiated with light having a controlled intensity.
  • the subject can be imaged using the photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j).
  • the subject can be imaged by using the photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j) while controlling the intensity of the emitted light.
  • Pixels 703 (i, j) are supplied with a third selection signal during the period in which one image signal is held. For example, until the pixel circuit 530G (i, j) acquires one image signal based on the first selection signal and is supplied with the first selection signal again, the pixel circuit 530S (i, j) j) is supplied with a second selection signal (see FIG. 6).
  • the functional panels that can be used in the information processing device of one aspect of the present invention include the conductive film TX (i), the conductive film VR, the conductive film RS (i), the conductive film VCP, the conductive film VPI, and the conductive film. It has a film WX (j) and a conductive film SE (i) (see FIG. 4A). Further, the conductive film TX (i) is supplied with a second selection signal, and the conductive film SE (i) is supplied with a third selection signal.
  • the pixel circuit 530S (i, j) includes a switch SW31, a switch SW32, a switch SW33, a transistor M31, a capacitance C31, and a node FD.
  • the switch SW31 has a potential of a first terminal electrically connected to the photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j), a second terminal electrically connected to the node FD, and a conductive film TX (i). Based on this, it has a function of controlling a conducting state or a non-conducting state.
  • the switch SW32 is in a conductive state or is based on the potential of the first terminal electrically connected to the node FD, the second terminal electrically connected to the conductive film VR, and the conductive film RS (i). It has a function to control the non-conducting state.
  • the capacitance C31 includes a conductive film that is electrically connected to the node FD and a conductive film that is electrically connected to the conductive film VCP.
  • the transistor M31 includes a gate electrode electrically connected to the node FD and a first electrode electrically connected to the conductive film VPI.
  • the switch SW33 is of the first terminal electrically connected to the second electrode of the transistor M31, the second terminal electrically connected to the conductive film WX (j), and the conductive film SE (i). It has a function of controlling a conductive state or a non-conducting state based on a potential.
  • the image pickup signal generated by the photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j) can be transferred to the node FD using the switch SW31.
  • the imaging signal generated by the photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j) can be stored in the node FD by using the switch SW31.
  • the switch SW31 can be used to bring the pixel circuit 530S (i, j) and the photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j) into a non-conducting state.
  • the correlated double sampling method can be applied.
  • the noise included in the image pickup signal can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to provide a new functional panel that is excellent in convenience, usefulness, or reliability.
  • the functional panels that can be used in the information processing apparatus of one aspect of the present invention include the conductive film G1 (i), the conductive film G2 (i), the conductive film S1g (j), and the conductive film S2g (j). It has a conductive film ANO (see FIG. 5). Further, the conductive film G1 (i) is supplied with a first selection signal. For example, an image signal can be supplied using the conductive film S1g (j). Alternatively, a signal supplied using the conductive film S2g (j) can be added to the signal supplied using the conductive film S1g (j). In addition, for example, the image signal can be supplied at 15.2 ⁇ s by using the conductive film S1 g (j). Alternatively, the conductive film S1g (j) and the conductive film S2g (j) can be used and supplied at 30.4 ⁇ s.
  • the pixel circuit 530G (i, j) includes a switch SW21, a switch SW22, a transistor M21, a capacitance C21, and a node N21.
  • the transistor M21 has a gate electrode electrically connected to the node N21, a first electrode electrically connected to the light emitting element 550G (i, j), and a second electrode electrically connected to the conductive film ANO.
  • the electrodes are provided.
  • the switch SW21 is based on the potential of the first terminal electrically connected to the node N21, the second terminal electrically connected to the conductive film S1g (j), and the conductive film G1 (i). It has a function to control the conducting state or the non-conducting state.
  • the switch SW22 has a function of controlling a conductive state or a non-conducting state based on the potential of the conductive film G2 (i) and the first terminal electrically connected to the conductive film S2g (j).
  • the capacitance C21 includes a conductive film that is electrically connected to the node N21 and a conductive film that is electrically connected to the second electrode of the switch SW22.
  • the image signal can be stored in the node N21.
  • the potential of the node N21 can be changed by using the switch SW22.
  • the intensity of the light emitted by the light emitting element 550G (i, j) can be controlled by using the potential of the node N21.
  • the functional panel that can be used in the information processing apparatus of one aspect of the present invention has a conductive film V0 (see FIG. 5).
  • the pixel circuit 530G (i, j) includes a switch SW23, a node N22, and a capacitance C22.
  • the switch SW23 is in a conductive state or not based on the potential of the first terminal electrically connected to the conductive film V0, the second terminal electrically connected to the node N22, and the conductive film G2 (i). It has a function to control the conduction state.
  • the capacitance C22 includes a conductive film that is electrically connected to the node N21 and a conductive film that is electrically connected to the node N22.
  • the first electrode of the transistor M21 is electrically connected to the node N22.
  • the functional panel that can be used in the information processing apparatus of one aspect of the present invention includes a readout circuit RC (j), a conductive film VLEN, a conductive film VIV, and a conductive film CL (FIGS. 3A and 4A, FIG. See FIGS. 4B and 4C).
  • the read-out circuit RC (j) includes an amplifier circuit and a sampling circuit SC (j) (see FIG. 3A).
  • the amplifier circuit includes a transistor M32 (j) (see FIG. 4B).
  • the transistor M32 (j) is electrically connected to the gate electrode electrically connected to the conductive film VLEN, the first electrode electrically connected to the conductive film WX (j), and the conductive film VIV. Provided with a second electrode.
  • the conductive film WX (j) connects the transistor M31 (j) and the transistor M32 (j) (see FIGS. 4A and 4B).
  • the source follower circuit can be configured by using the transistor M31 (j) and the transistor M32 (j).
  • the potential of the conductive film WX (j) can be changed based on the potential of the node FD.
  • the sampling circuit SC (j) includes a first terminal IN (j), a second terminal, and a third terminal OUT (j) (see FIG. 4C).
  • the first terminal is electrically connected to the conductive film WX (j), the second terminal is electrically connected to the conductive film CL, and the third terminal OUT (j) is the first terminal IN (j). It has a function of supplying a signal that changes based on the potential of.
  • the image pickup signal can be acquired from the pixel circuit 530S (i, j).
  • a correlated double sampling method can be applied.
  • a sampling circuit SC (j) can be provided for each conductive film WX (j).
  • the difference signal of the pixel circuit 530S (i, j) can be acquired for each conductive film WX (j).
  • the operating frequency of the sampling circuit SC (j) can be suppressed.
  • noise can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to provide a new functional panel that is excellent in convenience, usefulness, or reliability.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a functional panel that can be used in the information processing apparatus of one aspect of the present invention.
  • 7A is a top view illustrating the configuration of the functional panel
  • FIG. 7B is a diagram illustrating a part of FIG. 7A
  • FIG. 7C is a diagram illustrating another part of FIG. 7A.
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a functional panel that can be used in the information processing apparatus of one aspect of the present invention.
  • FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view taken along the cutting lines X1-X2, X3-X4, X9-X10, X11-X12 and pixels of FIG. 7A.
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a functional panel that can be used in the information processing apparatus of one aspect of the present invention.
  • 9A is a cross-sectional view of the pixel 702S (i, j) shown in FIG. 7B.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a functional panel that can be used in the information processing apparatus of one aspect of the present invention.
  • 10A is a cross-sectional view of the pixel 702G (i, j) shown in FIG. 7B.
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a functional panel that can be used in the information processing apparatus of one aspect of the present invention.
  • 11A is a cross-sectional view taken along the cutting lines X1-X2 and X3-X4 of FIG. 7A
  • FIG. 11B is a diagram illustrating a part of FIG. 11A.
  • the functional panel that can be used in the information processing apparatus of one aspect of the present invention has a functional layer 520 (see FIG. 8).
  • the functional layer 520 includes a pixel circuit 530G (i, j) and a pixel circuit 530S (i, j). Further, the functional layer 520 includes an opening 591G and an opening 591S.
  • the pixel circuit 530G (i, j) G is electrically connected to the light emitting element 550G (i, j) at the opening 591G (see FIG. 8). Further, the pixel circuit 530S (i, j) is electrically connected to the photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j) at the opening 591S.
  • the functional layer 520 includes a transistor M21 used in the pixel circuit 530G (i, j) (see FIGS. 5 and 10A). Further, the functional layer 520 includes a transistor used for the switch SW31 of the pixel circuit 530S (i, j) (see FIGS. 4A and 9A).
  • the pixel circuit 530G (i, j) and the pixel circuit 530S (i, j) can be formed on the functional layer 520.
  • the semiconductor film used for the pixel circuit 530G (i, j) can be formed.
  • the manufacturing process of the functional panel can be simplified. As a result, it is possible to provide a new functional panel that is excellent in convenience, usefulness, or reliability.
  • the functional layer 520 includes a drive circuit GD (see FIGS. 7A and 8).
  • the functional layer 520 includes, for example, a transistor MD used in the drive circuit GD (see FIGS. 8, 11A and 11B).
  • the functional layer 520 includes a drive circuit RD and a read circuit RC (see FIG. 8).
  • the semiconductor film used for the pixel circuit 530G (i, j)
  • the semiconductor film used for the drive circuit GD, the drive circuit RD, and the readout circuit RC can be formed.
  • the manufacturing process of the functional panel can be simplified. As a result, it is possible to provide a new functional panel that is excellent in convenience, usefulness, or reliability.
  • a bottom gate type transistor or a top gate type transistor can be used for the pixel circuit 530G (i, j).
  • a transistor can be used as a switch.
  • a bottom gate type transistor or a top gate type transistor can be used for the pixel circuit 530S (i, j).
  • a transistor can be used as a switch.
  • the transistor includes a semiconductor film 508, a conductive film 504, a conductive film 512A and a conductive film 512B (see FIG. 10B).
  • the transistor comprises a conductive film 512C and a conductive film 512D (see FIG. 11B).
  • the transistor comprises a conductive film 512E and a conductive film 512F (see FIG. 9B).
  • the semiconductor film 508 includes a region 508A electrically connected to the conductive film 512A and a region 508B electrically connected to the conductive film 512B.
  • the semiconductor film 508 includes a region 508C between the regions 508A and 508B.
  • the conductive film 504 includes a region overlapping the region 508C, and the conductive film 504 has a function of a gate electrode.
  • the insulating film 506 includes a region sandwiched between the semiconductor film 508 and the conductive film 504.
  • the insulating film 506 has the function of a gate insulating film.
  • the conductive film 512A has one of the functions of the source electrode and the function of the drain electrode, and the conductive film 512B has the function of the source electrode or the function of the drain electrode.
  • the conductive film 524 can be used for the transistor.
  • the conductive film 524 includes a region sandwiching the semiconductor film 508 with the conductive film 504.
  • the conductive film 524 has the function of a second gate electrode.
  • the semiconductor film used for the transistor of the pixel circuit In the step of forming the semiconductor film used for the transistor of the pixel circuit, the semiconductor film used for the transistor of the drive circuit can be formed.
  • a semiconductor containing a Group 14 element can be used for the semiconductor film 508.
  • a semiconductor containing silicon can be used for the semiconductor film 508.
  • Hydroated amorphous silicon can be used for the semiconductor film 508.
  • microcrystalline silicon or the like can be used for the semiconductor film 508. Thereby, for example, it is possible to provide a functional panel having less display unevenness than a functional panel using polysilicon for the semiconductor film 508. Alternatively, it is easy to increase the size of the functional panel.
  • polysilicon can be used for the semiconductor film 508.
  • the electric field effect mobility of the transistor can be made higher than that of the transistor using hydrogenated amorphous silicon for the semiconductor film 508.
  • the driving ability can be enhanced as compared with a transistor using hydrogenated amorphous silicon for the semiconductor film 508.
  • the aperture ratio of the pixel can be improved as compared with a transistor using hydrogenated amorphous silicon for the semiconductor film 508.
  • the reliability of the transistor can be improved as compared with a transistor using hydrogenated amorphous silicon for the semiconductor film 508.
  • the temperature required for manufacturing the transistor can be made lower than that of a transistor using, for example, single crystal silicon.
  • the semiconductor film used for the transistor of the drive circuit can be formed by the same process as the semiconductor film used for the transistor of the pixel circuit.
  • the drive circuit can be formed on the same substrate as the substrate on which the pixel circuit is formed. Alternatively, the number of parts constituting the electronic device can be reduced.
  • single crystal silicon can be used for the semiconductor film 508.
  • the definition can be improved as compared with the functional panel in which hydrogenated amorphous silicon is used for the semiconductor film 508.
  • smart glasses or head-mounted displays can be provided.
  • a metal oxide can be used for the semiconductor film 508.
  • the time during which the pixel circuit can hold the image signal can be lengthened as compared with the pixel circuit using a transistor using amorphous silicon as the semiconductor film.
  • the selection signal can be supplied at a frequency of less than 30 Hz, preferably less than 1 Hz, more preferably less than once a minute, while suppressing the occurrence of flicker.
  • the fatigue accumulated in the user of the information processing device can be reduced.
  • the power consumption associated with driving can be reduced.
  • the time during which the pixel circuit can hold an image pickup signal can be lengthened.
  • the second selection signal can be supplied at a frequency of less than 30 Hz, preferably less than 1 Hz, more preferably less than once a minute.
  • an oxide semiconductor can be used for the semiconductor film 508.
  • an oxide semiconductor containing indium or an oxide semiconductor containing indium, gallium, and zinc can be used for the semiconductor film 508.
  • a transistor whose leakage current in the off state is smaller than that of a transistor using amorphous silicon for the semiconductor film can be used.
  • a transistor using an oxide semiconductor as a semiconductor film can be used for a switch or the like.
  • the potential of the floating node can be maintained for a longer time than in a circuit using a transistor using amorphous silicon as a switch.
  • a film having a thickness of 25 nm containing indium, gallium, and zinc can be used for the semiconductor film 508.
  • a conductive film in which a film having a thickness of 10 nm containing tantalum and nitrogen and a film having a thickness of 300 nm containing copper is laminated can be used for the conductive film 504.
  • the copper-containing film includes a region sandwiching the tantalum and nitrogen-containing film between the copper-containing film and the insulating film 506.
  • a laminated film in which a film having a thickness of 400 nm containing silicon and nitrogen and a film having a thickness of 200 nm containing silicon, oxygen and nitrogen are laminated can be used as the insulating film 506.
  • the film containing silicon and nitrogen includes a region sandwiching the film containing silicon, oxygen and nitrogen between the film and the semiconductor film 508.
  • a conductive film in which a film having a thickness of 50 nm containing tungsten, a film having a thickness of 400 nm containing aluminum, and a film having a thickness of 100 nm containing titanium are laminated in this order is formed on the conductive film 512A or 512B.
  • the film containing tungsten includes a region in contact with the semiconductor film 508.
  • a bottom gate type transistor manufacturing line using amorphous silicon for a semiconductor can be easily modified into a bottom gate type transistor manufacturing line using an oxide semiconductor for a semiconductor.
  • a manufacturing line for a top gate type transistor using polysilicon as a semiconductor can be easily modified into a manufacturing line for a top gate type transistor using an oxide semiconductor for a semiconductor. Both modifications can make effective use of existing production lines.
  • a compound semiconductor can be used as a semiconductor of a transistor.
  • a semiconductor containing gallium arsenide can be used.
  • an organic semiconductor can be used as a semiconductor of a transistor.
  • an organic semiconductor containing polyacenes or graphene can be used for the semiconductor film.
  • the capacitance includes one conductive film, another conductive film and an insulating film.
  • the insulating film includes a region sandwiched between one conductive film and another conductive film.
  • the conductive film 504, the conductive film 512A, and the insulating film 506 can be used for the capacitance.
  • the functional layer 520 includes an insulating film 521, an insulating film 518, an insulating film 516, an insulating film 506, an insulating film 501C, and the like (see FIG. 10A).
  • the insulating film 521 includes a region sandwiched between the pixel circuit 530G (i, j) and the light emitting element 550G (i, j).
  • the insulating film 518 includes a region sandwiched between the insulating film 521 and the insulating film 501C.
  • the insulating film 516 includes a region sandwiched between the insulating film 518 and the insulating film 501C.
  • the insulating film 506 includes a region sandwiched between the insulating film 516 and the insulating film 501C.
  • Insulating film 521 For example, an insulating inorganic material, an insulating organic material, or an insulating composite material containing the inorganic material and the organic material can be used for the insulating film 521.
  • an inorganic oxide film, an inorganic nitride film, an inorganic nitride film, or a laminated material selected from these and laminated with a plurality of laminated materials can be used for the insulating film 521.
  • a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, a silicon nitride film, an aluminum oxide film, or a film containing a laminated material selected from these can be used as the insulating film 521.
  • the silicon nitride film is a dense film and has an excellent function of suppressing the diffusion of impurities.
  • polyester, polyolefin, polyamide, polyimide, polycarbonate, polysiloxane, acrylic resin, etc., or a laminated material or a composite material of a plurality of resins selected from these can be used for the insulating film 521. Further, it may be formed by using a material having photosensitivity. As a result, the insulating film 521 can flatten, for example, steps derived from various structures overlapping the insulating film 521.
  • polyimide has excellent properties as compared with other organic materials in properties such as thermal stability, insulating property, toughness, low dielectric constant, low coefficient of thermal expansion, and chemical resistance.
  • polyimide can be particularly preferably used for the insulating film 521 and the like.
  • a film formed by using a photosensitive material can be used for the insulating film 521.
  • a film formed by using photosensitive polyimide, photosensitive acrylic resin, or the like can be used as the insulating film 521.
  • Insulating film 518 For example, a material that can be used for the insulating film 521 can be used for the insulating film 518.
  • a material having a function of suppressing diffusion of oxygen, hydrogen, water, alkali metal, alkaline earth metal and the like can be used for the insulating film 518.
  • a nitride insulating film can be used for the insulating film 518.
  • silicon nitride, silicon nitride, aluminum nitride, aluminum nitride and the like can be used for the insulating film 518. This makes it possible to suppress the diffusion of impurities into the semiconductor film of the transistor.
  • Insulating film 516 For example, a material that can be used for the insulating film 521 can be used for the insulating film 516.
  • a film having a manufacturing method different from that of the insulating film 518 can be used for the insulating film 516.
  • Insulating film 506 For example, a material that can be used for the insulating film 521 can be used for the insulating film 506.
  • a film containing a lanthanum oxide film, a cerium oxide film or a neodymium oxide film can be used for the insulating film 506.
  • the insulating film 501D includes a region sandwiched between the insulating film 501C and the insulating film 516.
  • a material that can be used for the insulating film 506 can be used for the insulating film 501D.
  • Insulating film 501C For example, a material that can be used for the insulating film 521 can be used for the insulating film 501C. Specifically, a material containing silicon and oxygen can be used for the insulating film 501C. This makes it possible to suppress the diffusion of impurities into the pixel circuit, the light emitting element, the photoelectric conversion element, or the like.
  • the functional layer 520 includes conductive films, wiring and terminals.
  • a conductive material can be used for wiring, electrodes, terminals, conductive films and the like.
  • an inorganic conductive material, an organic conductive material, a metal, a conductive ceramic, or the like can be used for wiring or the like.
  • metal elements selected from aluminum, gold, platinum, silver, copper, chromium, tantalum, titanium, molybdenum, tungsten, nickel, iron, cobalt, palladium or manganese can be used for wiring and the like. ..
  • the above-mentioned alloy containing a metal element or the like can be used for wiring or the like.
  • an alloy of copper and manganese is suitable for microfabrication using a wet etching method.
  • a two-layer structure in which a titanium film is laminated on an aluminum film a two-layer structure in which a titanium film is laminated on a titanium nitride film, a two-layer structure in which a tungsten film is laminated on a titanium nitride film, a tantalum nitride film or
  • a two-layer structure in which a tungsten film is laminated on a tungsten nitride film, a titanium film, and a three-layer structure in which an aluminum film is laminated on the titanium film and a titanium film is further formed on the titanium film can be used for wiring or the like. ..
  • conductive oxides such as indium oxide, indium tin oxide, indium zinc oxide, zinc oxide, and zinc oxide added with gallium can be used for wiring and the like.
  • a film containing graphene or graphite can be used for wiring or the like.
  • a graphene-containing film can be formed by forming a film containing graphene oxide and reducing the film containing graphene oxide.
  • Examples of the method of reduction include a method of applying heat and a method of using a reducing agent.
  • a film containing metal nanowires can be used for wiring and the like.
  • nanowires containing silver can be used.
  • a conductive polymer can be used for wiring and the like.
  • the conductive material ACF1 can be used to electrically connect the terminal 519B to the flexible printed circuit board FPC1 (see FIG. 8).
  • the conductive material CP can be used to electrically connect the terminal 519B to the flexible printed circuit board FPC1.
  • the functional panel 700 includes a base material 510, a base material 770, and a sealing material 705 (see FIG. 10A).
  • Base material 510, base material 770 >> A material having translucency can be used for the base material 510 or the base material 770.
  • a flexible material can be used for the base material 510 or the base material 770. Thereby, it is possible to provide a functional panel having flexibility.
  • a material having a thickness of 0.1 mm or more and 0.7 mm or less can be used.
  • a material polished to a thickness of about 0.1 mm can be used. Thereby, the weight can be reduced.
  • glass substrates of the 6th generation (1500 mm ⁇ 1850 mm), the 7th generation (1870 mm ⁇ 2200 mm), the 8th generation (2200 mm ⁇ 2400 mm), the 9th generation (2400 mm ⁇ 2800 mm), the 10th generation (2950 mm ⁇ 3400 mm), etc. can be used for the base material 510 or the base material 770. As a result, a large display device can be manufactured.
  • An organic material, an inorganic material, or a composite material such as an organic material and an inorganic material can be used for the base material 510 or the base material 770.
  • inorganic materials such as glass, ceramics, and metal can be used.
  • non-alkali glass, soda lime glass, potash glass, crystal glass, aluminosilicate glass, tempered glass, chemically tempered glass, quartz, sapphire and the like can be used for the base material 510 or the base material 770.
  • aluminosilicate glass, tempered glass, chemically tempered glass, sapphire, or the like can be suitably used for the base material 510 or the base material 770 arranged closer to the user of the functional panel. As a result, it is possible to prevent the functional panel from being damaged or scratched due to use.
  • an inorganic oxide film, an inorganic nitride film, an inorganic oxynitride film, or the like can be used.
  • a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, a silicon nitride film, an aluminum oxide film, or the like can be used.
  • Stainless steel, aluminum and the like can be used for the base material 510 or the base material 770.
  • a single crystal semiconductor substrate made of silicon or silicon carbide, a polycrystalline semiconductor substrate, a compound semiconductor substrate such as silicon germanium, an SOI substrate, or the like can be used as the base material 510 or the base material 770.
  • the semiconductor element can be formed on the base material 510 or the base material 770.
  • an organic material such as resin, resin film or plastic can be used for the base material 510 or the base material 770.
  • a material containing a resin having a siloxane bond such as polyester, polyolefin, polyamide (nylon, aramid, etc.), polyimide, polycarbonate, polyurethane or acrylic resin, epoxy resin or silicone is used as the base material 510 or the base material 770.
  • a resin film, a resin plate, a laminated material, or the like containing these materials can be used. Thereby, the weight can be reduced. Alternatively, for example, the frequency of occurrence of damage due to dropping can be reduced.
  • PET polyethylene terephthalate
  • PEN polyethylene naphthalate
  • PES polyether sulfone
  • COP cycloolefin polymer
  • COC cycloolefin copolymer
  • a composite material obtained by laminating a film such as a metal plate, a thin glass plate, or an inorganic material and a resin film or the like can be used for the base material 510 or the base material 770.
  • a composite material in which a fibrous or particulate metal, glass, or an inorganic material is dispersed in a resin can be used for the base material 510 or the base material 770.
  • a composite material in which a fibrous or particulate resin or an organic material is dispersed in an inorganic material can be used for the base material 510 or the base material 770.
  • a single-layer material or a material in which a plurality of layers are laminated can be used for the base material 510 or the base material 770.
  • a material in which an insulating film or the like is laminated can be used.
  • a material in which one or more films selected from a silicon oxide layer, a silicon nitride layer, a silicon nitride layer, and the like are laminated can be used. This makes it possible to prevent the diffusion of impurities contained in the base material, for example. Alternatively, it is possible to prevent the diffusion of impurities contained in the glass or resin. Alternatively, it is possible to prevent the diffusion of impurities that permeate the resin.
  • paper, wood or the like can be used for the base material 510 or the base material 770.
  • a material having heat resistance sufficient to withstand the heat treatment during the manufacturing process can be used for the base material 510 or the base material 770.
  • a material having heat resistance to heat applied during the manufacturing process of directly forming a transistor, a capacitance, or the like can be used for the base material 510 or the base material 770.
  • an insulating film, a transistor, a capacitance, or the like is formed on a process substrate having heat resistance to heat applied during the manufacturing process, and the formed insulating film, the transistor, the capacitance, or the like is applied to, for example, the substrate 510 or the substrate 770.
  • a method of translocation can be used.
  • an insulating film, a transistor, a capacitance, or the like can be formed on a flexible substrate.
  • the sealing material 705 includes a region sandwiched between the functional layer 520 and the base material 770, and has a function of bonding the functional layer 520 and the base material 770 (see FIG. 10A).
  • An inorganic material, an organic material, a composite material of an inorganic material and an organic material, or the like can be used for the sealing material 705.
  • an organic material such as a heat-meltable resin or a curable resin can be used for the sealing material 705.
  • organic materials such as reaction curable adhesives, photocurable adhesives, thermosetting adhesives and / and anaerobic adhesives can be used for the encapsulant 705.
  • PVC polyvinyl chloride
  • PVB polyvinyl chloride
  • EVA ethylene vinyl acetate
  • the functional panel 700 includes a functional layer 720 (see FIG. 10A). Further, the functional panel 700 includes a structure KB and the like.
  • the functional layer 720 includes a light-shielding film BM and an insulating film 771.
  • the light-shielding film BM is provided with an opening in a region overlapping the pixels 702G (i, j). Further, the light-shielding film BM is provided with an opening in a region overlapping the pixels 702S (i, j). For example, a dark-colored material can be used for the light-shielding film BM. Thereby, the contrast of the display can be improved.
  • the insulating film 771 includes a region sandwiched between the base material 770 and the light-shielding film BM.
  • the structure KB comprises a region sandwiched between the functional layer 520 and the substrate 770. Further, the structure KB has a function of providing a predetermined gap between the functional layer 520 and the base material 770.
  • the functional panel 700 includes a functional film 770P and the like (see FIG. 10A).
  • the functional film 770P includes a region that overlaps with the light emitting element 550G (i, j).
  • an antireflection film, a polarizing film, a retardation film, a light diffusing film, a condensing film and the like can be used for the functional film 770P.
  • an antireflection film having a thickness of 1 ⁇ m or less can be used for the functional film 770P.
  • a laminated film in which three or more layers, preferably five or more layers, and more preferably 15 or more layers of dielectrics are laminated can be used for the functional film 770P.
  • the reflectance can be suppressed to 0.5% or less, preferably 0.08% or less.
  • a circularly polarizing film can be used for the functional film 770P.
  • an antistatic film that suppresses the adhesion of dust a water-repellent film that makes it difficult for dirt to adhere, an oil-repellent film that makes it difficult for dirt to adhere, an antireflection film (anti-reflection film), and a non-glare treatment film (anti).
  • a glare film), a hard coat film that suppresses the occurrence of scratches due to use, a self-healing film that repairs the generated scratches, and the like can be used for the functional film 770P.
  • the functional panel 700 has an insulating film 528 and an insulating film 573 (see FIG. 10A).
  • Insulation film 528 has a region sandwiched between the functional layer 520 and the base material 770, and the insulating film 528 has an opening in a region overlapping the light emitting element 550G (i, j) (see FIG. 10A).
  • a material that can be used for the insulating film 521 can be used for the insulating film 528.
  • a silicon oxide film, a film containing an acrylic resin, a film containing polyimide, or the like can be used for the insulating film 528.
  • the insulating film 573 includes a region sandwiching the light emitting element 550G (i, j) between the insulating film 573 and the functional layer 520 (see FIG. 10A).
  • the insulating film 573 is formed by laminating an insulating film 573A that can form the light emitting element 550G (i, j) in a manner that is not easily damaged and a dense insulating film 573B that has few defects. Can be used. As a result, the diffusion of impurities into the light emitting element 550G (i, j) can be suppressed. Alternatively, the reliability of the light emitting element 550G (i, j) can be improved.
  • ⁇ Configuration Example 2 of Light Emitting Element 550G (i, j) An organic electroluminescence element, an inorganic electroluminescence element, a light emitting diode, a QDLED (Quantum Dot LED), or the like can be used for the light emitting element 550G (i, j) (see FIG. 10A).
  • a layer 553G (j) containing an electrode 551G (i, j), an electrode 552, and a luminescent material can be used for the light emitting element 550G (i, j).
  • the layer 553G (j) containing the luminescent material includes a region sandwiched between the electrodes 551G (i, j) and the electrodes 552.
  • the laminated material can be used for layer 553G (j) containing a luminescent material.
  • a material that emits blue light, a material that emits green light, a material that emits red light, a material that emits infrared rays, or a material that emits ultraviolet rays can be used for the layer 553G (j) containing a luminescent material. ..
  • a plurality of materials that emit light having different hues can be used for the layer 553G (j) containing the luminescent material.
  • a laminated material obtained by laminating a layer containing a luminescent material containing a fluorescent material that emits blue light and a layer containing a material other than the fluorescent material that emits yellow light is used as a layer 553G containing the luminescent material. It can be used in (j).
  • a colored film CF can be superposed on the layer 553G (j) containing a luminescent material. As a result, light having a predetermined hue can be extracted from the white light.
  • Configuration Example 3 of Layer 553G (j) Containing Luminescent Material For example, a laminated material laminated so as to emit blue light or ultraviolet rays can be used for the layer 553G (j) containing a luminescent material. Further, for example, the color conversion layers CC can be stacked and used.
  • the layer 553G (j) containing the luminescent material comprises a luminescent unit.
  • the light emitting unit includes one region in which an electron injected from one side recombines with a hole injected from the other side. Further, the light emitting unit includes a light emitting material, and the light emitting material emits energy generated by recombination of electrons and holes as light.
  • the hole transport layer and the electron transport layer can be used for the light emitting unit.
  • the hole transport layer is arranged on the positive electrode side of the electron transport layer, and the hole transport layer has higher hole mobility than the electron transport layer.
  • a plurality of light emitting units and an intermediate layer can be used for the layer 553G (j) containing a light emitting material.
  • the intermediate layer comprises a region sandwiched between the two light emitting units.
  • the intermediate layer has a charge generation region, and the intermediate layer has a function of supplying holes to a light emitting unit arranged on the cathode side and supplying electrons to a light emitting unit arranged on the anode side.
  • a configuration including a plurality of light emitting units and an intermediate layer may be referred to as a tandem type light emitting element.
  • the current efficiency related to light emission can be increased.
  • the current density flowing through the light emitting element can be reduced at the same brightness.
  • the reliability of the light emitting element can be improved.
  • a light emitting unit containing a material that emits light of one hue can be superposed on a light emitting unit that contains a material that emits light of another hue, and can be used for the layer 553G (j) containing the light emitting material.
  • a light emitting unit containing a material that emits light of one hue can be superposed on a light emitting unit that contains a material that emits light of the same hue, and can be used for the layer 553G (j) containing the light emitting material.
  • two light emitting units containing a material that emits blue light can be used in an overlapping manner.
  • a polymer compound oligomer, dendrimer, polymer, etc.
  • a medium molecular compound a compound in the intermediate region between a small molecule and a polymer: a compound having a molecular weight of 400 or more and 4000 or less
  • a polymer compound oligomer, dendrimer, polymer, etc.
  • a medium molecular compound a compound in the intermediate region between a small molecule and a polymer: a compound having a molecular weight of 400 or more and 4000 or less
  • Electrode 551G (i, j), Electrode 552 For example, a material that can be used for wiring or the like can be used for the electrode 551G (i, j) or the electrode 552. Specifically, a material having translucency with respect to visible light can be used for the electrode 551G (i, j) or the electrode 552.
  • a conductive oxide or a conductive oxide containing indium, indium oxide, indium tin oxide, indium zinc oxide, zinc oxide, zinc oxide added with gallium, or the like can be used.
  • a metal film thin enough to transmit light can be used.
  • a material having translucency for visible light can be used.
  • a metal film that transmits a part of light and reflects another part of light can be used for the electrode 551G (i, j) or the electrode 552.
  • a layer 553G (j) containing a luminescent material is used to adjust the distance between the electrodes 551G (i, j) and the electrodes 552.
  • the microcavity structure can be provided in the light emitting element 550G (i, j).
  • light having a predetermined wavelength can be extracted more efficiently than other light.
  • light with a narrow half width of the spectrum can be extracted.
  • brightly colored light can be extracted.
  • a film that efficiently reflects light can be used for the electrode 551G (i, j) or the electrode 552.
  • a material containing silver, palladium, or the like or a material containing silver, copper, or the like can be used for the metal film.
  • the electrode 551G (i, j) is electrically connected to the pixel circuit 530G (i, j) at the opening 591G (see FIG. 9A).
  • the electrode 551G (i, j) overlaps with, for example, an opening formed in the insulating film 528, and the electrode 551G (i, j) has an insulating film 528 on the peripheral edge thereof.
  • the photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j) includes an electrode 551S (i, j), an electrode 552, and a layer 553S (j) containing a photoelectric conversion material (see FIG. 9A).
  • a heterojunction type photoelectric conversion element for example, a heterojunction type photoelectric conversion element, a bulk heterojunction type photoelectric conversion element, or the like can be used for the photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j).
  • a laminated film in which a p-type semiconductor film and an n-type semiconductor film are laminated so as to be in contact with each other can be used for the layer 553S (j) containing a photoelectric conversion material.
  • the photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j) that uses a laminated film having such a structure on the layer 553S (j) containing the photoelectric conversion material can be called a PN-type photodiode.
  • the photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j) that uses a laminated film having such a structure on the layer 553S (j) containing the photoelectric conversion material can be called a PIN type photodiode.
  • a p-type semiconductor film is sandwiched between a p + type semiconductor film and an n-type semiconductor film, and a p-type semiconductor film is sandwiched between the p-type semiconductor film and the n-type semiconductor film.
  • a laminated film obtained by laminating a p + type semiconductor film, a p-type semiconductor film, a p-type semiconductor film, and an n-type semiconductor film can be used for the layer 553S (j) containing a photoelectric conversion material.
  • a photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j) using a laminated film having such a structure on a layer 553S (j) containing a photoelectric conversion material can be called an avalanche photodiode.
  • a semiconductor containing a Group 14 element can be used for layer 553S (j) containing a photoelectric conversion material.
  • a semiconductor containing silicon can be used for the layer 553S (j) containing a photoelectric conversion material.
  • hydrogenated amorphous silicon, microcrystalline silicon, polysilicon, single crystal silicon, or the like can be used for layer 553S (j) containing a photoelectric conversion material.
  • an organic semiconductor can be used for layer 553S (j) containing a photoelectric conversion material.
  • a part of the layer used for the layer 553G (j) containing a luminescent material can be used as a part of the layer 553S (j) containing a photoelectric conversion material.
  • the hole transport layer and the electron transport layer used for the layer 553G (j) containing the luminescent material can be used for the layer 553S (j) containing the photoelectric conversion material.
  • the manufacturing process can be simplified.
  • an electron-accepting organic semiconductor material such as fullerene (for example, C 60 , C 70, etc.) or a derivative thereof can be used for the n-type semiconductor film.
  • an electron-donating organic semiconductor material such as copper (II) phthalocyanine (CuPc) or tetraphenyldibenzoperiflanthene (DBP) can be used for the p-type semiconductor film. ..
  • a film in which an electron-accepting semiconductor material and an electron-donating semiconductor material are co-deposited can be used as an i-type semiconductor film.
  • Region 231 includes a group of pixels 703 (i, 1) to 703 (i, n) and another group of pixels 703 (1, j) to 703 (m, j) (see FIG. 3A).
  • the group of pixels 703 (i, 1) to 703 (i, n) are arranged in the row direction (the direction indicated by the arrow R1 in the drawing), and the group of pixels 703 (i, 1) to 703 (i). , N) include pixels 703 (i, j).
  • the conductive film G1 (i) is electrically connected to the group of pixels 703 (i, 1) to 703 (i, n), and the group of pixels 703 (i, 1) to 703 (i, n) is electrically connected.
  • n) is electrically connected to the conductive film TX (i).
  • the other group of pixels 703 (1, j) to 703 (m, j) are arranged in the column direction (direction indicated by the arrow C1 in the figure) intersecting the row direction, and the other group of pixels 703 ( 1, j) to pixel 703 (m, j) includes pixel 703 (i, j).
  • the other group of pixels 703 (1, j) to 703 (m, j) are electrically connected to the conductive film S1g (j), and the other group of pixels 703 (1, j) to pixel 703 are electrically connected to each other.
  • (M, j) is electrically connected to the conductive film WX (j).
  • imaging information can be acquired from a plurality of pixels.
  • image information can be supplied to a plurality of pixels.
  • Region 231 comprises region 231 (1) and region 231 (1) comprises pixels 703 (g, h) (see FIGS. 1A and 7A).
  • Pixel 703 includes a light emitting element 550 (1) (see FIGS. 2C and 2D). Specifically, a pixel including a pixel 702B (g, h) displaying blue, a pixel 702G (g, h) displaying green, a pixel 702R (g, h) displaying red, and a light emitting element 550 (1). 702N (g, h) can be used for pixel 703 (g, h) (see FIGS. 2C and 7C).
  • the functional panel that can be used in the information processing apparatus of one aspect of the present invention includes a multiplexer MUX, an amplifier circuit AMP, and an analog-to-digital conversion circuit ADC (see FIG. 3A).
  • the multiplexer MUX has a function of selecting one from a plurality of sampling circuits SC (j) to acquire an imaging signal and supplying it to, for example, an amplifier circuit AMP.
  • the amplifier circuit AMP can amplify the image pickup signal and supply it to the analog-to-digital conversion circuit ADC.
  • the functional layer 520 includes a multiplexer MUX and an amplifier circuit AMP.
  • the semiconductor film used for the pixel circuit 530G (i, j)
  • the semiconductor film used for the multiplexer MUX and the amplifier circuit AMP can be formed.
  • the manufacturing process of the functional panel can be simplified. As a result, it is possible to provide a new functional panel that is excellent in convenience, usefulness, or reliability.
  • the analog-to-digital conversion circuit ADC has a function of converting an analog imaging signal into a digital signal.
  • FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a display device according to an aspect of the present invention.
  • 12A is a block diagram of the display device of one aspect of the present invention
  • FIGS. 12B to 12D are projection views illustrating the appearance of the display device of one aspect of the present invention.
  • the display device described in this embodiment includes a function panel 700 and a control unit 238 (see FIG. 12A).
  • the control unit 238 is supplied with the image information VI and the control information CI.
  • a clock signal, a timing signal, or the like can be used for the control information CI.
  • the control unit 238 generates information V11 based on the image information VI, and generates a control signal based on the control information CI. Further, the control unit 238 supplies the information V11 and the control signal.
  • the information V11 includes a gradation of 8 bits or more, preferably 12 bits or more.
  • a clock signal or a start pulse of a shift register used in a drive circuit can be used as a control signal.
  • the decompression circuit 234 has a function of decompressing the image information VI supplied in a compressed state.
  • the extension circuit 234 includes a storage unit.
  • the storage unit has, for example, a function of storing the stretched image information.
  • the image processing circuit 235 includes, for example, a storage area.
  • the storage area has, for example, a function of storing information included in the image information VI.
  • the image processing circuit 235 has, for example, a function of correcting the image information VI based on a predetermined characteristic curve to generate information V11 and a function of supplying information V11.
  • the functional panel 700 is supplied with information V11 and control signals.
  • the functional panel 700 described in the second embodiment or the third embodiment can be used.
  • Pixels 703 (i, j) emit light based on the information V11. Pixels 703 (g, h) also emit light based on the information V11.
  • the image information can be used to emit light from the light emitting element 550 (1).
  • a smart watch see FIG. 12B
  • a video monitor see FIG. 12C
  • a notebook computer see FIG. 12D
  • the like can be provided.
  • the functional panel 700 includes a drive circuit and a control circuit (see FIG. 12A).
  • the drive circuit operates based on the control signal. By using the control signal, the operations of a plurality of drive circuits can be synchronized.
  • the drive circuit GD can be used for the functional panel 700.
  • the drive circuit GD has a function of supplying a control signal and supplying a first selection signal.
  • the drive circuit SD can be used for the function panel 700.
  • the drive circuit SD is supplied with a control signal and information V11, and can supply an image signal.
  • the drive circuit RD can be used for the function panel 700.
  • the drive circuit RD is supplied with a control signal and can supply a second selection signal.
  • the read circuit RC can be used for the function panel 700.
  • the read-out circuit RC is supplied with a control signal, and for example, an image pickup signal can be read out by using a correlated double sampling method.
  • Control circuit 243 has a function of generating and supplying a control signal.
  • a clock signal, a timing signal, or the like can be used as a control signal.
  • control circuit formed on the rigid substrate can be used for the functional panel.
  • flexible printed circuit board can be used to electrically connect the control circuit formed on the rigid substrate to the control unit 238.
  • Control circuit 233 For example, a timing controller can be used in the control circuit 233.
  • FIG. 13 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of an input / output device according to an aspect of the present invention.
  • the input / output device described in this embodiment includes an input unit 240 and a display unit 230 (see FIG. 13).
  • the display unit 230 includes a functional panel.
  • the functional panel 700 according to the second or third embodiment can be used for the display unit 230.
  • the configuration having the input unit 240 and the display unit 230 can be referred to as an input / output panel 700TP.
  • the input unit 240 includes a detection area 241.
  • the input unit 240 has a function of detecting an object close to the detection area 241.
  • the detection area 241 includes an area that overlaps with the pixel 703 (i, j).
  • the position information can be input by using a finger or the like close to the display unit as the pointer.
  • the position information can be associated with the image information displayed on the display unit.
  • the detection area 241 includes, for example, one or more detectors.
  • the detection area 241 includes a group of detectors 802 (g, 1) to 802 (g, q) and another group of detectors 802 (1, h) to 802 (p, h).
  • g is an integer of 1 or more and p or less
  • h is an integer of 1 or more and q or less
  • p and q are integers of 1 or more.
  • the group of detectors 802 (g, 1) to 802 (g, q) includes the detectors 802 (g, h) and are arranged in the row direction (direction indicated by arrow R2 in the drawing).
  • the direction indicated by the arrow R2 may be the same as or different from the direction indicated by the arrow R1.
  • Another group of detectors 802 (1, h) to 802 (p, h) includes the detector 802 (g, h), and the column direction intersecting the row direction (arrow C2 in the figure). It is arranged in the direction shown).
  • the detector has a function of detecting a nearby pointer.
  • a finger, a stylus pen, or the like can be used as a pointer.
  • a metal piece, a coil, or the like can be used for the stylus pen.
  • a capacitance type proximity sensor an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor, an optical type proximity sensor, a resistance film type proximity sensor, and the like can be used as the detector.
  • a plurality of types of detectors can be used together.
  • a detector that detects a finger and a detector that detects a stylus pen can be used together.
  • the detection information can be associated with the gesture.
  • the detection information can be associated with the drawing process.
  • a finger can be detected by using a capacitance type, pressure sensitive type or optical type proximity sensor.
  • the stylus pen can be detected by using an electromagnetic induction type or an optical type proximity sensor.
  • the input unit 240 includes an oscillation circuit OSC and a detection circuit DC (see FIG. 13).
  • the oscillation circuit OSC supplies the search signal to the detector 802 (g, h).
  • a square wave, a sawtooth wave, a triangular wave, a sine wave, or the like can be used as a search signal.
  • the detector 802 (g, h) generates and supplies a detection signal that changes based on the distance to the pointer close to the detector 802 (g, h) and the search signal.
  • the detection circuit DC supplies input information based on the detection signal.
  • the distance from the adjacent pointer to the detection area 241 can be detected.
  • the position where the pointer is closest to the detection area 241 can be detected.
  • FIG. 14A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of an information processing device according to an aspect of the present invention.
  • 14B and 14C are projection views illustrating an example of the appearance of the information processing apparatus.
  • FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a program of one aspect of the present invention.
  • FIG. 15A is a flowchart illustrating the main processing of the program of one aspect of the present invention
  • FIG. 15B is a flowchart illustrating interrupt processing.
  • FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a program of one aspect of the present invention.
  • FIG. 16A is a flowchart illustrating interrupt processing of the program of one aspect of the present invention.
  • FIG. 16B is a schematic diagram illustrating the operation of the information processing apparatus
  • FIG. 16C is a timing chart illustrating the operation of the information processing apparatus according to one aspect of the present invention.
  • the information processing device described in this embodiment includes an arithmetic unit 210 and an input / output device 220 (see FIG. 14A).
  • the input / output device 220 is electrically connected to the arithmetic unit 210.
  • the information processing device 200 can include a housing (see FIGS. 14B and 14C).
  • the arithmetic unit 210 is supplied with the input information II or the detection information DS.
  • the arithmetic unit 210 generates the control information CI and the image information VI based on the input information II or the detection information DS, and supplies the control information CI and the image information VI.
  • the arithmetic unit 210 includes an arithmetic unit 211 and a storage unit 212. Further, the arithmetic unit 210 includes a transmission line 214 and an input / output interface 215.
  • the transmission line 214 is electrically connected to the arithmetic unit 211, the storage unit 212, and the input / output interface 215.
  • the calculation unit 211 has, for example, a function of executing a program.
  • the storage unit 212 has a function of storing, for example, a program, initial information, setting information, an image, or the like executed by the calculation unit 211.
  • a hard disk, a flash memory, a memory using a transistor including an oxide semiconductor, or the like can be used.
  • the input / output interface 215 includes terminals or wiring, and has a function of supplying information and being supplied with information. For example, it can be electrically connected to the transmission line 214. Further, it can be electrically connected to the input / output device 220.
  • the transmission line 214 includes wiring, supplies information, and has a function of being supplied with information. For example, it can be electrically connected to the input / output interface 215. Further, it can be electrically connected to the calculation unit 211, the storage unit 212, or the input / output interface 215.
  • the input / output device 220 supplies the input information II and the detection information DS.
  • the input / output device 220 is supplied with the control information CI and the image information VI (see FIG. 14A).
  • keyboard scan code, position information, button operation information, voice information, image information, and the like can be used as input information II.
  • illuminance information, attitude information, acceleration information, orientation information, pressure information, temperature information, humidity information, etc. of the environment in which the information processing apparatus 200 is used can be used for the detection information DS.
  • a signal for controlling the brightness, a signal for controlling the saturation, and a signal for controlling the hue for displaying the image information VI can be used for the control information CI.
  • a signal that changes the display of a part of the image information VI can be used for the control information CI.
  • the input / output device 220 includes a display unit 230, an input unit 240, and a detection unit 250.
  • the input / output device described in the fifth embodiment can be used for the input / output device 220.
  • the input / output device 220 can include a communication unit 290.
  • the display unit 230 displays the image information VI based on the control information CI.
  • the display unit 230 includes a control unit 238, a drive circuit GD, a drive circuit SD, and a function panel 700 (see FIG. 12).
  • the display device described in the fourth embodiment can be used for the display unit 230.
  • the input unit 240 generates the input information II.
  • the input unit 240 has a function of supplying position information P1.
  • a human interface or the like can be used for the input unit 240 (see FIG. 14A).
  • a keyboard, mouse, touch sensor, microphone, camera, or the like can be used for the input unit 240.
  • a touch sensor having an area overlapping the display unit 230 can be used.
  • An input / output device including a touch sensor having an area overlapping the display unit 230 and the display unit 230 can be referred to as a touch panel or a touch screen.
  • the user can make various gestures (tap, drag, swipe, pinch-in, etc.) by using the finger touching the touch panel as a pointer.
  • various gestures tap, drag, swipe, pinch-in, etc.
  • the arithmetic unit 210 analyzes information such as the position or locus of a finger in contact with the touch panel, and when the analysis result satisfies a predetermined condition, it can be assumed that a predetermined gesture is supplied. As a result, the user can supply a predetermined operation command associated with the predetermined gesture in advance by using the gesture.
  • the user can supply a "scroll command" for changing the display position of image information by using a gesture of moving a finger touching the touch panel along the touch panel.
  • the user can supply a "drag command” for pulling out and displaying the navigation panel NP at the end of the area 231 by using a gesture of moving a finger in contact with the end of the area 231 (see FIG. 14C).
  • the user strongly presses the "leaf-through command” that displays the index image IND, the thumbnail image TN of a part of another page or the thumbnail image TN of another page on the navigation panel NP in a predetermined order.
  • it can be supplied using the pressure of pressing a finger.
  • the pages of the electronic book terminal can be turned like the pages of a paper book.
  • a predetermined page can be searched by relying on the thumbnail image TN or the index image IND.
  • the detection unit 250 generates the detection information DS.
  • the detection unit 250 has a function of detecting the illuminance of the environment in which the information processing device 200 is used, and has a function of supplying illuminance information.
  • the detection unit 250 has a function of detecting the surrounding state and supplying the detection information. Specifically, illuminance information, attitude information, acceleration information, orientation information, pressure information, temperature information, humidity information and the like can be supplied.
  • a photodetector for example, a photodetector, an attitude detector, an acceleration sensor, an orientation sensor, a GPS (Global positioning System) signal receiving circuit, a pressure sensitive switch, a pressure sensor, a temperature sensor, a humidity sensor, a camera, or the like can be used for the detection unit 250. it can.
  • GPS Global positioning System
  • the communication unit 290 has a function of supplying information to the network and acquiring information from the network.
  • the housing has a function of accommodating the input / output device 220 or the arithmetic unit 210.
  • the housing has a function of supporting the display unit 230 or the arithmetic unit 210.
  • control information can be generated based on the input information or the detection information.
  • the image information can be displayed based on the input information or the detection information.
  • the information processing device can operate by grasping the intensity of light received by the housing of the information processing device in the environment in which the information processing device is used.
  • the user of the information processing device can select the display method. As a result, it is possible to provide a new information processing apparatus having excellent convenience, usefulness, or reliability.
  • a touch panel on which a touch sensor is superimposed on a function panel is both a display unit and an input unit.
  • the arithmetic unit 210 includes an artificial intelligence unit 213 (see FIG. 14A).
  • the artificial intelligence unit 213 is supplied with the input information II or the detection information DS, and the artificial intelligence unit 213 infers the control information CI based on the input information II or the detection information DS. In addition, the artificial intelligence unit 213 supplies the control information CI.
  • control information CI that is displayed so as to be felt to be suitable. Alternatively, it can be displayed as if it were suitable. Alternatively, the control information CI that is displayed so as to be comfortable can be generated. Alternatively, it can be displayed so that it feels comfortable. As a result, it is possible to provide a new information processing apparatus having excellent convenience, usefulness, or reliability.
  • the artificial intelligence unit 213 can process the input information II in natural language and extract one feature from the entire input information II. For example, the artificial intelligence unit 213 can infer and characterize the emotions and the like contained in the input information II. In addition, it is possible to infer colors, patterns, typefaces, etc. that are empirically felt to be suitable for the feature. Further, the artificial intelligence unit 213 can generate information for designating a character color, a pattern or a typeface, and information for designating a background color or a pattern, and can use it for the control information CI.
  • the artificial intelligence unit 213 can process the input information II in natural language to extract some words included in the input information II. For example, the artificial intelligence unit 213 can extract grammatical errors, factual misunderstandings, expressions including emotions, and the like. Further, the artificial intelligence unit 213 can generate a control information CI that displays the extracted part in a color, pattern, typeface, or the like different from the other part, and can use it for the control information CI.
  • the artificial intelligence unit 213 can perform image processing on the input information II to extract one feature from the input information II.
  • the artificial intelligence unit 213 can infer and characterize the date when the input information II was taken, indoors or outdoors, day or night, and the like.
  • information for designating a color for example, full color, black and white, brownish brown, etc.
  • expressing shading can be used for the control information CI.
  • the artificial intelligence unit 213 can perform image processing on the input information II to extract a part of the images included in the input information II. For example, control information CI that displays a boundary between a part of the extracted image and another part can be generated. Specifically, it is possible to generate control information CI that displays a rectangle that surrounds a part of the extracted image.
  • the artificial intelligence unit 213 can generate an inference by using the detection information DS.
  • the control information CI can be generated so that the user of the information processing apparatus 200 feels comfortable.
  • the artificial intelligence unit 213 can generate control information CI that adjusts the brightness of the display so that the brightness of the display is felt to be comfortable, based on the illuminance of the environment and the like.
  • the artificial intelligence unit 213 can generate control information CI for adjusting the volume so that the size is felt to be comfortable based on the noise of the environment or the like.
  • the clock signal or timing signal supplied to the control unit 238 included in the display unit 230 can be used for the control information CI.
  • a clock signal, a timing signal, or the like supplied to the control unit 248 included in the input unit 240 can be used for the control information CI.
  • program The program of one aspect of the invention has the following steps (see FIG. 15A).
  • predetermined image information to be displayed at startup a predetermined mode for displaying the image information, and information for specifying a predetermined display method for displaying the image information are acquired from the storage unit 212.
  • one still image information or another moving image information can be used for predetermined image information.
  • the first mode or the second mode can be used for a predetermined mode.
  • interrupt processing is enabled (see FIG. 15A (S2)).
  • the arithmetic unit for which interrupt processing is permitted can perform interrupt processing in parallel with the main processing.
  • the arithmetic unit that has returned from the interrupt processing to the main processing can reflect the result obtained by the interrupt processing in the main processing.
  • the arithmetic unit may perform interrupt processing, and when returning from the interrupt processing, the counter may be set to a value other than the initial value. As a result, interrupt processing can always be performed after the program is started.
  • the image information is displayed using the predetermined mode or the predetermined display method selected in the first step or the interrupt processing (see FIG. 15A (S3)).
  • the predetermined mode specifies a mode for displaying information
  • the predetermined display method specifies a method for displaying image information. Further, for example, it can be used for information for displaying image information VI.
  • one method of displaying image information VI can be associated with a first mode.
  • another method of displaying the image information VI can be associated with the second mode. This makes it possible to select a display method based on the selected mode.
  • a method of supplying a selection signal to one scanning line at a frequency of 30 Hz or higher, preferably 60 Hz or higher, and displaying based on the selection signal can be associated with the first mode.
  • the selection signal is supplied at a frequency of 30 Hz or higher, preferably 60 Hz or higher, the movement of the moving image can be displayed smoothly.
  • an image that changes so as to smoothly follow the user's operation can be displayed on the information processing device 200 being operated by the user.
  • a second method is to supply a selection signal to one scanning line at a frequency of less than 30 Hz, preferably less than 1 Hz, more preferably less than once a minute, and display based on the selection signal.
  • the selection signal is supplied at a frequency of less than 30 Hz, preferably less than 1 Hz, and more preferably less than once a minute, a display in which flicker or flicker is suppressed can be obtained. In addition, power consumption can be reduced.
  • the display can be updated at a frequency of once per second, once per minute, or the like.
  • the light emitting element when a light emitting element is used as a display element, the light emitting element can emit light in a pulse shape to display image information.
  • the organic EL element can be made to emit light in a pulse shape, and the afterglow can be used for display. Since the organic EL element has excellent frequency characteristics, it may be possible to shorten the time for driving the light emitting element and reduce the power consumption. Alternatively, since heat generation is suppressed, deterioration of the light emitting element may be reduced.
  • the end instruction supplied in the interrupt processing may be used for the determination.
  • the interrupt processing includes the following sixth to eighth steps (see FIG. 15B).
  • the detection unit 250 is used to detect the illuminance of the environment in which the information processing apparatus 200 is used (see FIG. 15B (S6)).
  • the color temperature and chromaticity of the ambient light may be detected instead of the illuminance of the environment.
  • the display method is determined based on the detected illuminance information (see FIG. 15B (S7)). For example, determine the brightness of the display so that it is not too dark or too bright.
  • the tint of the display may be adjusted.
  • FIG. 16A is a flowchart illustrating a program of one aspect of the present invention.
  • FIG. 16A is a flowchart illustrating interrupt processing different from the interrupt processing shown in FIG. 15B.
  • the configuration example 3 of the information processing device is different from the interrupt processing described with reference to FIG. 15B in that the interrupt processing includes a step of changing the mode based on the supplied predetermined event.
  • the different parts will be described in detail, and the above description will be incorporated for parts where the same configuration can be used.
  • the interrupt processing includes the following sixth to eighth steps (see FIG. 16A).
  • [7th step] In the seventh step, the mode is changed (see FIG. 16A (U7)). Specifically, when the first mode is selected, the second mode is selected, and when the second mode is selected, the first mode is selected.
  • the display mode can be changed for a part of the display unit 230. Specifically, the display mode can be changed for a region in which one drive circuit of the display unit 230 including the drive circuit GDA, the drive circuit GDB, and the drive circuit GDC supplies a selection signal (see FIG. 16B).
  • the display mode of the area in which the drive circuit GDB supplies the selection signal can be changed. Yes (see FIGS. 16B and 16C).
  • the frequency of the selection signal supplied by the drive circuit GDB can be changed according to the "tap" event supplied to the touch panel using a finger or the like.
  • the signal GCLK is a clock signal that controls the operation of the drive circuit GDB
  • the signals PWC1 and the signal PWC2 are pulse width control signals that control the operation of the drive circuit GDB.
  • the drive circuit GDB supplies the selection signal to the conductive film G2 (m + 1) to the conductive film G2 (2 m) based on the signal GCLK, the signal PWC1, the signal PWC2, and the like.
  • the drive circuit GDB can supply the selection signal without the drive circuit GDA and the drive circuit GDC supplying the selection signal.
  • the display of the area to which the drive circuit GDB supplies the selection signal can be updated without changing the display of the area to which the drive circuit GDA and the drive circuit GDC supply the selection signal.
  • the power consumed by the drive circuit can be suppressed.
  • interrupt processing is terminated (see FIG. 16A (U8)). Note that the interrupt processing may be repeatedly executed during the period during which the main processing is being executed.
  • ⁇ Predetermined event For example, an event such as “click” or “drag” that is supplied using a pointing device such as a mouse, or an event such as “tap”, “drag” or “swipe” that is supplied to the touch panel using a finger or the like as a pointer. Can be used.
  • the position of the slide bar pointed to by the pointer can be used to give arguments of instructions associated with a predetermined event.
  • the information detected by the detection unit 250 can be compared with a preset threshold value, and the comparison result can be used for the event.
  • a pressure-sensitive detector or the like in contact with a button or the like arranged so as to be pushed into the housing can be used for the detection unit 250.
  • Instructions associated with a given event For example, an end instruction can be associated with a given event.
  • a "page turning command" for switching the display from one displayed image information to another image information can be associated with a predetermined event. It should be noted that an argument for determining the page turning speed or the like used when executing the "page turning command" can be given by using a predetermined event.
  • a "scroll command” that moves the display position of a part of one image information displayed and displays another part continuous with the part can be associated with a predetermined event. It should be noted that an argument for determining the speed of moving the display used when executing the "scroll instruction" can be given by using a predetermined event.
  • a command for setting a display method or a command for generating image information can be associated with a predetermined event.
  • an argument that determines the brightness of the generated image can be associated with a predetermined event. Further, the argument for determining the brightness of the generated image may be determined based on the brightness of the environment detected by the detection unit 250.
  • an instruction for acquiring information distributed using a push-type service using the communication unit 290 can be associated with a predetermined event.
  • the presence or absence of the qualification to acquire the information may be determined by using the position information detected by the detection unit 250. Specifically, if you are inside or in a predetermined classroom, school, conference room, company, building, etc., you may judge that you are qualified to acquire information.
  • the information processing apparatus 200 can be used as a textbook or the like by receiving teaching materials distributed in a classroom such as a school or a university (see FIG. 14C). Alternatively, it is possible to receive materials distributed in a conference room of a company or the like and use them as conference materials.
  • FIG. 17A is a flowchart illustrating a program of one aspect of the present invention.
  • FIG. 17A is a flowchart illustrating interrupt processing different from the interrupt processing shown in FIG. 15B.
  • FIG. 17B is a schematic diagram illustrating the operation of the program shown in FIG. 17A, and
  • FIG. 17C is a schematic diagram of a photographed fingerprint.
  • the configuration example 4 of the information processing apparatus described with reference to FIG. 17A is different from the configuration example described with reference to FIG. 15B in interrupt processing.
  • the interrupt process includes a step of identifying a region, a step of generating an image, a step of displaying an image, and a step of capturing an image based on a predetermined event supplied.
  • the different parts will be described in detail, and the above description will be incorporated for parts where the same configuration can be used.
  • the interrupt processing includes a sixth step to an eleventh step (see FIG. 17A).
  • the detection unit 250 can be used to supply a predetermined event.
  • an exercise such as lifting an information processing device can be used for a predetermined event.
  • an angular acceleration sensor or an acceleration sensor can be used to detect the motion of the information processing device.
  • a touch sensor can be used to detect contact or proximity of a subject such as a finger.
  • the first region SH is specified (see FIG. 17A (V7)).
  • the region in which a subject such as a finger is in contact with or is close to the input / output device 220 of one aspect of the present invention can be set as the first region SH.
  • a region preset by the user or the like can be used for the first region SH.
  • a finger THM or the like that comes into contact with or is close to a functional panel that can be used in the information processing apparatus of one aspect of the present invention is photographed using pixels 703 (i, j), image-processed, and then image-processed.
  • the first region SH can be identified (see FIG. 17B).
  • the pixels 703 (i, j) of the functional panel that can be used in the information processing apparatus of one aspect of the present invention are used for the shadow generated by blocking the external light due to the contact or proximity of a subject such as a finger THM.
  • the first region SH can be specified by taking a picture of the image and performing image processing.
  • pixels 703 (i, j) of the functional panel that can be used in the information processing apparatus of one aspect of the present invention, light is applied to a subject such as a finger THM that is in contact with or close to the subject, and the subject is reflected. Light can be photographed using pixels 703 (i, j) and image processed to identify the first region SH.
  • the touch sensor can be used to identify the area touched by the subject such as the finger THM as the first area SH.
  • an image FI containing the second region and the third region is generated based on the first region SH (see FIGS. 17A (V8) and 17B).
  • the shape of the first region SH is used for the shape of the second region, and the region excluding the first region SH is used for the third region.
  • an image signal is generated from the image FI, supplied to the area 231 and emits light from the pixels 703 (i, j).
  • the generated image signal can be supplied to the conductive film S1g (j) and the image signal can be written to the pixels 703 (i, j). ..
  • the generated image signal can be supplied to the conductive film S1g (j) and the conductive film S2g (j), and the emphasized image signal can be written to the pixels 703 (i, j).
  • the enhanced image signal can be used to increase the brightness for display.
  • the image FI can be displayed by superimposing the area 231 on the area 231 touched by the subject such as a finger or the area SH in the vicinity of the area 231.
  • the area touched by the subject such as a finger can be irradiated with light using the pixels 703 (i, j).
  • the finger or the like is photographed.
  • the fingerprint FP of the finger THM in contact with the region 231 can be photographed (see FIG. 17C).
  • the supply of the first selection signal can be stopped while the image is displayed on the pixels 703 (i, j).
  • the pixel 703 (i, j) can be used for imaging with the supply of the selection signal to the pixel circuit 530G (i, j) stopped.
  • the image can be taken during the period when the first selection signal is not supplied.
  • noise during imaging can be suppressed.
  • a clear image of the fingerprint can be obtained.
  • an image that can be used for user authentication can be acquired.
  • the fingerprint of the finger touching the area 231 can be clearly photographed anywhere in the area 231. As a result, it is possible to provide a new information processing apparatus having excellent convenience, usefulness, or reliability.
  • 18 to 21 are views for explaining the configuration of the information processing apparatus according to one aspect of the present invention.
  • 18A is a block diagram of the information processing device
  • FIGS. 18B to 18E are perspective views illustrating the configuration of the information processing device.
  • 19A to 19E are perspective views illustrating the configuration of the information processing apparatus.
  • 20A and 20B are perspective views illustrating the configuration of the information processing apparatus.
  • FIG. 21 is a perspective view illustrating the configuration of the information processing apparatus.
  • the information processing device 5200B described in the present embodiment includes an arithmetic unit 5210 and an input / output device 5220 (see FIG. 18A).
  • the arithmetic unit 5210 has a function of supplying operation information, and has a function of supplying image information based on the operation information.
  • the input / output device 5220 includes a display unit 5230, an input unit 5240, a detection unit 5250, a communication unit 5290, a function of supplying operation information, and a function of supplying image information. Further, the input / output device 5220 includes a function of supplying detection information, a function of supplying communication information, and a function of supplying communication information.
  • the input unit 5240 has a function of supplying operation information.
  • the input unit 5240 supplies operation information based on the operation of the user of the information processing device 5200B.
  • a keyboard a hardware button, a pointing device, a touch sensor, an illuminance sensor, an image pickup device, a voice input device, a line-of-sight input device, an attitude detection device, and the like can be used for the input unit 5240.
  • the display unit 5230 includes a function panel and a function of displaying image information.
  • the functional panel described in the second embodiment or the third embodiment can be used for the display unit 5230.
  • the detection unit 5250 has a function of supplying detection information. For example, it has a function of detecting the surrounding environment in which the information processing device is used and supplying it as detection information.
  • an illuminance sensor an image pickup device, a posture detection device, a pressure sensor, a motion sensor, and the like can be used for the detection unit 5250.
  • the communication unit 5290 has a function of supplying communication information and a function of supplying communication information. For example, it has a function of connecting to another electronic device or communication network by wireless communication or wired communication. Specifically, it has functions such as wireless premises communication, telephone communication, and short-range wireless communication.
  • Configuration example 1 of information processing device For example, an outer shape along a cylindrical pillar or the like can be applied to the display unit 5230 (see FIG. 18B). It also has a function to change the display method according to the illuminance of the usage environment. It also has a function to detect the presence of a person and change the displayed contents. Thereby, for example, it can be installed on a pillar of a building. Alternatively, advertisements, information, etc. can be displayed. Alternatively, it can be used for digital signage and the like.
  • Configuration example 2 of information processing device has a function of generating image information based on the locus of a pointer used by the user (see FIG. 18C).
  • a functional panel having a diagonal length of 20 inches or more, preferably 40 inches or more, and more preferably 55 inches or more can be used.
  • a plurality of function panels can be arranged side by side and used in one display area.
  • a plurality of function panels can be arranged side by side and used for multi-screen. Thereby, for example, it can be used for an electronic blackboard, an electronic bulletin board, an electronic signboard, and the like.
  • Information can be received from another device and displayed on the display unit 5230 (see FIG. 18D). Alternatively, you can view several options. Alternatively, the user can select some of the options and reply to the source of the information. Alternatively, for example, it has a function of changing the display method according to the illuminance of the usage environment. Thereby, for example, the power consumption of the smart watch can be reduced. Alternatively, the image can be displayed on the smart watch so that it can be suitably used even in an environment with strong external light such as outdoors in fine weather.
  • the display unit 5230 includes, for example, a curved surface that gently bends along the side surface of the housing (see FIG. 18E).
  • the display unit 5230 includes a function panel, and the function panel has, for example, a function of displaying on the front surface, the side surface, the top surface, and the back surface. Thereby, for example, information can be displayed not only on the front surface of the mobile phone but also on the side surface, the top surface and the back surface.
  • Configuration example 5 of information processing device For example, information can be received from the Internet and displayed on the display unit 5230 (see FIG. 19A). Alternatively, the created message can be confirmed on the display unit 5230. Alternatively, the created message can be sent to another device. Alternatively, for example, it has a function of changing the display method according to the illuminance of the usage environment. As a result, the power consumption of the smartphone can be reduced. Alternatively, for example, an image can be displayed on a smartphone so that it can be suitably used even in an environment with strong external light such as outdoors in fine weather.
  • a remote controller can be used for the input unit 5240 (see FIG. 19B).
  • information can be received from a broadcasting station or the Internet and displayed on the display unit 5230.
  • the user can be photographed using the detection unit 5250.
  • the user's video can be transmitted.
  • the viewing history of the user can be acquired and provided to the cloud service.
  • the recommendation information can be acquired from the cloud service and displayed on the display unit 5230.
  • the program or video can be displayed based on the recommendation information.
  • it has a function of changing the display method according to the illuminance of the usage environment. As a result, the image can be displayed on the television system so that the image can be suitably used even when exposed to strong external light that is inserted indoors on a sunny day.
  • the teaching material can be received from the Internet and displayed on the display unit 5230 (see FIG. 19C).
  • the input unit 5240 can be used to input a report and send it to the Internet.
  • the correction result or evaluation of the report can be obtained from the cloud service and displayed on the display unit 5230.
  • suitable teaching materials can be selected and displayed based on the evaluation.
  • an image signal can be received from another information processing device and displayed on the display unit 5230.
  • the display unit 5230 can be used as a sub-display by leaning against a stand or the like.
  • the image can be displayed on the tablet computer so that it can be suitably used even in an environment with strong external light such as outdoors in fine weather.
  • the information processing device includes, for example, a plurality of display units 5230 (see FIG. 19D). For example, it can be displayed on the display unit 5230 while being photographed by the detection unit 5250. Alternatively, the captured image can be displayed on the detection unit. Alternatively, the input unit 5240 can be used to decorate the captured image. Alternatively, you can attach a message to the captured video. Or you can send it to the internet. Alternatively, it has a function to change the shooting conditions according to the illuminance of the usage environment. Thereby, for example, the subject can be displayed on the digital camera so that the subject can be suitably viewed even in an environment with strong external light such as outdoors in fine weather.
  • ⁇ Configuration example 9 of information processing device For example, another information processing device can be used for the slave, and the information processing device of the present embodiment can be used as the master to control the other information processing device (see FIG. 19E).
  • a part of the image information can be displayed on the display unit 5230, and another part of the image information can be displayed on the display unit of another information processing device.
  • An image signal can be supplied.
  • the communication unit 5290 can be used to acquire information to be written from the input unit of another information processing device. Thereby, for example, a wide display area can be used by using a portable personal computer.
  • the information processing device includes, for example, a detection unit 5250 that detects acceleration or direction (see FIG. 20A).
  • the detection unit 5250 can supply information relating to the position of the user or the direction in which the user is facing.
  • the information processing device can generate image information for the right eye and image information for the left eye based on the position of the user or the direction in which the user is facing.
  • the display unit 5230 includes a display area for the right eye and a display area for the left eye.
  • the information processing device includes, for example, an image pickup device and a detection unit 5250 that detects acceleration or direction (see FIG. 20B).
  • the detection unit 5250 can supply information relating to the position of the user or the direction in which the user is facing.
  • the information processing device can generate image information based on the position of the user or the direction in which the user is facing. As a result, for example, information can be attached and displayed on a real landscape. Alternatively, the image of the augmented reality space can be displayed on a glasses-type information processing device.
  • the information processing device includes, for example, a display unit 5230 and an input unit 5240 (see FIG. 21).
  • the display unit 5230 and the input unit 5240 can be folded, for example.
  • the information processing device also includes a communication unit 5290.
  • the communication unit 5290 can perform short-range wireless communication, for example.
  • the information processing device also includes a detection unit 5250.
  • information can be displayed on the display unit 5230, which is larger than the size of the housing.
  • Information can be input using the input unit 5240, which is larger than the size of the housing.
  • information can be exchanged with other information processing devices.
  • the individual identification signal can be received from the ring-shaped information processing device worn.
  • the individual identification signal can be supplied to the security system.
  • X and Y are assumed to be objects (for example, devices, elements, circuits, wirings, electrodes, terminals, conductive films, layers, etc.).
  • an element for example, a switch, a transistor, a capacitive element, an inductor, a resistance element, a diode, a display
  • Elements eg, switches, transistors, capacitive elements, inductors
  • X and Y are connected to each other.
  • an element for example, a switch, a transistor, a capacitance element, an inductor, a resistance element, a diode, a display
  • One or more elements, light emitting elements, loads, etc. can be connected between X and Y.
  • the switch has a function of controlling on / off. That is, the switch is in a conductive state (on state) or a non-conducting state (off state), and has a function of controlling whether or not a current flows. Alternatively, the switch has a function of selecting and switching the path through which the current flows. It should be noted that the case where X and Y are electrically connected includes the case where X and Y are directly connected.
  • a circuit that enables functional connection between X and Y for example, a logic circuit (inverter, NAND circuit, NOR circuit, etc.), signal conversion, etc.) Circuits (DA conversion circuit, AD conversion circuit, gamma correction circuit, etc.), potential level conversion circuit (power supply circuit (boost circuit, step-down circuit, etc.), level shifter circuit that changes the signal potential level, etc.), voltage source, current source, switching Circuits, amplifier circuits (circuits that can increase signal amplitude or current amount, operational amplifiers, differential amplifier circuits, source follower circuits, buffer circuits, etc.), signal generation circuits, storage circuits, control circuits, etc.) are X and Y.
  • a logic circuit inverter, NAND circuit, NOR circuit, etc.
  • signal conversion, etc. for example, a logic circuit (inverter, NAND circuit, NOR circuit, etc.), signal conversion, etc.) Circuits (DA conversion circuit, AD conversion circuit, gamma correction circuit, etc.), potential level conversion circuit
  • the source of the transistor (or the first terminal, etc.) is electrically connected to X via (or not) Z1, and the drain of the transistor (or the second terminal, etc.) connects to Z2.
  • the drain of the transistor (or the first terminal, etc.) is directly connected to one part of Z1 and another part of Z1.
  • the drain of the transistor is directly connected to one part of Z2, and another part of Z2 is directly connected to Y.
  • X and Y, the source (or the first terminal, etc.) and the drain (or the second terminal, etc.) of the transistor are electrically connected to each other, and the X, the source of the transistor (or the first terminal, etc.) (Terminals, etc.), transistor drains (or second terminals, etc.), and Y are electrically connected in this order.
  • the source of the transistor (or the first terminal, etc.) is electrically connected to X
  • the drain of the transistor (or the second terminal, etc.) is electrically connected to Y
  • the first terminal, etc.), the drain of the transistor (or the second terminal, etc.), and Y are electrically connected in this order.
  • X is electrically connected to Y via the source (or first terminal, etc.) and drain (or second terminal, etc.) of the transistor, and X, the source (or first terminal, etc.) of the transistor.
  • the terminals, etc.), the drain of the transistor (or the second terminal, etc.), and Y are provided in this connection order.
  • the source (or first terminal, etc.) and drain (or second terminal, etc.) of the transistor can be separated. Separately, the technical scope can be determined.
  • the source of the transistor (or the first terminal, etc.) is electrically connected to X via at least the first connection path, and the first connection path is. It does not have a second connection path, and the second connection path is between the source of the transistor (or the first terminal, etc.) and the drain of the transistor (or the second terminal, etc.) via the transistor.
  • the first connection path is a path via Z1
  • the drain of the transistor (or the second terminal, etc.) is electrically connected to Y via at least a third connection path. It is connected, and the third connection path does not have the second connection path, and the third connection path is a path via Z2.
  • the source of the transistor (or the first terminal, etc.) is electrically connected to X via Z1 by at least the first connection path, and the first connection path is the second connection path.
  • the second connection path has a connection path via a transistor, and the drain of the transistor (or a second terminal or the like) is via Z2 by at least a third connection path.
  • Y is electrically connected, and the third connection path does not have the second connection path.
  • the source of the transistor (or the first terminal, etc.) is electrically connected to X via Z1 by at least the first electrical path, the first electrical path being the second.
  • the second electrical path is an electrical path from the source of the transistor (or the first terminal, etc.) to the drain of the transistor (or the second terminal, etc.).
  • the drain (or second terminal, etc.) of the transistor is electrically connected to Y via Z2 by at least a third electrical path, the third electrical path being a fourth electrical path.
  • the fourth electrical path is an electrical path from the drain of the transistor (or the second terminal, etc.) to the source of the transistor (or the first terminal, etc.). " can do.
  • X, Y, Z1 and Z2 are objects (for example, devices, elements, circuits, wirings, electrodes, terminals, conductive films, layers, etc.).
  • the circuit diagram shows that the independent components are electrically connected to each other, the case where one component has the functions of a plurality of components together.
  • one component has the functions of a plurality of components together.
  • the electrical connection in the present specification also includes the case where one conductive film has the functions of a plurality of components in combination.
  • ACF1 Conductive material
  • ANO Conductive material
  • CI Control information
  • CL Conductive material
  • CP Conductive material
  • DS Detection information
  • FD Node
  • GCLK Signal
  • IN Terminal
  • M32 Transistor
  • OUT Terminal
  • RS Conductive
  • S2g Conductive
  • SE Conductive
  • SH Region
  • TX Conductive, V0: Conductive
  • VCOM2 Conductive
  • VI Image information
  • VIV Conductive

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Mathematical Physics (AREA)
  • Materials Engineering (AREA)
  • Nonlinear Science (AREA)
  • Nanotechnology (AREA)
  • Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Inorganic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Sustainable Development (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • Electroluminescent Light Sources (AREA)
  • Devices For Indicating Variable Information By Combining Individual Elements (AREA)
  • Control Of Indicators Other Than Cathode Ray Tubes (AREA)
  • Control Of El Displays (AREA)

Abstract

Provided is an information processing device. This information processing device includes a functional panel and first to fifth surfaces. The functional panel has first to fifth regions which function such that: the second region allows display in one direction; the third region is interposed between the first region and the second region and is bendable; the fifth region is interposed between the first region and the fourth region and is bendable; and the fourth region allows display in one direction in a state where the third region and the fifth region are bent. The first surface is provided with a first region and a light emitting element, and the light emitting element emits light. The second surface is provided with a second region and a photoelectric conversion element, and the photoelectric conversion element converts light into an electrical signal. The third surface is interposed between the first surface and the second surface, is bendable, and is provided with a third region. The fourth surface is provided with a fourth region. The fifth surface is interposed between the first surface and the fourth surface, is bendable, and is provided with a fifth region. The photoelectric conversion element opposes the light emitting element upon bending of the third surface.

Description

情報処理装置Information processing device

本発明の一態様は、情報処理装置または半導体装置に関する。 One aspect of the present invention relates to an information processing device or a semiconductor device.

なお、本発明の一態様は、上記の技術分野に限定されない。本明細書等で開示する発明の一態様の技術分野は、物、方法、または、製造方法に関するものである。または、本発明の一態様は、プロセス、マシン、マニュファクチャ、または、組成物（コンポジション・オブ・マター）に関するものである。そのため、より具体的に本明細書で開示する本発明の一態様の技術分野としては、半導体装置、表示装置、発光装置、蓄電装置、記憶装置、それらの駆動方法、または、それらの製造方法、を一例として挙げることができる。 One aspect of the present invention is not limited to the above technical fields. The technical field of one aspect of the invention disclosed in the present specification and the like relates to a product, a method, or a manufacturing method. Alternatively, one aspect of the invention relates to a process, machine, manufacture, or composition (composition of matter). Therefore, more specifically, the technical fields of one aspect of the present invention disclosed in the present specification include semiconductor devices, display devices, light emitting devices, power storage devices, storage devices, their driving methods, or methods for manufacturing them. Can be given as an example.

基板の絶縁表面と、絶縁表面に複数の撮像画素と、を有する撮像パネルを用いた情報処理装置が知られている（特許文献１）。そして、撮像画素は、マトリクス状に配置された可視光を透過する複数の窓、複数の窓の間に延在し信号を供給する格子状の光電変換素子および信号が供給される検知回路を備える。 An information processing apparatus using an imaging panel having an insulating surface of a substrate and a plurality of imaging pixels on the insulating surface is known (Patent Document 1). The imaging pixels include a plurality of windows that transmit visible light arranged in a matrix, a grid-like photoelectric conversion element that extends between the plurality of windows and supplies a signal, and a detection circuit to which the signal is supplied. ..

特開２０１５−００５２８０号公報JP 2015-005280

本発明の一態様は、利便性、有用性または信頼性に優れた新規な情報処理装置を提供することを課題の一とする。または、新規な情報処理装置または新規な半導体装置を提供することを課題の一とする。 One aspect of the present invention is to provide a novel information processing apparatus having excellent convenience, usefulness, or reliability. Alternatively, one of the issues is to provide a new information processing device or a new semiconductor device.

なお、これらの課題の記載は、他の課題の存在を妨げるものではない。なお、本発明の一態様は、これらの課題の全てを解決する必要はないものとする。なお、これら以外の課題は、明細書、図面、請求項などの記載から、自ずと明らかとなるものであり、明細書、図面、請求項などの記載から、これら以外の課題を抽出することが可能である。 The description of these issues does not prevent the existence of other issues. It should be noted that one aspect of the present invention does not need to solve all of these problems. Issues other than these are naturally clarified from the description of the description, drawings, claims, etc., and it is possible to extract issues other than these from the description of the description, drawings, claims, etc. Is.

（１）本発明の一態様は、機能パネルと、第１の面と、第２の面と、第３の面と、第４の面と、第５の面、を有する情報処理装置である。 (1) One aspect of the present invention is an information processing device having a functional panel, a first surface, a second surface, a third surface, a fourth surface, and a fifth surface. ..

機能パネルは領域２３１を備え、領域２３１は第１の領域、第２の領域、第３の領域、第４の領域および第５の領域を備える。 The functional panel comprises a region 231 which comprises a first region, a second region, a third region, a fourth region and a fifth region.

第２の領域は一の方向に表示する機能を備え、第３の領域は、第１の領域および第２の領域の間に挟まれ、第３の領域は屈曲することができる。第５の領域は、第１の領域および第４の領域の間に挟まれ、第５の領域は、屈曲することができる。第４の領域は、前記第３の領域および前記第５の領域が屈曲した状態において、一の方向に表示する機能を備える。 The second region has a function of displaying in one direction, the third region is sandwiched between the first region and the second region, and the third region can be bent. The fifth region is sandwiched between the first region and the fourth region, and the fifth region can be bent. The fourth region has a function of displaying in one direction when the third region and the fifth region are bent.

第１の面は、第１の領域および発光素子を備え、発光素子は、光を発する。 The first surface comprises a first region and a light emitting element, which emits light.

第２の面は、第２の領域および光電変換素子を備え、光電変換素子は光を電気信号に変換する機能を備える。 The second surface includes a second region and a photoelectric conversion element, which has a function of converting light into an electric signal.

第３の面は、第１の面および第２の面の間に挟まれ、第３の面は屈曲することができ、第３の面は第３の領域を備える。 The third surface is sandwiched between the first surface and the second surface, the third surface can be bent, and the third surface comprises a third region.

第４の面は、第４の領域を備える。 The fourth surface comprises a fourth area.

第５の面は、第１の面および第４の面の間に挟まれ、屈曲することができ、第５の領域を備える。光電変換素子は、第３の面の屈曲に伴い、発光素子と対向する。 The fifth surface is sandwiched between the first surface and the fourth surface and can be bent to include a fifth area. The photoelectric conversion element faces the light emitting element as the third surface bends.

これにより、発光素子および光電変換素子の間に置かれたものの、発光素子が発する光に対する透過率を知ることができる。または、透過率の経時変化を知ることができる。その結果、利便性、有用性または信頼性に優れた新規な情報処理装置を提供することができる。 This makes it possible to know the transmittance of light emitted by the light emitting element, although it is placed between the light emitting element and the photoelectric conversion element. Alternatively, the change in transmittance with time can be known. As a result, it is possible to provide a new information processing apparatus having excellent convenience, usefulness, or reliability.

（２）また、本発明の一態様は、上記の光が６５０ｎｍ以上１０００ｎｍ以下の波長を備える光を含む上記の情報処理装置である。 (2) Further, one aspect of the present invention is the above-mentioned information processing apparatus including the above-mentioned light having a wavelength of 650 nm or more and 1000 nm or less.

これにより、例えば、指などの発光素子が発する光に対する透過率を知ることができる。または、例えば、血流の経時変化を知ることができる。または、例えば、脈拍を知ることができる。または、静脈の分布を知ることができる。または、生体認証に用いることができる。または、ヘルスケア用途に用いることができる。その結果、利便性、有用性または信頼性に優れた新規な情報処理装置を提供することができる。 This makes it possible to know the transmittance of light emitted by a light emitting element such as a finger. Alternatively, for example, it is possible to know the change over time in blood flow. Alternatively, for example, the pulse can be known. Alternatively, the distribution of veins can be known. Alternatively, it can be used for biometric authentication. Alternatively, it can be used for healthcare applications. As a result, it is possible to provide a new information processing apparatus having excellent convenience, usefulness, or reliability.

（３）また、本発明の一態様は、発光素子が発光性の有機化合物を含む上記の情報処理装置である。 (3) Further, one aspect of the present invention is the above-mentioned information processing device in which the light emitting element contains a luminescent organic compound.

（４）また、本発明の一態様は、光電変換素子がフラーレンを含む、上記の情報処理装置である。 (4) Further, one aspect of the present invention is the above-mentioned information processing device in which the photoelectric conversion element contains fullerene.

これにより、発光素子に用いる構成の一部を、光電変換素子構成の一部に用いることができる。例えば、発光素子に用いる正孔輸送層を、光電変換素子の正孔輸送層に用いることができる。例えば、発光素子に用いる電子輸送層を、光電変換素子の電子輸送層に用いることができる。その結果、利便性、有用性または信頼性に優れた新規な情報処理装置を提供することができる。 As a result, a part of the configuration used for the light emitting element can be used as a part of the photoelectric conversion element configuration. For example, the hole transport layer used in the light emitting element can be used in the hole transport layer of the photoelectric conversion element. For example, the electron transport layer used for the light emitting element can be used for the electron transport layer of the photoelectric conversion element. As a result, it is possible to provide a new information processing apparatus having excellent convenience, usefulness, or reliability.

（５）また、本発明の一態様は、機能パネルが第１の駆動回路と、第２の駆動回路と、領域と、を備える上記の情報処理装置である。 (5) Further, one aspect of the present invention is the above-mentioned information processing device in which the functional panel includes a first drive circuit, a second drive circuit, and a region.

第１の駆動回路は第１の選択信号を供給し、第２の駆動回路は第２の選択信号および第３の選択信号を供給し、第２の領域は第１の画素を備える。 The first drive circuit supplies the first selection signal, the second drive circuit supplies the second selection signal and the third selection signal, and the second region includes the first pixel.

第１の画素は、第１の画素回路、発光素子、第２の画素回路および光電変換素子を備える。 The first pixel includes a first pixel circuit, a light emitting element, a second pixel circuit, and a photoelectric conversion element.

第１の画素回路は第１の選択信号を供給され、第１の画素回路は、第１の選択信号に基づいて、画像信号を取得する。 The first pixel circuit is supplied with the first selection signal, and the first pixel circuit acquires an image signal based on the first selection signal.

発光素子は、第１の画素回路と電気的に接続され、発光素子は画像信号に基づいて、発光する。 The light emitting element is electrically connected to the first pixel circuit, and the light emitting element emits light based on the image signal.

第２の画素回路は、第１の選択信号を供給されていない期間に、第２の選択信号および第３の選択信号を供給され、第２の画素回路は、第２の選択信号に基づいて、撮像信号を取得する。また、第２の画素回路は、第３の選択信号に基づいて、撮像信号を供給する。 The second pixel circuit is supplied with the second selection signal and the third selection signal during the period when the first selection signal is not supplied, and the second pixel circuit is based on the second selection signal. , Acquire the imaging signal. Further, the second pixel circuit supplies an image pickup signal based on the third selection signal.

光電変換素子は第２の画素回路と電気的に接続され、光電変換素子は撮像信号を生成する。 The photoelectric conversion element is electrically connected to the second pixel circuit, and the photoelectric conversion element generates an imaging signal.

これにより、第１の選択信号が供給されていない期間に撮像することができる。または、撮像時のノイズを抑制することができる。または、第１の選択信号が供給されていない期間に、撮像信号を読み取ることができる。または、読み取り時のノイズを抑制することができる。その結果、利便性、有用性または信頼性に優れた新規な情報処理装置を提供することができる。 As a result, it is possible to take an image during the period when the first selection signal is not supplied. Alternatively, noise during imaging can be suppressed. Alternatively, the imaging signal can be read during the period when the first selection signal is not supplied. Alternatively, noise during reading can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to provide a new information processing apparatus having excellent convenience, usefulness, or reliability.

（６）また、本発明の一態様は、機能パネルが、第１の導電膜と、第２の導電膜と、第３の導電膜と、第４の導電膜と、第５の導電膜と、第６の導電膜と、第７の導電膜と、を備える上記の情報処理装置である。 (6) Further, in one aspect of the present invention, the functional panel comprises a first conductive film, a second conductive film, a third conductive film, a fourth conductive film, and a fifth conductive film. The above-mentioned information processing apparatus including the sixth conductive film and the seventh conductive film.

第１の導電膜は第２の選択信号を供給され、第７の導電膜は第３の選択信号を供給される。 The first conductive film is supplied with the second selection signal, and the seventh conductive film is supplied with the third selection signal.

第２の画素回路は、第１のスイッチ、第２のスイッチ，第３のスイッチ、第１のトランジスタ、第１の容量および第１のノードを備える。第１のスイッチは、光電変換素子と電気的に接続される第１の端子と、第１のノードと電気的に接続される第２の端子と、第１の導電膜の電位に基づいて、導通状態または非導通状態を制御する機能を備える。第２のスイッチは、第１のノードと電気的に接続される第１の端子と、第２の導電膜と電気的に接続される第２の端子と、第３の導電膜の電位に基づいて、導通状態または非導通状態を制御する機能を備える。第１の容量は、第１のノードと電気的に接続される導電膜と、第４の導電膜と電気的に接続される導電膜を備える。第１のトランジスタは、第１のノードと電気的に接続されるゲート電極と、第５の導電膜と電気的に接続される第１の電極と、を備える。第３のスイッチは、第１のトランジスタの第２の電極と電気的に接続される第１の端子と、第６の導電膜と電気的に接続される第２の端子と、第７の導電膜の電位に基づいて、導通状態または非導通状態を制御する機能を備える。 The second pixel circuit comprises a first switch, a second switch, a third switch, a first transistor, a first capacitance and a first node. The first switch is based on the potential of the first terminal electrically connected to the photoelectric conversion element, the second terminal electrically connected to the first node, and the first conductive film. It has a function to control the conducting state or the non-conducting state. The second switch is based on the potential of the first terminal electrically connected to the first node, the second terminal electrically connected to the second conductive film, and the potential of the third conductive film. It also has a function to control the conductive state or the non-conductive state. The first capacitance includes a conductive film that is electrically connected to the first node and a conductive film that is electrically connected to the fourth conductive film. The first transistor includes a gate electrode that is electrically connected to the first node and a first electrode that is electrically connected to the fifth conductive film. The third switch has a first terminal electrically connected to the second electrode of the first transistor, a second terminal electrically connected to the sixth conductive film, and a seventh conductive film. It has a function of controlling a conductive state or a non-conducting state based on the potential of the film.

これにより、光電変換素子が生成した撮像信号を、スイッチを用いて、第１のノードに転送することができる。または、光電変換素子が生成した撮像信号を、スイッチを用いて、第１のノードに格納することができる。または、画素回路および光電変換素子の間を、スイッチを用いて、非導通状態にすることができる。または、相関二重サンプリング法を適用することができる。または、撮像信号に含まれるノイズを低減することができる。その結果、利便性、有用性または信頼性に優れた新規な情報処理装置を提供することができる。 As a result, the imaging signal generated by the photoelectric conversion element can be transferred to the first node by using the switch. Alternatively, the imaging signal generated by the photoelectric conversion element can be stored in the first node by using a switch. Alternatively, a switch can be used to bring the pixel circuit and the photoelectric conversion element into a non-conducting state. Alternatively, the correlated double sampling method can be applied. Alternatively, the noise included in the image pickup signal can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to provide a new information processing apparatus having excellent convenience, usefulness, or reliability.

（７）また、本発明の一態様は、機能パネルが第８の導電膜と、第９の導電膜と、第１０の導電膜と、第１１の導電膜と、第１２の導電膜と、を備える上記の情報処理装置である。 (7) Further, in one aspect of the present invention, the functional panel comprises an eighth conductive film, a ninth conductive film, a tenth conductive film, an eleventh conductive film, and a twelfth conductive film. The above-mentioned information processing apparatus.

第８の導電膜は第１の選択信号を供給され、第１の画素回路は第４のスイッチ、第５のスイッチ、第２のトランジスタ、第２の容量および第２のノードを備える。第２のトランジスタは、第２のノードと電気的に接続されるゲート電極と、発光素子と電気的に接続される第１の電極と、第１２の導電膜と電気的に接続される第２の電極と、を備える。第４のスイッチは、第２のノードと電気的に接続される第１の端子と、第１０の導電膜と電気的に接続される第２の端子と、第８の導電膜の電位に基づいて、導通状態または非導通状態を制御する機能を備え、第５のスイッチは、第１１の導電膜と電気的に接続される第１の端子と、第９の導電膜の電位に基づいて、導通状態または非導通状態を制御する機能を備え、第２の容量は、第２のノードと電気的に接続される導電膜と、第５のスイッチの第２の電極と電気的に接続される導電膜を備える。 The eighth conductive film is supplied with a first selection signal, and the first pixel circuit includes a fourth switch, a fifth switch, a second transistor, a second capacitance and a second node. The second transistor has a gate electrode electrically connected to the second node, a first electrode electrically connected to the light emitting element, and a second electrode electrically connected to the twelfth conductive film. The electrodes are provided. The fourth switch is based on the potential of the first terminal electrically connected to the second node, the second terminal electrically connected to the tenth conductive film, and the eighth conductive film. The fifth switch has a function of controlling a conductive state or a non-conducting state, and the fifth switch is based on the potential of the first terminal electrically connected to the eleventh conductive film and the potential of the ninth conductive film. It has a function to control the conductive state or the non-conductive state, and the second capacitance is electrically connected to the conductive film electrically connected to the second node and the second electrode of the fifth switch. It has a conductive film.

これにより、画像信号を第２のノードに格納することができる。または、第２のノードの電位を、スイッチを用いて、変更することができる。または、発光素子が発する光の強度を、第２のノードの電位を用いて、制御することができる。その結果、利便性、有用性または信頼性に優れた新規な情報処理装置を提供することができる。 As a result, the image signal can be stored in the second node. Alternatively, the potential of the second node can be changed using a switch. Alternatively, the intensity of the light emitted by the light emitting element can be controlled by using the potential of the second node. As a result, it is possible to provide a new information processing apparatus having excellent convenience, usefulness, or reliability.

（８）また、本発明の一態様は、機能パネルが読み出し回路と、第１３の導電膜と、第１４の導電膜と、第１５の導電膜と、を備える上記の情報処理装置である。 (8) Further, one aspect of the present invention is the above-mentioned information processing apparatus in which the functional panel includes a readout circuit, a thirteenth conductive film, a fourteenth conductive film, and a fifteenth conductive film.

読み出し回路は増幅回路およびサンプリング回路を備え、増幅回路は第３のトランジスタを含み、第３のトランジスタは第１３の導電膜と電気的に接続されるゲート電極と、第６の導電膜（ｊ）と電気的に接続される第１の電極と、第１４の導電膜と電気的に接続される第２の電極と、を備える。サンプリング回路は、第１の端子、第２の端子および第３の端子を備え、第１の端子は第６の導電膜と電気的に接続され、第２の端子は第１５の導電膜と電気的に接続され、第３の端子は第１の端子の電位に基づいて変化する信号を供給する機能を備える。 The readout circuit includes an amplification circuit and a sampling circuit, the amplification circuit includes a third transistor, and the third transistor has a gate electrode electrically connected to the thirteenth conductive film and a sixth conductive film (j). It includes a first electrode electrically connected to the 14th conductive film and a second electrode electrically connected to the 14th conductive film. The sampling circuit includes a first terminal, a second terminal and a third terminal, the first terminal is electrically connected to the sixth conductive film, and the second terminal is electrically connected to the fifteenth conductive film. The third terminal is provided with a function of supplying a signal that changes based on the potential of the first terminal.

これにより、画素回路から撮像信号を取得することができる。または、例えば、相関二重サンプリング法を適用することができる。または、サンプリング回路を導電膜ごとに設けることができる。画素回路の差分信号を、導電膜ごとに取得することができる。または、サンプリング回路の動作周波数を抑制することができる。または、ノイズを低減することができる。その結果、利便性、有用性または信頼性に優れた新規な情報処理装置を提供することができる。 As a result, the imaging signal can be acquired from the pixel circuit. Alternatively, for example, a correlated double sampling method can be applied. Alternatively, a sampling circuit can be provided for each conductive film. The difference signal of the pixel circuit can be acquired for each conductive film. Alternatively, the operating frequency of the sampling circuit can be suppressed. Alternatively, noise can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to provide a new information processing apparatus having excellent convenience, usefulness, or reliability.

（９）また、本発明の一態様は、機能パネルが機能層を備える上記の情報処理装置である。機能層は、第１の画素回路および第２の画素回路を備える。 (9) Further, one aspect of the present invention is the above-mentioned information processing device in which the functional panel includes a functional layer. The functional layer includes a first pixel circuit and a second pixel circuit.

これにより、例えば、第１の画素回路に用いる半導体膜を形成する工程において、第２の画素回路に用いる半導体膜を形成することができる。または、作製工程を簡略化することができる。その結果、利便性、有用性または信頼性に優れた新規な情報処理装置を提供することができる。 Thereby, for example, in the step of forming the semiconductor film used for the first pixel circuit, the semiconductor film used for the second pixel circuit can be formed. Alternatively, the manufacturing process can be simplified. As a result, it is possible to provide a new information processing apparatus having excellent convenience, usefulness, or reliability.

（１０）また、本発明の一態様は、領域が一群の画素および他の一群の画素を備える上記の情報処理装置である。 (10) Further, one aspect of the present invention is the above-mentioned information processing apparatus in which a region includes a group of pixels and another group of pixels.

一群の画素は行方向に配設され、一群の画素は第１の画素を含み、一群の画素は第８の導電膜と電気的に接続され、一群の画素は第１の導電膜と電気的に接続される。 A group of pixels are arranged in the row direction, a group of pixels contains a first pixel, a group of pixels is electrically connected to an eighth conductive film, and a group of pixels is electrically connected to a first conductive film. Connected to.

他の一群の画素は行方向と交差する列方向に配設され、他の一群の画素は第１の画素を含み、他の一群の画素は第１０の導電膜と電気的に接続され、他の一群の画素は第６の導電膜と電気的に接続される。 The other group of pixels is arranged in the column direction intersecting the row direction, the other group of pixels includes the first pixel, the other group of pixels is electrically connected to the tenth conductive film, and the other. A group of pixels is electrically connected to the sixth conductive film.

これにより、複数の画素から撮像情報を取得することができる。または、複数の画素に画像情報を供給することができる。その結果、利便性、有用性または信頼性に優れた新規な情報処理装置を提供することができる。 As a result, imaging information can be acquired from a plurality of pixels. Alternatively, image information can be supplied to a plurality of pixels. As a result, it is possible to provide a new information processing apparatus having excellent convenience, usefulness, or reliability.

（１１）また、本発明の一態様は、第１の領域が第２の画素を備える上記の情報処理装置である。第２の画素は発光素子を含む。 (11) Further, one aspect of the present invention is the above-mentioned information processing device in which the first region includes the second pixel. The second pixel includes a light emitting element.

（１２）また、本発明の一態様は、制御部を有する上記の情報処理装置である。 (12) Further, one aspect of the present invention is the above-mentioned information processing device having a control unit.

制御部は画像情報および制御情報を供給され、制御部は画像情報に基づいて情報を生成し、制御部は制御情報に基づいて制御信号を生成し、制御部は情報および制御信号を供給する。 The control unit is supplied with image information and control information, the control unit generates information based on the image information, the control unit generates a control signal based on the control information, and the control unit supplies the information and the control signal.

機能パネルは情報および前記制御信号を供給され、第１の画素は情報に基づいて発光し、第２の画素は情報に基づいて発光する。 The function panel is supplied with information and the control signal, the first pixel emits light based on the information, and the second pixel emits light based on the information.

これにより、発光素子を用いて画像情報を表示することができる。その結果、利便性、有用性または信頼性に優れた新規な表示装置を提供することができる。 As a result, image information can be displayed using the light emitting element. As a result, it is possible to provide a new display device having excellent convenience, usefulness or reliability.

（１３）また、本発明の一態様は、入力部と、表示部と、を有する情報処理装置である。 (13) Further, one aspect of the present invention is an information processing device having an input unit and a display unit.

表示部は機能パネルを備え、入力部は検知領域を備え、入力部は検知領域に近接するものを検知し、検知領域は第１の画素と重なる領域を備える。 The display unit includes a function panel, the input unit includes a detection area, the input unit detects an object close to the detection area, and the detection area includes an area overlapping the first pixel.

これにより、表示部を用いて画像情報を表示しながら、表示部と重なる領域に近接するものを検知することができる。または、表示部に近接させる指などをポインタに用いて、位置情報を入力することができる。または、位置情報を表示部に表示する画像情報に関連付けることができる。その結果、利便性、有用性または信頼性に優れた新規な入出力装置を提供することができる。 As a result, while displaying the image information using the display unit, it is possible to detect an object close to the area overlapping the display unit. Alternatively, the position information can be input by using a finger or the like close to the display unit as the pointer. Alternatively, the position information can be associated with the image information displayed on the display unit. As a result, it is possible to provide a new input / output device having excellent convenience, usefulness, or reliability.

（１４）また、本発明の一態様は、演算装置と、入出力装置と、を有する情報処理装置である。 (14) Further, one aspect of the present invention is an information processing device including an arithmetic unit and an input / output device.

演算装置は入力情報または検知情報を供給され、演算装置は、入力情報または検知情報に基づいて、制御情報および画像情報を生成し、演算装置は制御情報および画像情報を供給する。 The arithmetic unit is supplied with input information or detection information, the arithmetic unit generates control information and image information based on the input information or detection information, and the arithmetic unit supplies control information and image information.

入出力装置は入力情報および検知情報を供給し、入出力装置は制御情報および画像情報を供給され、入出力装置は表示部、入力部および検知部を備える。表示部は機能パネルを備え、表示部は、制御情報に基づいて、画像情報を表示し、入力部は入力情報を生成し、検知部は検知情報を生成する。 The input / output device supplies input information and detection information, the input / output device is supplied with control information and image information, and the input / output device includes a display unit, an input unit, and a detection unit. The display unit includes a function panel, the display unit displays image information based on control information, the input unit generates input information, and the detection unit generates detection information.

これにより、入力情報または検知情報に基づいて、制御情報を生成することができる。または、入力情報または検知情報に基づいて、画像情報を表示することができる。その結果、利便性、有用性または信頼性に優れた新規な情報処理装置を提供することができる。 Thereby, control information can be generated based on the input information or the detection information. Alternatively, the image information can be displayed based on the input information or the detection information. As a result, it is possible to provide a new information processing apparatus having excellent convenience, usefulness, or reliability.

（１５）また、本発明の一態様は、キーボード、ハードウェアボタン、ポインティングデバイス、タッチセンサ、照度センサ、撮像装置、音声入力装置、視線入力装置、姿勢検出装置、のうち一以上と、を含む、上記の情報処理装置である。 (15) Further, one aspect of the present invention includes one or more of a keyboard, a hardware button, a pointing device, a touch sensor, an illuminance sensor, an imaging device, a voice input device, a line-of-sight input device, and an attitude detection device. , The above information processing device.

これにより、さまざまな入力装置を用いて供給する情報に基づいて、画像情報または制御情報を演算装置に生成させることができる。その結果、利便性、有用性または信頼性に優れた新規な情報処理装置を提供することができる。 As a result, the arithmetic unit can generate image information or control information based on the information supplied by the various input devices. As a result, it is possible to provide a new information processing apparatus having excellent convenience, usefulness, or reliability.

本発明の一態様によれば、利便性、有用性または信頼性に優れた新規な情報処理装置を提供することができる。または、新規な情報処理装置または新規な半導体装置を提供することができる。 According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to provide a novel information processing apparatus excellent in convenience, usefulness or reliability. Alternatively, a new information processing device or a new semiconductor device can be provided.

なお、これらの効果の記載は、他の効果の存在を妨げるものではない。なお、本発明の一態様は、必ずしも、これらの効果の全てを有する必要はない。なお、これら以外の効果は、明細書、図面、請求項などの記載から、自ずと明らかとなるものであり、明細書、図面、請求項などの記載から、これら以外の効果を抽出することが可能である。 The description of these effects does not preclude the existence of other effects. It should be noted that one aspect of the present invention does not necessarily have to have all of these effects. It should be noted that the effects other than these are naturally clarified from the description of the description, drawings, claims, etc., and it is possible to extract the effects other than these from the description of the description, drawings, claims, etc. Is.

図１Ａ乃至図１Ｃは、実施の形態に係る情報処理装置の構成を説明する図である。
図２Ａおよび図２Ｂは、実施の形態に係る情報処理装置の構成を説明する図であり、図２Ｃおよび図２Ｄは、実施の形態に係る情報処理装置の画素の構成を説明する図である。
図３Ａ乃至図３Ｃは、実施の形態に係る機能パネルの構成を説明するブロック図である。
図４Ａ乃至図４Ｃは、実施の形態に係る機能パネルの構成を説明する回路図である。
図５は、実施の形態に係る機能パネルの構成を説明する回路図である。
図６は、実施の形態に係る機能パネルの動作を説明する図である。
図７Ａ乃至図７Ｃは、実施の形態に係る機能パネルの構成を説明する図である。
図８は、実施の形態に係る機能パネルの構成を説明する断面図である。
図９Ａおよび図９Ｂは、実施の形態に係る機能パネルの構成を説明する断面図である。
図１０Ａおよび図１０Ｂは、実施の形態に係る機能パネルの構成を説明する断面図である。
図１１Ａおよび図１１Ｂは、実施の形態に係る機能パネルの構成を説明する断面図である。
図１２Ａ乃至図１２Ｄは、実施の形態に係る表示装置の構成を説明する図である。
図１３は、実施の形態に係る入出力装置の構成を説明するブロック図である。
図１４Ａ乃至図１４Ｃは、実施の形態に係る情報処理装置の構成を説明する図である。
図１５Ａおよび図１５Ｂは、実施の形態に係る情報処理装置の駆動方法を説明するフローチャートである。
図１６Ａ乃至図１６Ｃは、実施の形態に係る情報処理装置の駆動方法を説明する図である。
図１７Ａ乃至図１７Ｃは、実施の形態に係る情報処理装置の駆動方法を説明する図である。
図１８Ａ乃至図１８Ｅは、実施の形態に係る情報処理装置の構成を説明する図である。
図１９Ａ乃至図１９Ｅは、実施の形態に係る情報処理装置の構成を説明する図である。
図２０Ａおよび図２０Ｂは、実施の形態に係る情報処理装置の構成を説明する図である。
図２１は、実施の形態に係る情報処理装置の構成を説明する図である。
図２２Ａ乃至図２２Ｃは、実施の形態に係る情報処理装置の構成を説明する図である。
図２３Ａおよび図２３Ｂは、実施の形態に係る情報処理装置の構成を説明する図であり、図２３Ｃおよび図２３Ｄは、実施の形態に係る情報処理装置の画素の構成を説明する図である。 1A to 1C are diagrams for explaining the configuration of the information processing apparatus according to the embodiment.
2A and 2B are diagrams for explaining the configuration of the information processing device according to the embodiment, and FIGS. 2C and 2D are diagrams for explaining the configuration of pixels of the information processing device according to the embodiment.
3A to 3C are block diagrams illustrating the configuration of the functional panel according to the embodiment.
4A to 4C are circuit diagrams for explaining the configuration of the functional panel according to the embodiment.
FIG. 5 is a circuit diagram illustrating the configuration of the functional panel according to the embodiment.
FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating the operation of the function panel according to the embodiment.
7A to 7C are diagrams for explaining the configuration of the functional panel according to the embodiment.
FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view illustrating the configuration of the functional panel according to the embodiment.
9A and 9B are cross-sectional views illustrating the configuration of the functional panel according to the embodiment.
10A and 10B are cross-sectional views illustrating the configuration of the functional panel according to the embodiment.
11A and 11B are cross-sectional views illustrating the configuration of the functional panel according to the embodiment.
12A to 12D are diagrams for explaining the configuration of the display device according to the embodiment.
FIG. 13 is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of the input / output device according to the embodiment.
14A to 14C are diagrams for explaining the configuration of the information processing apparatus according to the embodiment.
15A and 15B are flowcharts for explaining the driving method of the information processing apparatus according to the embodiment.
16A to 16C are diagrams for explaining a method of driving the information processing apparatus according to the embodiment.
17A to 17C are diagrams for explaining a method of driving the information processing apparatus according to the embodiment.
18A to 18E are diagrams for explaining the configuration of the information processing apparatus according to the embodiment.
19A to 19E are diagrams for explaining the configuration of the information processing apparatus according to the embodiment.
20A and 20B are diagrams for explaining the configuration of the information processing apparatus according to the embodiment.
FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of an information processing device according to an embodiment.
22A to 22C are diagrams for explaining the configuration of the information processing apparatus according to the embodiment.
23A and 23B are diagrams for explaining the configuration of the information processing device according to the embodiment, and FIGS. 23C and 23D are diagrams for explaining the configuration of pixels of the information processing device according to the embodiment.

本発明の一態様の情報処理装置は、機能パネルと、第１の面と、第２の面と、第３の面と、第４の面と、第５の面と、を有する。機能パネルは第１の領域乃至第５の領域を備え、第２の領域は一の方向に表示し、第３の領域は第１の領域および第２の領域の間に挟まれ、屈曲することができ、第５の領域は第１の領域および第４の領域の間に挟まれ、屈曲することができ、第４の領域は第３の領域および第５の領域が屈曲した状態において、一の方向に表示する機能を備える。第１の面は第１の領域および発光素子を備え、発光素子は光を射出し、第２の面は第２の領域および光電変換素子を備え、光電変換素子は光を電気信号に変換し、第３の面は第１の面および第２の面の間に挟まれ、屈曲することができ、第３の領域を備え、第４の面は第４の領域を備え、第５の面は第１の面および第４の面の間に挟まれ、屈曲することができ、第５の領域を備え、光電変換素子は第３の面の屈曲に伴い、発光素子と対向する。 The information processing device of one aspect of the present invention has a functional panel, a first surface, a second surface, a third surface, a fourth surface, and a fifth surface. The functional panel comprises a first to a fifth region, the second region is displayed in one direction, and the third region is sandwiched and bent between the first region and the second region. The fifth region is sandwiched between the first and fourth regions and can be bent, and the fourth region is one in the state where the third region and the fifth region are bent. It has a function to display in the direction of. The first surface comprises a first region and a light emitting element, the light emitting element emits light, the second surface has a second region and a photoelectric conversion element, and the photoelectric conversion element converts light into an electric signal. , The third surface is sandwiched between the first surface and the second surface and can be bent and includes a third area, the fourth surface includes a fourth area and a fifth surface. Is sandwiched between a first surface and a fourth surface, can be bent, has a fifth region, and the photoelectric conversion element faces the light emitting element as the third surface is bent.

これにより、発光素子および光電変換素子の間に置かれたものの、発光素子が発する光に対する透過率を知ることができる。または、透過率の経時変化を知ることができる。その結果、利便性、有用性または信頼性に優れた新規な情報処理装置を提供することができる。 This makes it possible to know the transmittance of light emitted by the light emitting element, although it is placed between the light emitting element and the photoelectric conversion element. Alternatively, the change in transmittance with time can be known. As a result, it is possible to provide a new information processing apparatus having excellent convenience, usefulness, or reliability.

実施の形態について、図面を用いて詳細に説明する。但し、本発明は以下の説明に限定されず、本発明の趣旨及びその範囲から逸脱することなくその形態及び詳細を様々に変更し得ることは当業者であれば容易に理解される。従って、本発明は以下に示す実施の形態の記載内容に限定して解釈されるものではない。なお、以下に説明する発明の構成において、同一部分又は同様な機能を有する部分には同一の符号を異なる図面間で共通して用い、その繰り返しの説明は省略する。 The embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. However, the present invention is not limited to the following description, and it is easily understood by those skilled in the art that the form and details of the present invention can be variously changed without departing from the spirit and scope of the present invention. Therefore, the present invention is not construed as being limited to the description of the embodiments shown below. In the configuration of the invention described below, the same reference numerals are commonly used in different drawings for the same parts or parts having similar functions, and the repeated description thereof will be omitted.

（実施の形態１）
本実施の形態では、本発明の一態様の情報処理装置の構成について、図１および図２を参照しながら説明する。 (Embodiment 1)
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the information processing apparatus according to one aspect of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2.

図１は本発明の一態様の情報処理装置の構成を説明する図である。図１Ａは、本発明の一態様の情報処理装置を展開した状態を説明する図であり、図１Ｂおよび図１Ｃは図１Ａに示す情報処理装置の一部を屈曲した状態を説明する図である。 FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of an information processing device according to an aspect of the present invention. FIG. 1A is a diagram for explaining a state in which the information processing apparatus according to one aspect of the present invention is deployed, and FIGS. 1B and 1C are diagrams for explaining a state in which a part of the information processing apparatus shown in FIG. ..

図２Ａは、本発明の一態様の情報処理装置の一部を屈曲し、その間隙に指を挿入した状態を説明する図であり、図２Ｂは図２Ａとは異なる角度から描いた図である。また、図２Ｃおよび図２Ｄは、本発明の一態様の情報処理装置の画素の構成を説明する図である。 FIG. 2A is a diagram for explaining a state in which a part of the information processing apparatus according to the present invention is bent and a finger is inserted in the gap, and FIG. 2B is a diagram drawn from an angle different from that of FIG. 2A. .. 2C and 2D are diagrams for explaining the pixel configuration of the information processing apparatus according to one aspect of the present invention.

なお、本明細書において、１以上の整数を値にとる変数を符号に用いる場合がある。例えば、１以上の整数の値をとる変数ｐを含む（ｐ）を、最大ｐ個の構成要素のいずれかを特定する符号の一部に用いる場合がある。また、例えば、１以上の整数の値をとる変数ｍおよび変数ｎを含む（ｍ，ｎ）を、最大ｍ×ｎ個の構成要素のいずれかを特定する符号の一部に用いる場合がある。 In the present specification, a variable having an integer of 1 or more as a value may be used as a code. For example, (p) containing a variable p having a value of one or more integers may be used as a part of a code for specifying any of the maximum p components. Further, for example, (m, n) including a variable m having a value of one or more integers and a variable n may be used as a part of a code for specifying any of a maximum of m × n components.

＜情報処理装置の構成例１＞
本実施の形態で説明する情報処理装置は、機能パネル７００と、面２１０（１）と、面２１０（２）と、面２１０（３）と、面２１０（４）と、面２１０（５）と、を有する（図１Ａ参照）。 <Configuration example 1 of information processing device>
The information processing apparatus described in this embodiment includes a functional panel 700, a surface 210 (1), a surface 210 (2), a surface 210 (3), a surface 210 (4), and a surface 210 (5). And (see FIG. 1A).

＜機能パネル７００の構成例＞
機能パネル７００は領域２３１を備える。領域２３１は領域２３１（１）、領域２３１（２）、領域２３１（３）、領域２３１（４）および第５の領域２３１（５）を備える。なお、領域２３１（２）は一の方向（例えば、図中に矢印Ｚで示す方向）に表示する機能を備える。 <Configuration example of function panel 700>
The functional panel 700 includes an area 231. The region 231 includes a region 231 (1), a region 231 (2), a region 231 (3), a region 231 (4), and a fifth region 231 (5). The area 231 (2) has a function of displaying in one direction (for example, the direction indicated by the arrow Z in the drawing).

領域２３１（３）は領域２３１（１）および領域２３１（２）の間に挟まれ、領域２３１（３）は屈曲することができる（図１Ｂおよび図１Ｃ参照）。 The region 231 (3) is sandwiched between the regions 231 (1) and the region 231 (2), and the region 231 (3) can be bent (see FIGS. 1B and 1C).

領域２３１（５）は領域２３１（１）および領域２３１（４）の間に挟まれ、領域２３１（５）は、屈曲することができる。 The region 231 (5) is sandwiched between the region 231 (1) and the region 231 (4), and the region 231 (5) can be bent.

領域２３１（４）は、領域２３１（３）および領域２３１（５）が屈曲した状態において、一の方向（例えば、図中に矢印Ｚで示す方向）に表示する機能を備える（図１Ｃ参照）。 The region 231 (4) has a function of displaying in one direction (for example, the direction indicated by the arrow Z in the drawing) when the region 231 (3) and the region 231 (5) are bent (see FIG. 1C). ..

＜面２１０（１）乃至面２１０（５）の構成例＞
面２１０（１）は、領域２３１（１）および発光素子５５０（１）を備える。なお、発光素子５５０（１）は、光ｈ１を発する（図１Ａ参照）。 <Structure example of surface 210 (1) to surface 210 (5)>
The surface 210 (1) includes a region 231 (1) and a light emitting element 550 (1). The light emitting element 550 (1) emits light h1 (see FIG. 1A).

面２１０（２）は、領域２３１（２）および光電変換素子ＰＤ（２）を備える。 The surface 210 (2) includes a region 231 (2) and a photoelectric conversion element PD (2).

面２１０（３）は、面２１０（１）および面２１０（２）の間に挟まれ、面２１０（３）は屈曲することができる（図１Ｂおよび図１Ｃ参照）。また、面２１０（３）は領域２３１（３）を備える。 The surface 210 (3) is sandwiched between the surface 210 (1) and the surface 210 (2), and the surface 210 (3) can be bent (see FIGS. 1B and 1C). Further, the surface 210 (3) includes a region 231 (3).

面２１０（４）は領域２３１（４）を備える。 The surface 210 (4) comprises a region 231 (4).

面２１０（５）は、面２１０（１）および面２１０（４）の間に挟まれ、面２１０（５）は屈曲することができる。また、面２１０（５）は領域２３１（５）を備える。 The surface 210 (5) is sandwiched between the surface 210 (1) and the surface 210 (4), and the surface 210 (5) can be bent. Further, the surface 210 (5) includes a region 231 (5).

《光電変換素子ＰＤ（２）の構成例１》
光電変換素子ＰＤ（２）は、光ｈ１を電気信号に変換する機能を備える。また、光電変換素子ＰＤ（２）は、面２１０（３）の屈曲に伴い、発光素子５５０（１）と対向する（図１Ｃ、図２Ａおよび図２Ｂ参照）。 << Configuration Example 1 of Photoelectric Conversion Element PD (2) >>
The photoelectric conversion element PD (2) has a function of converting light h1 into an electric signal. Further, the photoelectric conversion element PD (2) faces the light emitting element 550 (1) as the surface 210 (3) bends (see FIGS. 1C, 2A and 2B).

これにより、発光素子５５０（１）および光電変換素子ＰＤ（２）の間に置かれたものの、発光素子５５０（１）が発する光に対する透過率を知ることができる。または、透過率の経時変化を知ることができる。その結果、利便性、有用性または信頼性に優れた新規な情報処理装置を提供することができる。 Thereby, although it is placed between the light emitting element 550 (1) and the photoelectric conversion element PD (2), the transmittance for the light emitted by the light emitting element 550 (1) can be known. Alternatively, the change in transmittance with time can be known. As a result, it is possible to provide a new information processing apparatus having excellent convenience, usefulness, or reliability.

《発光素子５５０（１）の構成例１》
光ｈ１は、６５０ｎｍ以上１０００ｎｍ以下の波長を備える光を含む。例えば、４００ｎｍ以上１０００ｎｍ以下の波長を備える光を発する発光素子を用いることができる。 << Configuration Example 1 of Light Emitting Element 550 (1) >>
The light h1 includes light having a wavelength of 650 nm or more and 1000 nm or less. For example, a light emitting element that emits light having a wavelength of 400 nm or more and 1000 nm or less can be used.

これにより、例えば、指などの発光素子５５０（１）が発する光に対する透過率を知ることができる。または、例えば、血流の経時変化を知ることができる。または、例えば、脈拍を知ることができる。または、静脈の分布を知ることができる。または、生体認証に用いることができる。または、ヘルスケア用途に用いることができる。その結果、利便性、有用性または信頼性に優れた新規な情報処理装置を提供することができる。 Thereby, for example, the transmittance for the light emitted by the light emitting element 550 (1) such as a finger can be known. Alternatively, for example, it is possible to know the change over time in blood flow. Alternatively, for example, the pulse can be known. Alternatively, the distribution of veins can be known. Alternatively, it can be used for biometric authentication. Alternatively, it can be used for healthcare applications. As a result, it is possible to provide a new information processing apparatus having excellent convenience, usefulness, or reliability.

《発光素子５５０（１）の構成例２》
発光素子５５０（１）は、発光性の材料を含む。例えば、発光性の有機化合物を、発光素子５５０（１）に用いることができる。具体的には、発光素子５５０（１）は、発光ユニットを備える。発光ユニットは、一方から注入された電子が他方から注入された正孔と再結合する領域を１つ備える。また、発光ユニットは発光性の材料を含み、発光性の材料は電子と正孔の再結合により生じるエネルギーを光として放出する。なお、正孔輸送層および電子輸送層を発光ユニットに用いることができる。正孔輸送層は電子輸送層より正極側に配置され、正孔輸送層は電子輸送層より正孔の移動度が高い。発光性の材料、正孔輸送層および電子輸送層を発光素子５５０に用いることができる。 << Configuration Example 2 of Light Emitting Element 550 (1) >>
The light emitting element 550 (1) contains a light emitting material. For example, a luminescent organic compound can be used in the light emitting device 550 (1). Specifically, the light emitting element 550 (1) includes a light emitting unit. The light emitting unit includes one region in which an electron injected from one side recombines with a hole injected from the other side. Further, the light emitting unit includes a light emitting material, and the light emitting material emits energy generated by recombination of electrons and holes as light. The hole transport layer and the electron transport layer can be used for the light emitting unit. The hole transport layer is arranged on the positive electrode side of the electron transport layer, and the hole transport layer has higher hole mobility than the electron transport layer. A luminescent material, a hole transport layer and an electron transport layer can be used for the light emitting device 550.

《光電変換素子ＰＤ（２）の構成例２》 << Configuration Example 2 of Photoelectric Conversion Element PD (2) >>

光電変換素子ＰＤ（２）は、光電変換材料を含む。例えば、フラーレンを光電変換素子ＰＤ（２）に用いることができる。または、例えば、電子受容性材料および電子供与性材料を光電変換材料に用いることができる。または、電子受容性材料および電子供与性材料の積層膜を光電変換材料に用いることができる。または、電子受容性材料および電子供与性材料の混合膜を光電変換材料に用いることができる。または、電子受容性材料および電子供与性材料がバルクヘテロ接合した膜を光電変換材料に用いることができる。具体的には、電子受容性材料および電子供与性材料の共蒸着膜を光電変換層に用いることができる。例えば、フタロシアニン誘導体を電子供与材料に用いることができ、フラーレン誘導体等を電子受容体に用いる事ができる。具体的には、光電変換層、正孔輸送層および電子輸送層を光電変換素子ＰＤ（２）に用いることができる。光電変換層は、正孔輸送層および電子輸送層の間に挟まれ、光電変換層は光電変換材料を含む。なお、例えば、発光素子５５０（１）に用いることができる正孔輸送層を、光電変換素子ＰＤ（２）に用いることができる。または、発光素子５５０（１）に用いることができる電子輸送層を、光電変換素子ＰＤ（２）に用いることができる。または、同一の工程で作成することができる正孔輸送層を発光素子５５０（１）および光電変換素子ＰＤ（２）に用いることができる。または、同一の工程で作成することができる電子輸送層を発光素子５５０（１）および光電変換素子ＰＤ（２）に用いることができる。 The photoelectric conversion element PD (2) includes a photoelectric conversion material. For example, fullerenes can be used for the photoelectric conversion element PD (2). Alternatively, for example, an electron accepting material and an electron donating material can be used as the photoelectric conversion material. Alternatively, a laminated film of an electron accepting material and an electron donating material can be used as the photoelectric conversion material. Alternatively, a mixed film of an electron accepting material and an electron donating material can be used as the photoelectric conversion material. Alternatively, a film in which an electron accepting material and an electron donating material are bulk heterobonded can be used as the photoelectric conversion material. Specifically, a co-deposited film of an electron-accepting material and an electron-donating material can be used for the photoelectric conversion layer. For example, a phthalocyanine derivative can be used as an electron donating material, and a fullerene derivative or the like can be used as an electron acceptor. Specifically, the photoelectric conversion layer, the hole transport layer, and the electron transport layer can be used for the photoelectric conversion element PD (2). The photoelectric conversion layer is sandwiched between the hole transport layer and the electron transport layer, and the photoelectric conversion layer contains a photoelectric conversion material. For example, the hole transport layer that can be used for the light emitting element 550 (1) can be used for the photoelectric conversion element PD (2). Alternatively, the electron transport layer that can be used for the light emitting element 550 (1) can be used for the photoelectric conversion element PD (2). Alternatively, a hole transport layer that can be produced in the same step can be used for the light emitting element 550 (1) and the photoelectric conversion element PD (2). Alternatively, an electron transport layer that can be produced in the same process can be used for the light emitting element 550 (1) and the photoelectric conversion element PD (2).

これにより、発光素子５５０（１）に用いる構成の一部を、光電変換素子ＰＤ（２）の構成の一部に用いることができる。例えば、発光素子５５０（１）に用いる正孔輸送層を、光電変換素子ＰＤ（２）の正孔輸送層に用いることができる。例えば、発光素子５５０（１）に用いる電子輸送層を、光電変換素子ＰＤ（２）の電子輸送層に用いることができる。その結果、利便性、有用性または信頼性に優れた新規な情報処理装置を提供することができる。 As a result, a part of the configuration used for the light emitting element 550 (1) can be used as a part of the configuration of the photoelectric conversion element PD (2). For example, the hole transport layer used in the light emitting element 550 (1) can be used in the hole transport layer of the photoelectric conversion element PD (2). For example, the electron transport layer used for the light emitting element 550 (1) can be used for the electron transport layer of the photoelectric conversion element PD (2). As a result, it is possible to provide a new information processing apparatus having excellent convenience, usefulness, or reliability.

＜情報処理装置の構成例２＞
本実施の形態では、本発明の一態様の情報処理装置の構成について、図２２および図２３を参照しながら説明する。 <Configuration example 2 of information processing device>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the information processing apparatus according to one aspect of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23.

図２２は本発明の一態様の情報処理装置の構成を説明する図である。図２２Ａは、本発明の一態様の情報処理装置を展開した状態を説明する図であり、図２２Ｂおよび図２２Ｃは図２２Ａに示す情報処理装置の一部を屈曲した状態を説明する図である。 FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of an information processing device according to an aspect of the present invention. FIG. 22A is a diagram for explaining a state in which the information processing apparatus according to one aspect of the present invention is deployed, and FIGS. 22B and 22C are diagrams for explaining a state in which a part of the information processing apparatus shown in FIG. 22A is bent. ..

図２３Ａは、本発明の一態様の情報処理装置の一部を屈曲し、その間隙に指を挿入した状態を説明する図であり、図２３Ｂは図２３Ａとは異なる角度から描いた図である。また、図２３Ｃおよび図２３Ｄは、本発明の一態様の情報処理装置の画素の構成を説明する図である。 FIG. 23A is a diagram for explaining a state in which a part of the information processing apparatus according to the present invention is bent and a finger is inserted in the gap, and FIG. 23B is a diagram drawn from an angle different from that of FIG. 23A. .. 23C and 23D are diagrams for explaining the pixel configuration of the information processing apparatus according to one aspect of the present invention.

図２２および図２３に示す情報処理装置は、領域２３１（１）および領域２３１（４）の間に、領域２３１（５）を備えていない点が、図１および図２に示す情報処理装置とは異なる。 The information processing apparatus shown in FIGS. 22 and 23 is different from the information processing apparatus shown in FIGS. 1 and 2 in that the area 231 (5) is not provided between the areas 231 (1) and 231 (4). Is different.

なお、本実施の形態は、本明細書で示す他の実施の形態と適宜組み合わせることができる。 It should be noted that this embodiment can be appropriately combined with other embodiments shown in the present specification.

（実施の形態２）
本実施の形態では、本発明の一態様の情報処理装置に用いることができる機能パネルの構成について、図３乃至図６を参照しながら説明する。 (Embodiment 2)
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the functional panel that can be used in the information processing apparatus of one aspect of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 to 6.

図３は本発明の一態様の情報処理装置に用いることができる機能パネルの構成を説明する図である。図３Ａは機能パネルのブロック図であり、図３Ｂおよび図３Ｃは図３Ａの一部を説明する図である。 FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a functional panel that can be used in the information processing apparatus of one aspect of the present invention. FIG. 3A is a block diagram of a functional panel, and FIGS. 3B and 3C are diagrams illustrating a part of FIG. 3A.

図４は本発明の一態様の情報処理装置に用いることができる機能パネルの構成を説明する図である。図４Ａは機能パネルの画素回路５３０Ｓ（ｊ）の回路図であり、図４Ｂは機能パネルの増幅回路の一部を説明する回路図であり、図４Ｃは機能パネルのサンプリング回路ＳＣ（ｊ）の回路図である。 FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a functional panel that can be used in the information processing apparatus of one aspect of the present invention. FIG. 4A is a circuit diagram of the pixel circuit 530S (j) of the functional panel, FIG. 4B is a circuit diagram illustrating a part of the amplifier circuit of the functional panel, and FIG. 4C is a sampling circuit SC (j) of the functional panel. It is a circuit diagram.

図５は本発明の一態様の情報処理装置に用いることができる機能パネルの構成を説明する図である。図５は機能パネルの画素回路５３０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）の回路図である。 FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a functional panel that can be used in the information processing apparatus of one aspect of the present invention. FIG. 5 is a circuit diagram of the pixel circuit 530G (i, j) of the function panel.

図６は本発明の一態様の情報処理装置に用いることができる機能パネルの動作を説明する図である。 FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating the operation of a functional panel that can be used in the information processing apparatus of one aspect of the present invention.

＜機能パネルの構成例１＞
本実施の形態で説明する機能パネルは、駆動回路ＧＤと、駆動回路ＲＤと、領域２３１と、を有する（図３Ａ参照）。なお、領域２３１は、領域２３１（２）を備える（図１Ａ参照）。 <Function panel configuration example 1>
The functional panel described in this embodiment has a drive circuit GD, a drive circuit RD, and a region 231 (see FIG. 3A). The area 231 includes the area 231 (2) (see FIG. 1A).

駆動回路ＧＤは第１の選択信号を供給し、駆動回路ＲＤは、第２の選択信号および第３の選択信号を供給し、領域２３１（２）は、画素７０３（ｉ，ｊ）を備える。 The drive circuit GD supplies a first selection signal, the drive circuit RD supplies a second selection signal and a third selection signal, and the area 231 (2) includes pixels 703 (i, j).

《画素７０３（ｉ，ｊ）の構成例１》
画素７０３（ｉ，ｊ）は、画素回路５３０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）、発光素子５５０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）、画素回路５３０Ｓ（ｉ，ｊ）および光電変換素子ＰＤ（ｉ，ｊ）を備える（図３Ｂおよび図３Ｃ参照）。 << Configuration Example 1 of Pixel 703 (i, j) >>
The pixel 703 (i, j) includes a pixel circuit 530G (i, j), a light emitting element 550G (i, j), a pixel circuit 530S (i, j), and a photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j) (FIG. 3B). And see Figure 3C).

《画素回路５３０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）の構成例１》
画素回路５３０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）は、第１の選択信号を供給され、画素回路５３０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）は、第１の選択信号に基づいて、画像信号を取得する。例えば、導電膜Ｇ１（ｉ）を用いて、第１の選択信号を供給することができる（図３Ｂ参照）。または、導電膜Ｓ１ｇ（ｊ）を用いて画像信号を供給することができる。 << Configuration Example 1 of Pixel Circuit 530G (i, j) >>
The pixel circuit 530G (i, j) is supplied with the first selection signal, and the pixel circuit 530G (i, j) acquires an image signal based on the first selection signal. For example, the conductive film G1 (i) can be used to supply the first selection signal (see FIG. 3B). Alternatively, the image signal can be supplied using the conductive film S1g (j).

なお、第１の選択信号を供給し、画像信号を画素回路５３０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）に取得させる動作を「書き込み」ということができる（図６参照）。 The operation of supplying the first selection signal and causing the pixel circuit 530G (i, j) to acquire the image signal can be referred to as “writing” (see FIG. 6).

《発光素子５５０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）の構成例１》
発光素子５５０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）は画素回路５３０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）と電気的に接続され、発光素子５５０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）は画像信号に基づいて、発光する（図３Ｂおよび図３Ｃ参照）。 << Configuration Example 1 of Light Emitting Element 550G (i, j) >>
The light emitting element 550G (i, j) is electrically connected to the pixel circuit 530G (i, j), and the light emitting element 550G (i, j) emits light based on the image signal (see FIGS. 3B and 3C).

なお、発光素子５５０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）は、画素回路５３０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）と電気的に接続される電極５５１Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）と、導電膜ＶＣＯＭ２と電気的に接続される電極５５２を備える（図５および図１０Ａ参照）。 The light emitting element 550G (i, j) includes an electrode 551G (i, j) that is electrically connected to the pixel circuit 530G (i, j) and an electrode 552 that is electrically connected to the conductive film VCOM2. (See FIGS. 5 and 10A).

《画素回路５３０Ｓ（ｉ，ｊ）の構成例１》
画素回路５３０Ｓ（ｉ，ｊ）は、第１の選択信号を供給されていない期間に、第２の選択信号および第３の選択信号を供給される（図６参照）。また、画素回路５３０Ｓ（ｉ，ｊ）は、第２の選択信号に基づいて、撮像信号を取得し、第３の選択信号に基づいて、撮像信号を供給する。例えば、導電膜ＴＸ（ｉ）を用いて、第２の選択信号を供給し、導電膜ＳＥ（ｉ）を用いて、第３の選択信号を供給することができる（図３Ｂおよび図４Ａ参照）。 << Configuration Example 1 of Pixel Circuit 530S (i, j) >>
The pixel circuit 530S (i, j) is supplied with the second selection signal and the third selection signal during the period when the first selection signal is not supplied (see FIG. 6). Further, the pixel circuit 530S (i, j) acquires an image pickup signal based on the second selection signal, and supplies the image pickup signal based on the third selection signal. For example, the conductive film TX (i) can be used to supply a second selection signal, and the conductive film SE (i) can be used to supply a third selection signal (see FIGS. 3B and 4A). ..

なお、第２の選択信号を供給し、撮像信号を画素回路５３０Ｓ（ｉ，ｊ）に取得させる動作を「撮像」ということができる（図６参照）。また、画素回路５３０Ｓ（ｉ，ｊ）から撮像信号を読み出す動作を「読み出し」ということができる。また、所定の電圧を光電変換素子ＰＤ（ｉ，ｊ）に供給する動作を「初期化」と、所定の期間、初期化後の光電変換素子ＰＤ（ｉ，ｊ）を光にさらす動作を「露光」と、露光にともない変化した電圧を画素回路５３０Ｓ（ｉ，ｊ）に反映する動作を「転送」ということができる。また、図中のＳＲＳは相関二重サンプリング法に用いる参照信号を供給する動作に、「出力」は撮像信号を供給する動作に相当する。 The operation of supplying the second selection signal and causing the pixel circuit 530S (i, j) to acquire the imaging signal can be referred to as “imaging” (see FIG. 6). Further, the operation of reading the image pickup signal from the pixel circuit 530S (i, j) can be referred to as "reading". Further, the operation of supplying a predetermined voltage to the photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j) is "initialization", and the operation of exposing the initialized photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j) to light for a predetermined period is "initialization". "Exposure" and the operation of reflecting the voltage changed with exposure on the pixel circuit 530S (i, j) can be called "transfer". Further, SRS in the figure corresponds to an operation of supplying a reference signal used in the correlated double sampling method, and “output” corresponds to an operation of supplying an imaging signal.

例えば、１フレームの画像情報を、１６．７ｍｓで書き込むことができる。具体的には、６０Ｈｚのフレームレートで動作することができる。なお、画像信号を、画素回路５３０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）に１５．２μｓで書き込むことができる。 For example, one frame of image information can be written in 16.7 ms. Specifically, it can operate at a frame rate of 60 Hz. The image signal can be written to the pixel circuit 530G (i, j) at 15.2 μs.

例えば、１フレームの画像情報を、１６フレームに相当する期間、保持することができる。または、１フレームの撮像情報を、１６フレームに相当する期間で撮影および読み出すことができる。 For example, one frame of image information can be retained for a period corresponding to 16 frames. Alternatively, the imaging information of one frame can be photographed and read out in a period corresponding to 16 frames.

具体的には、１５μｓで初期化し、１ｍｓ以上５ｍｓ以下で露光し、１５０μｓで転送することができる。または、２５０ｍｓで読み出すことができる。 Specifically, it can be initialized at 15 μs, exposed at 1 ms or more and 5 ms or less, and transferred at 150 μs. Alternatively, it can be read in 250 ms.

《光電変換素子ＰＤ（ｉ，ｊ）の構成例１》
光電変換素子ＰＤ（ｉ，ｊ）は画素回路５３０Ｓ（ｉ，ｊ）と電気的に接続され、光電変換素子ＰＤ（ｉ，ｊ）は撮像信号を生成する。例えば、実施の形態１で説明する光電変換素子ＰＤ（２）を、光電変換素子ＰＤ（ｉ，ｊ）に用いることができる。 << Configuration Example 1 of Photoelectric Conversion Element PD (i, j) >>
The photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j) is electrically connected to the pixel circuit 530S (i, j), and the photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j) generates an imaging signal. For example, the photoelectric conversion element PD (2) described in the first embodiment can be used for the photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j).

これにより、第１の選択信号が供給されていない期間に撮像することができる。または、撮像時のノイズを抑制することができる。または、第１の選択信号が供給されていない期間に、撮像信号を読み取ることができる。または、読み取り時のノイズを抑制することができる。その結果、利便性、有用性または信頼性に優れた新規な機能パネルを提供することができる。 As a result, it is possible to take an image during the period when the first selection signal is not supplied. Alternatively, noise during imaging can be suppressed. Alternatively, the imaging signal can be read during the period when the first selection signal is not supplied. Alternatively, noise during reading can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to provide a new functional panel that is excellent in convenience, usefulness, or reliability.

なお、光電変換素子ＰＤ（ｉ，ｊ）は、画素回路５３０Ｓ（ｉ，ｊ）と電気的に接続される電極５５１Ｓ（ｉ，ｊ）と、導電膜ＶＰＤと電気的に接続される電極５５２を備える（図４Ａおよび図９Ａ参照）。また、発光素子５５０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）に用いる電極５５２を、光電変換素子ＰＤ（ｉ，ｊ）に用いることができる。これにより、機能パネルの構成および作製工程を簡略化することができる。 The photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j) has an electrode 551S (i, j) electrically connected to the pixel circuit 530S (i, j) and an electrode 552 electrically connected to the conductive film VPD. Provide (see FIGS. 4A and 9A). Further, the electrode 552 used for the light emitting element 550G (i, j) can be used for the photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j). This makes it possible to simplify the configuration and manufacturing process of the functional panel.

《画素７０３（ｉ，ｊ）の構成例２》
複数の画素を画素７０３（ｉ，ｊ）に用いることができる。例えば、色相が互いに異なる色を表示する複数の画素を用いることができる。なお、複数の画素のそれぞれを副画素と言い換えることができる。または、複数の副画素を一組にして、画素と言い換えることができる。 << Configuration Example 2 of Pixel 703 (i, j) >>
A plurality of pixels can be used for the pixel 703 (i, j). For example, it is possible to use a plurality of pixels that display colors having different hues. It should be noted that each of the plurality of pixels can be paraphrased as a sub-pixel. Alternatively, a plurality of sub-pixels can be combined into a set and can be paraphrased as a pixel.

これにより、当該複数の画素が表示する色を加法混色または減法混色することができる。または、個々の画素では表示することができない色相の色を、表示することができる。 As a result, the colors displayed by the plurality of pixels can be additively mixed or subtracted. Alternatively, it is possible to display a hue color that cannot be displayed by individual pixels.

具体的には、青色を表示する画素７０２Ｂ（ｉ，ｊ）、緑色を表示する画素７０２Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）および赤色を表示する画素７０２Ｒ（ｉ，ｊ）を画素７０３（ｉ，ｊ）に用いることができる。また、画素７０２Ｂ（ｉ，ｊ）、画素７０２Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）および画素７０２Ｒ（ｉ，ｊ）のそれぞれを副画素と言い換えることができる（図７Ｂ参照）。 Specifically, pixels 702B (i, j) for displaying blue, pixels 702G (i, j) for displaying green, and pixels 702R (i, j) for displaying red are used for pixels 703 (i, j). be able to. Further, each of the pixels 702B (i, j), the pixels 702G (i, j) and the pixels 702R (i, j) can be paraphrased as sub-pixels (see FIG. 7B).

また、例えば、白色等を表示する画素を上記の一組に加えて、画素７０３（ｉ，ｊ）に用いることができる。また、シアンを表示する画素、マゼンタを表示する画素およびイエローを表示する画素を、画素７０３（ｉ，ｊ）に用いることができる。 Further, for example, a pixel displaying white or the like can be used for the pixel 703 (i, j) in addition to the above set. Further, pixels for displaying cyan, pixels for displaying magenta, and pixels for displaying yellow can be used for the pixels 703 (i, j).

また、例えば、赤外線を発する画素を上記の一組に加えて、画素７０３（ｇ，ｈ）に用いることができる（図７Ｃ参照）。具体的には、６５０ｎｍ以上１０００ｎｍ以下の波長を備える光を含む光を発する画素７０２Ｎ（ｇ，ｈ）を、画素７０３（ｇ，ｈ）に用いることができる。 Further, for example, a pixel that emits infrared rays can be added to the above set and used for the pixel 703 (g, h) (see FIG. 7C). Specifically, pixels 702N (g, h) that emit light including light having a wavelength of 650 nm or more and 1000 nm or less can be used for the pixel 703 (g, h).

《画素７０３（ｉ，ｊ）の構成例３》
画素７０３（ｉ，ｊ）は、一の画像信号を保持している期間に、第２の選択信号を供給される。例えば、画素回路５３０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）が一の画像信号を保持している期間に、画素７０３（ｉ，ｊ）は、発光素子５５０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）を用いて、当該画像信号に基づいて、光を発することができる（図６参照）。または、画素回路５３０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）が、第１の選択信号に基づいて、一の画像信号を取得したのちに、再び第１の選択信号を供給されるまでの間に、画素回路５３０Ｓ（ｉ，ｊ）は第２の選択信号を供給される。 << Configuration Example 3 of Pixel 703 (i, j) >>
Pixels 703 (i, j) are supplied with a second selection signal during the period in which one image signal is held. For example, while the pixel circuit 530G (i, j) holds one image signal, the pixel 703 (i, j) uses the light emitting element 550G (i, j) and is based on the image signal. , Can emit light (see FIG. 6). Alternatively, after the pixel circuit 530G (i, j) acquires one image signal based on the first selection signal, before the first selection signal is supplied again, the pixel circuit 530S ( i, j) are supplied with a second selection signal.

これにより、画像信号を用いて、発光素子５５０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）が発する光の強度を制御することができる。または、強度が制御された光を、被写体に照射することができる。または、光電変換素子ＰＤ（ｉ，ｊ）を用いて、被写体を撮像することができる。または、照射する光の強度を制御しながら、光電変換素子ＰＤ（ｉ，ｊ）を用いて、被写体を撮像することができる。または、画素回路５３０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）が保持する信号の、一の画像信号から他の画像信号への変化がもたらす、撮像信号への影響をなくすことができる。その結果、利便性、有用性または信頼性に優れた新規な機能パネルを提供することができる。 Thereby, the intensity of the light emitted by the light emitting element 550G (i, j) can be controlled by using the image signal. Alternatively, the subject can be irradiated with light having a controlled intensity. Alternatively, the subject can be imaged using the photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j). Alternatively, the subject can be imaged by using the photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j) while controlling the intensity of the emitted light. Alternatively, it is possible to eliminate the influence on the image pickup signal caused by the change of the signal held by the pixel circuit 530G (i, j) from one image signal to another. As a result, it is possible to provide a new functional panel that is excellent in convenience, usefulness, or reliability.

《画素７０３（ｉ，ｊ）の構成例４》
画素７０３（ｉ，ｊ）は、一の画像信号を保持している期間に、第３の選択信号を供給される。例えば、画素回路５３０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）が、第１の選択信号に基づいて、一の画像信号を取得し、再び第１の選択信号を供給されるまでの間に、画素回路５３０Ｓ（ｉ，ｊ）は第２の選択信号を供給される（図６参照）。 << Configuration Example 4 of Pixel 703 (i, j) >>
Pixels 703 (i, j) are supplied with a third selection signal during the period in which one image signal is held. For example, until the pixel circuit 530G (i, j) acquires one image signal based on the first selection signal and is supplied with the first selection signal again, the pixel circuit 530S (i, j) j) is supplied with a second selection signal (see FIG. 6).

これにより、画素回路５３０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）が保持する信号の、一の画像信号から他の画像信号への変化がもたらす、撮像信号への影響をなくすことができる。その結果、利便性、有用性または信頼性に優れた新規な機能パネルを提供することができる。 As a result, it is possible to eliminate the influence of the signal held by the pixel circuit 530G (i, j) on the imaging signal caused by the change from one image signal to the other image signal. As a result, it is possible to provide a new functional panel that is excellent in convenience, usefulness, or reliability.

＜機能パネルの構成例２＞
本発明の一態様の情報処理装置に用いることができる機能パネルは、導電膜ＴＸ（ｉ）と、導電膜ＶＲと、導電膜ＲＳ（ｉ）と、導電膜ＶＣＰと、導電膜ＶＰＩと、導電膜ＷＸ（ｊ）と、導電膜ＳＥ（ｉ）と、を有する（図４Ａ参照）。また、導電膜ＴＸ（ｉ）は、第２の選択信号を供給され、導電膜ＳＥ（ｉ）は第３の選択信号を供給される。 <Function panel configuration example 2>
The functional panels that can be used in the information processing device of one aspect of the present invention include the conductive film TX (i), the conductive film VR, the conductive film RS (i), the conductive film VCP, the conductive film VPI, and the conductive film. It has a film WX (j) and a conductive film SE (i) (see FIG. 4A). Further, the conductive film TX (i) is supplied with a second selection signal, and the conductive film SE (i) is supplied with a third selection signal.

《画素回路５３０Ｓ（ｉ，ｊ）の構成例２》
画素回路５３０Ｓ（ｉ，ｊ）は、スイッチＳＷ３１、スイッチＳＷ３２、スイッチＳＷ３３、トランジスタＭ３１、容量Ｃ３１およびノードＦＤを備える。 << Configuration Example 2 of Pixel Circuit 530S (i, j) >>
The pixel circuit 530S (i, j) includes a switch SW31, a switch SW32, a switch SW33, a transistor M31, a capacitance C31, and a node FD.

スイッチＳＷ３１は、光電変換素子ＰＤ（ｉ，ｊ）と電気的に接続される第１の端子と、ノードＦＤと電気的に接続される第２の端子と、導電膜ＴＸ（ｉ）の電位に基づいて、導通状態または非導通状態を制御する機能を備える。 The switch SW31 has a potential of a first terminal electrically connected to the photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j), a second terminal electrically connected to the node FD, and a conductive film TX (i). Based on this, it has a function of controlling a conducting state or a non-conducting state.

スイッチＳＷ３２は、ノードＦＤと電気的に接続される第１の端子と、導電膜ＶＲと電気的に接続される第２の端子と、導電膜ＲＳ（ｉ）の電位に基づいて、導通状態または非導通状態を制御する機能を備える。 The switch SW32 is in a conductive state or is based on the potential of the first terminal electrically connected to the node FD, the second terminal electrically connected to the conductive film VR, and the conductive film RS (i). It has a function to control the non-conducting state.

容量Ｃ３１は、ノードＦＤと電気的に接続される導電膜と、導電膜ＶＣＰと電気的に接続される導電膜を備える。 The capacitance C31 includes a conductive film that is electrically connected to the node FD and a conductive film that is electrically connected to the conductive film VCP.

トランジスタＭ３１は、ノードＦＤと電気的に接続されるゲート電極と、導電膜ＶＰＩと電気的に接続される第１の電極と、を備える。 The transistor M31 includes a gate electrode electrically connected to the node FD and a first electrode electrically connected to the conductive film VPI.

スイッチＳＷ３３は、トランジスタＭ３１の第２の電極と電気的に接続される第１の端子と、導電膜ＷＸ（ｊ）と電気的に接続される第２の端子と、導電膜ＳＥ（ｉ）の電位に基づいて、導通状態または非導通状態を制御する機能を備える。 The switch SW33 is of the first terminal electrically connected to the second electrode of the transistor M31, the second terminal electrically connected to the conductive film WX (j), and the conductive film SE (i). It has a function of controlling a conductive state or a non-conducting state based on a potential.

これにより、光電変換素子ＰＤ（ｉ，ｊ）が生成した撮像信号を、スイッチＳＷ３１を用いて、ノードＦＤ転送することができる。または、光電変換素子ＰＤ（ｉ，ｊ）が生成した撮像信号を、スイッチＳＷ３１を用いて、ノードＦＤに格納することができる。または、画素回路５３０Ｓ（ｉ，ｊ）および光電変換素子ＰＤ（ｉ，ｊ）の間を、スイッチＳＷ３１を用いて、非導通状態にすることができる。または、相関二重サンプリング法を適用することができる。または、撮像信号に含まれるノイズを低減することができる。その結果、利便性、有用性または信頼性に優れた新規な機能パネルを提供することができる。 As a result, the image pickup signal generated by the photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j) can be transferred to the node FD using the switch SW31. Alternatively, the imaging signal generated by the photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j) can be stored in the node FD by using the switch SW31. Alternatively, the switch SW31 can be used to bring the pixel circuit 530S (i, j) and the photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j) into a non-conducting state. Alternatively, the correlated double sampling method can be applied. Alternatively, the noise included in the image pickup signal can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to provide a new functional panel that is excellent in convenience, usefulness, or reliability.

＜機能パネルの構成例３＞
本発明の一態様の情報処理装置に用いることができる機能パネルは、導電膜Ｇ１（ｉ）と、導電膜Ｇ２（ｉ）と、導電膜Ｓ１ｇ（ｊ）と、導電膜Ｓ２ｇ（ｊ）と、導電膜ＡＮＯと、を有する（図５参照）。また、導電膜Ｇ１（ｉ）は、第１の選択信号を供給される。例えば、導電膜Ｓ１ｇ（ｊ）を用いて画像信号を供給することができる。または、導電膜Ｓ１ｇ（ｊ）を用いて供給した信号に、導電膜Ｓ２ｇ（ｊ）を用いて供給する信号を加えることができる。なお、例えば、導電膜Ｓ１ｇ（ｊ）を用いて、画像信号を１５．２μｓで供給することができる。または、導電膜Ｓ１ｇ（ｊ）および導電膜Ｓ２ｇ（ｊ）を用いて、３０．４μｓで供給することができる。 <Function panel configuration example 3>
The functional panels that can be used in the information processing apparatus of one aspect of the present invention include the conductive film G1 (i), the conductive film G2 (i), the conductive film S1g (j), and the conductive film S2g (j). It has a conductive film ANO (see FIG. 5). Further, the conductive film G1 (i) is supplied with a first selection signal. For example, an image signal can be supplied using the conductive film S1g (j). Alternatively, a signal supplied using the conductive film S2g (j) can be added to the signal supplied using the conductive film S1g (j). In addition, for example, the image signal can be supplied at 15.2 μs by using the conductive film S1 g (j). Alternatively, the conductive film S1g (j) and the conductive film S2g (j) can be used and supplied at 30.4 μs.

《画素回路５３０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）の構成例２》
画素回路５３０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）は、スイッチＳＷ２１、スイッチＳＷ２２、トランジスタＭ２１、容量Ｃ２１およびノードＮ２１を備える。 << Configuration Example 2 of Pixel Circuit 530G (i, j) >>
The pixel circuit 530G (i, j) includes a switch SW21, a switch SW22, a transistor M21, a capacitance C21, and a node N21.

トランジスタＭ２１は、ノードＮ２１と電気的に接続されるゲート電極と、発光素子５５０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）と電気的に接続される第１の電極と、導電膜ＡＮＯと電気的に接続される第２の電極と、を備える。 The transistor M21 has a gate electrode electrically connected to the node N21, a first electrode electrically connected to the light emitting element 550G (i, j), and a second electrode electrically connected to the conductive film ANO. The electrodes are provided.

スイッチＳＷ２１は、ノードＮ２１と電気的に接続される第１の端子と、導電膜Ｓ１ｇ（ｊ）と電気的に接続される第２の端子と、導電膜Ｇ１（ｉ）の電位に基づいて、導通状態または非導通状態を制御する機能を備える。 The switch SW21 is based on the potential of the first terminal electrically connected to the node N21, the second terminal electrically connected to the conductive film S1g (j), and the conductive film G1 (i). It has a function to control the conducting state or the non-conducting state.

スイッチＳＷ２２は、導電膜Ｓ２ｇ（ｊ）と電気的に接続される第１の端子と、導電膜Ｇ２（ｉ）の電位に基づいて、導通状態または非導通状態を制御する機能を備える。 The switch SW22 has a function of controlling a conductive state or a non-conducting state based on the potential of the conductive film G2 (i) and the first terminal electrically connected to the conductive film S2g (j).

容量Ｃ２１は、ノードＮ２１と電気的に接続される導電膜と、スイッチＳＷ２２の第２の電極と電気的に接続される導電膜を備える。 The capacitance C21 includes a conductive film that is electrically connected to the node N21 and a conductive film that is electrically connected to the second electrode of the switch SW22.

これにより、画像信号をノードＮ２１に格納することができる。または、ノードＮ２１の電位を、スイッチＳＷ２２を用いて、変更することができる。または、発光素子５５０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）が発する光の強度を、ノードＮ２１の電位を用いて、制御することができる。その結果、利便性、有用性または信頼性に優れた新規な機能パネルを提供することができる。 As a result, the image signal can be stored in the node N21. Alternatively, the potential of the node N21 can be changed by using the switch SW22. Alternatively, the intensity of the light emitted by the light emitting element 550G (i, j) can be controlled by using the potential of the node N21. As a result, it is possible to provide a new functional panel that is excellent in convenience, usefulness, or reliability.

＜機能パネルの構成例４＞
本発明の一態様の情報処理装置に用いることができる機能パネルは、導電膜Ｖ０を有する（図５参照）。 <Function panel configuration example 4>
The functional panel that can be used in the information processing apparatus of one aspect of the present invention has a conductive film V0 (see FIG. 5).

《画素回路５３０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）の構成例３》
画素回路５３０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）は、スイッチＳＷ２３、ノードＮ２２および容量Ｃ２２を備える。 << Configuration Example 3 of Pixel Circuit 530G (i, j) >>
The pixel circuit 530G (i, j) includes a switch SW23, a node N22, and a capacitance C22.

スイッチＳＷ２３は、導電膜Ｖ０と電気的に接続される第１の端子と、ノードＮ２２と電気的に接続される第２の端子と、導電膜Ｇ２（ｉ）の電位に基づいて導通状態または非導通状態を制御する機能を備える。 The switch SW23 is in a conductive state or not based on the potential of the first terminal electrically connected to the conductive film V0, the second terminal electrically connected to the node N22, and the conductive film G2 (i). It has a function to control the conduction state.

容量Ｃ２２は、ノードＮ２１と電気的に接続される導電膜と、ノードＮ２２と電気的に接続される導電膜を備える。 The capacitance C22 includes a conductive film that is electrically connected to the node N21 and a conductive film that is electrically connected to the node N22.

なお、トランジスタＭ２１の第１の電極は、ノードＮ２２と電気的に接続される。 The first electrode of the transistor M21 is electrically connected to the node N22.

＜機能パネルの構成例５＞
本発明の一態様の情報処理装置に用いることができる機能パネルは、読み出し回路ＲＣ（ｊ）と、導電膜ＶＬＥＮと、導電膜ＶＩＶと、導電膜ＣＬと、を有する（図３Ａ、図４Ａ、図４Ｂおよび図４Ｃ参照）。 <Function panel configuration example 5>
The functional panel that can be used in the information processing apparatus of one aspect of the present invention includes a readout circuit RC (j), a conductive film VLEN, a conductive film VIV, and a conductive film CL (FIGS. 3A and 4A, FIG. See FIGS. 4B and 4C).

《読み出し回路ＲＣ（ｊ）の構成例》
読み出し回路ＲＣ（ｊ）は、増幅回路およびサンプリング回路ＳＣ（ｊ）を備える（図３Ａ参照）。 << Configuration example of read circuit RC (j) >>
The read-out circuit RC (j) includes an amplifier circuit and a sampling circuit SC (j) (see FIG. 3A).

《増幅回路の構成例》
増幅回路は、トランジスタＭ３２（ｊ）を含む（図４Ｂ参照）。 << Configuration example of amplifier circuit >>
The amplifier circuit includes a transistor M32 (j) (see FIG. 4B).

トランジスタＭ３２（ｊ）は、導電膜ＶＬＥＮと電気的に接続されるゲート電極と、導電膜ＷＸ（ｊ）と電気的に接続される第１の電極と、導電膜ＶＩＶと電気的に接続される第２の電極と、備える。 The transistor M32 (j) is electrically connected to the gate electrode electrically connected to the conductive film VLEN, the first electrode electrically connected to the conductive film WX (j), and the conductive film VIV. Provided with a second electrode.

なお、スイッチＳＷ３３が導通状態のとき、導電膜ＷＸ（ｊ）は、トランジスタＭ３１（ｊ）およびトランジスタＭ３２（ｊ）を接続する（図４Ａおよび図４Ｂ参照）。これにより、トランジスタＭ３１（ｊ）およびトランジスタＭ３２（ｊ）を用いて、ソースフォロワ回路を構成することができる。または、ノードＦＤの電位に基づいて、導電膜ＷＸ（ｊ）の電位を変化することができる。 When the switch SW33 is in the conductive state, the conductive film WX (j) connects the transistor M31 (j) and the transistor M32 (j) (see FIGS. 4A and 4B). As a result, the source follower circuit can be configured by using the transistor M31 (j) and the transistor M32 (j). Alternatively, the potential of the conductive film WX (j) can be changed based on the potential of the node FD.

《サンプリング回路ＳＣ（ｊ）の構成例》
サンプリング回路ＳＣ（ｊ）は、第１の端子ＩＮ（ｊ）、第２の端子および第３の端子ＯＵＴ（ｊ）を備える（図４Ｃ参照）。 << Configuration example of sampling circuit SC (j) >>
The sampling circuit SC (j) includes a first terminal IN (j), a second terminal, and a third terminal OUT (j) (see FIG. 4C).

第１の端子は導電膜ＷＸ（ｊ）と電気的に接続され、第２の端子は導電膜ＣＬと電気的に接続され、第３の端子ＯＵＴ（ｊ）は第１の端子ＩＮ（ｊ）の電位に基づいて変化する信号を供給する機能を備える。 The first terminal is electrically connected to the conductive film WX (j), the second terminal is electrically connected to the conductive film CL, and the third terminal OUT (j) is the first terminal IN (j). It has a function of supplying a signal that changes based on the potential of.

これにより、画素回路５３０Ｓ（ｉ，ｊ）から撮像信号を取得することができる。または、例えば、相関二重サンプリング法を適用することができる。または、サンプリング回路ＳＣ（ｊ）を導電膜ＷＸ（ｊ）ごとに設けることができる。画素回路５３０Ｓ（ｉ，ｊ）の差分信号を、導電膜ＷＸ（ｊ）ごとに取得することができる。または、サンプリング回路ＳＣ（ｊ）の動作周波数を抑制することができる。または、ノイズを低減することができる。その結果、利便性、有用性または信頼性に優れた新規な機能パネルを提供することができる。 As a result, the image pickup signal can be acquired from the pixel circuit 530S (i, j). Alternatively, for example, a correlated double sampling method can be applied. Alternatively, a sampling circuit SC (j) can be provided for each conductive film WX (j). The difference signal of the pixel circuit 530S (i, j) can be acquired for each conductive film WX (j). Alternatively, the operating frequency of the sampling circuit SC (j) can be suppressed. Alternatively, noise can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to provide a new functional panel that is excellent in convenience, usefulness, or reliability.

なお、本実施の形態は、本明細書で示す他の実施の形態と適宜組み合わせることができる。 It should be noted that this embodiment can be appropriately combined with other embodiments shown in the present specification.

（実施の形態３）
本実施の形態では、本発明の一態様の情報処理装置に用いることができる機能パネルの構成について、図７乃至図１１を参照しながら説明する。 (Embodiment 3)
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the functional panel that can be used in the information processing apparatus of one aspect of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 11.

図７は本発明の一態様の情報処理装置に用いることができる機能パネルの構成を説明する図である。図７Ａは機能パネルの構成を説明する上面図であり、図７Ｂは図７Ａの一部を説明する図であり、図７Ｃは図７Ａの他の一部を説明する図である。 FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a functional panel that can be used in the information processing apparatus of one aspect of the present invention. 7A is a top view illustrating the configuration of the functional panel, FIG. 7B is a diagram illustrating a part of FIG. 7A, and FIG. 7C is a diagram illustrating another part of FIG. 7A.

図８は本発明の一態様の情報処理装置に用いることができる機能パネルの構成を説明する図である。図８は図７Ａの切断線Ｘ１−Ｘ２、Ｘ３−Ｘ４、Ｘ９−Ｘ１０、Ｘ１１−Ｘ１２および画素における断面図である。 FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a functional panel that can be used in the information processing apparatus of one aspect of the present invention. FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view taken along the cutting lines X1-X2, X3-X4, X9-X10, X11-X12 and pixels of FIG. 7A.

図９は本発明の一態様の情報処理装置に用いることができる機能パネルの構成を説明する図である。図９Ａは図７Ｂに示す画素７０２Ｓ（ｉ，ｊ）の断面図である。 FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a functional panel that can be used in the information processing apparatus of one aspect of the present invention. 9A is a cross-sectional view of the pixel 702S (i, j) shown in FIG. 7B.

図１０は本発明の一態様の情報処理装置に用いることができる機能パネルの構成を説明する図である。図１０Ａは図７Ｂに示す画素７０２Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）の断面図である。 FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a functional panel that can be used in the information processing apparatus of one aspect of the present invention. 10A is a cross-sectional view of the pixel 702G (i, j) shown in FIG. 7B.

図１１は本発明の一態様の情報処理装置に用いることができる機能パネルの構成を説明する図である。図１１Ａは図７Ａの切断線Ｘ１−Ｘ２および切断線Ｘ３−Ｘ４における断面図であり、図１１Ｂは図１１Ａの一部を説明する図である。 FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a functional panel that can be used in the information processing apparatus of one aspect of the present invention. 11A is a cross-sectional view taken along the cutting lines X1-X2 and X3-X4 of FIG. 7A, and FIG. 11B is a diagram illustrating a part of FIG. 11A.

＜機能パネルの構成例６＞
本発明の一態様の情報処理装置に用いることができる機能パネルは、機能層５２０を有する（図８参照）。 <Function panel configuration example 6>
The functional panel that can be used in the information processing apparatus of one aspect of the present invention has a functional layer 520 (see FIG. 8).

《機能層５２０の構成例１》
機能層５２０は、画素回路５３０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）および画素回路５３０Ｓ（ｉ，ｊ）を備える。また、機能層５２０は開口部５９１Ｇおよび開口部５９１Ｓを備える。 << Configuration example 1 of functional layer 520 >>
The functional layer 520 includes a pixel circuit 530G (i, j) and a pixel circuit 530S (i, j). Further, the functional layer 520 includes an opening 591G and an opening 591S.

画素回路５３０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）Ｇは開口部５９１Ｇにおいて、発光素子５５０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）と電気的に接続される（図８参照）。また、画素回路５３０Ｓ（ｉ，ｊ）は、開口部５９１Ｓにおいて、光電変換素子ＰＤ（ｉ，ｊ）と電気的に接続される。 The pixel circuit 530G (i, j) G is electrically connected to the light emitting element 550G (i, j) at the opening 591G (see FIG. 8). Further, the pixel circuit 530S (i, j) is electrically connected to the photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j) at the opening 591S.

例えば、機能層５２０は画素回路５３０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）に用いるトランジスタＭ２１を含む（図５および図１０Ａ参照）。また、機能層５２０は画素回路５３０Ｓ（ｉ，ｊ）のスイッチＳＷ３１に用いるトランジスタを含む（図４Ａおよび図９Ａ参照）。 For example, the functional layer 520 includes a transistor M21 used in the pixel circuit 530G (i, j) (see FIGS. 5 and 10A). Further, the functional layer 520 includes a transistor used for the switch SW31 of the pixel circuit 530S (i, j) (see FIGS. 4A and 9A).

これにより、画素回路５３０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）および画素回路５３０Ｓ（ｉ，ｊ）を機能層５２０に形成することができる。または、例えば、画素回路５３０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）に用いる半導体膜を形成する工程において、画素回路５３０Ｓ（ｉ，ｊ）に用いる半導体膜を形成することができる。または、機能パネルの作製工程を簡略化することができる。その結果、利便性、有用性または信頼性に優れた新規な機能パネルを提供することができる。 As a result, the pixel circuit 530G (i, j) and the pixel circuit 530S (i, j) can be formed on the functional layer 520. Alternatively, for example, in the step of forming the semiconductor film used for the pixel circuit 530G (i, j), the semiconductor film used for the pixel circuit 530S (i, j) can be formed. Alternatively, the manufacturing process of the functional panel can be simplified. As a result, it is possible to provide a new functional panel that is excellent in convenience, usefulness, or reliability.

また、機能層５２０は駆動回路ＧＤを備える（図７Ａおよび図８参照）。機能層５２０は、例えば、駆動回路ＧＤに用いるトランジスタＭＤを含む（図８、図１１Ａおよび、図１１Ｂ参照）。また、機能層５２０は駆動回路ＲＤおよび読み出し回路ＲＣを備える（図８参照）。 Further, the functional layer 520 includes a drive circuit GD (see FIGS. 7A and 8). The functional layer 520 includes, for example, a transistor MD used in the drive circuit GD (see FIGS. 8, 11A and 11B). Further, the functional layer 520 includes a drive circuit RD and a read circuit RC (see FIG. 8).

これにより、例えば、画素回路５３０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）に用いる半導体膜を形成する工程において、駆動回路ＧＤ、駆動回路ＲＤおよび読み出し回路ＲＣに用いる半導体膜を形成することができる。または、機能パネルの作製工程を簡略化することができる。その結果、利便性、有用性または信頼性に優れた新規な機能パネルを提供することができる。 Thereby, for example, in the step of forming the semiconductor film used for the pixel circuit 530G (i, j), the semiconductor film used for the drive circuit GD, the drive circuit RD, and the readout circuit RC can be formed. Alternatively, the manufacturing process of the functional panel can be simplified. As a result, it is possible to provide a new functional panel that is excellent in convenience, usefulness, or reliability.

《画素回路５３０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）の構成例４》
例えば、ボトムゲート型のトランジスタまたはトップゲート型のトランジスタなどを、画素回路５３０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）に用いることができる。具体的には、トランジスタをスイッチに用いることができる。 << Configuration Example 4 of Pixel Circuit 530G (i, j) >>
For example, a bottom gate type transistor or a top gate type transistor can be used for the pixel circuit 530G (i, j). Specifically, a transistor can be used as a switch.

《画素回路５３０Ｓ（ｉ，ｊ）の構成例３》
例えば、ボトムゲート型のトランジスタまたはトップゲート型のトランジスタなどを、画素回路５３０Ｓ（ｉ，ｊ）に用いることができる。具体的には、トランジスタをスイッチに用いることができる。 << Configuration Example 3 of Pixel Circuit 530S (i, j) >>
For example, a bottom gate type transistor or a top gate type transistor can be used for the pixel circuit 530S (i, j). Specifically, a transistor can be used as a switch.

《トランジスタの構成例》
トランジスタは、半導体膜５０８、導電膜５０４、導電膜５１２Ａおよび導電膜５１２Ｂを備える（図１０Ｂ参照）。または、トランジスタは、導電膜５１２Ｃおよび導電膜５１２Ｄを備える（図１１Ｂ参照）。または、トランジスタは、導電膜５１２Ｅおよび導電膜５１２Ｆを備える（図９Ｂ参照）。 << Transistor configuration example >>
The transistor includes a semiconductor film 508, a conductive film 504, a conductive film 512A and a conductive film 512B (see FIG. 10B). Alternatively, the transistor comprises a conductive film 512C and a conductive film 512D (see FIG. 11B). Alternatively, the transistor comprises a conductive film 512E and a conductive film 512F (see FIG. 9B).

半導体膜５０８は、導電膜５１２Ａと電気的に接続される領域５０８Ａ、導電膜５１２Ｂと電気的に接続される領域５０８Ｂを備える。半導体膜５０８は、領域５０８Ａおよび領域５０８Ｂの間に領域５０８Ｃを備える。 The semiconductor film 508 includes a region 508A electrically connected to the conductive film 512A and a region 508B electrically connected to the conductive film 512B. The semiconductor film 508 includes a region 508C between the regions 508A and 508B.

導電膜５０４は領域５０８Ｃと重なる領域を備え、導電膜５０４はゲート電極の機能を備える。 The conductive film 504 includes a region overlapping the region 508C, and the conductive film 504 has a function of a gate electrode.

絶縁膜５０６は、半導体膜５０８および導電膜５０４の間に挟まれる領域を備える。絶縁膜５０６はゲート絶縁膜の機能を備える。 The insulating film 506 includes a region sandwiched between the semiconductor film 508 and the conductive film 504. The insulating film 506 has the function of a gate insulating film.

導電膜５１２Ａはソース電極の機能またはドレイン電極の機能の一方を備え、導電膜５１２Ｂはソース電極の機能またはドレイン電極の機能の他方を備える。 The conductive film 512A has one of the functions of the source electrode and the function of the drain electrode, and the conductive film 512B has the function of the source electrode or the function of the drain electrode.

また、導電膜５２４をトランジスタに用いることができる。導電膜５２４は、導電膜５０４との間に半導体膜５０８を挟む領域を備える。導電膜５２４は、第２のゲート電極の機能を備える。 Further, the conductive film 524 can be used for the transistor. The conductive film 524 includes a region sandwiching the semiconductor film 508 with the conductive film 504. The conductive film 524 has the function of a second gate electrode.

なお、画素回路のトランジスタに用いる半導体膜を形成する工程において、駆動回路のトランジスタに用いる半導体膜を形成することができる。 In the step of forming the semiconductor film used for the transistor of the pixel circuit, the semiconductor film used for the transistor of the drive circuit can be formed.

《半導体膜５０８の構成例１》
例えば、１４族の元素を含む半導体を半導体膜５０８に用いることができる。具体的には、シリコンを含む半導体を半導体膜５０８に用いることができる。 << Configuration Example 1 of Semiconductor Film 508 >>
For example, a semiconductor containing a Group 14 element can be used for the semiconductor film 508. Specifically, a semiconductor containing silicon can be used for the semiconductor film 508.

［水素化アモルファスシリコン］
例えば、水素化アモルファスシリコンを半導体膜５０８に用いることができる。または、微結晶シリコンなどを半導体膜５０８に用いることができる。これにより、例えば、ポリシリコンを半導体膜５０８に用いる機能パネルより、表示ムラが少ない機能パネルを提供することができる。または、機能パネルの大型化が容易である。 [Hydrogenated amorphous silicon]
For example, hydrogenated amorphous silicon can be used for the semiconductor film 508. Alternatively, microcrystalline silicon or the like can be used for the semiconductor film 508. Thereby, for example, it is possible to provide a functional panel having less display unevenness than a functional panel using polysilicon for the semiconductor film 508. Alternatively, it is easy to increase the size of the functional panel.

［ポリシリコン］
例えば、ポリシリコンを半導体膜５０８に用いることができる。これにより、例えば、水素化アモルファスシリコンを半導体膜５０８に用いるトランジスタより、トランジスタの電界効果移動度を高くすることができる。または、例えば、水素化アモルファスシリコンを半導体膜５０８に用いるトランジスタより、駆動能力を高めることができる。または、例えば、水素化アモルファスシリコンを半導体膜５０８に用いるトランジスタより、画素の開口率を向上することができる。 [Polysilicon]
For example, polysilicon can be used for the semiconductor film 508. Thereby, for example, the electric field effect mobility of the transistor can be made higher than that of the transistor using hydrogenated amorphous silicon for the semiconductor film 508. Alternatively, for example, the driving ability can be enhanced as compared with a transistor using hydrogenated amorphous silicon for the semiconductor film 508. Alternatively, for example, the aperture ratio of the pixel can be improved as compared with a transistor using hydrogenated amorphous silicon for the semiconductor film 508.

または、例えば、水素化アモルファスシリコンを半導体膜５０８に用いるトランジスタより、トランジスタの信頼性を高めることができる。 Alternatively, for example, the reliability of the transistor can be improved as compared with a transistor using hydrogenated amorphous silicon for the semiconductor film 508.

または、トランジスタの作製に要する温度を、例えば、単結晶シリコンを用いるトランジスタより、低くすることができる。 Alternatively, the temperature required for manufacturing the transistor can be made lower than that of a transistor using, for example, single crystal silicon.

または、駆動回路のトランジスタに用いる半導体膜を、画素回路のトランジスタに用いる半導体膜と同一の工程で形成することができる。または、画素回路を形成する基板と同一の基板上に駆動回路を形成することができる。または、電子機器を構成する部品数を低減することができる。 Alternatively, the semiconductor film used for the transistor of the drive circuit can be formed by the same process as the semiconductor film used for the transistor of the pixel circuit. Alternatively, the drive circuit can be formed on the same substrate as the substrate on which the pixel circuit is formed. Alternatively, the number of parts constituting the electronic device can be reduced.

［単結晶シリコン］
例えば、単結晶シリコンを半導体膜５０８に用いることができる。これにより、例えば、水素化アモルファスシリコンを半導体膜５０８に用いる機能パネルより、精細度を高めることができる。または、例えば、ポリシリコンを半導体膜５０８に用いる機能パネルより、表示ムラが少ない機能パネルを提供することができる。または、例えば、スマートグラスまたはヘッドマウントディスプレイを提供することができる。 [Single crystal silicon]
For example, single crystal silicon can be used for the semiconductor film 508. Thereby, for example, the definition can be improved as compared with the functional panel in which hydrogenated amorphous silicon is used for the semiconductor film 508. Alternatively, for example, it is possible to provide a functional panel having less display unevenness than a functional panel using polysilicon for the semiconductor film 508. Alternatively, for example, smart glasses or head-mounted displays can be provided.

《半導体膜５０８の構成例２》
例えば、金属酸化物を半導体膜５０８に用いることができる。これにより、アモルファスシリコンを半導体膜に用いたトランジスタを利用する画素回路と比較して、画素回路が画像信号を保持することができる時間を長くすることができる。具体的には、フリッカーの発生を抑制しながら、選択信号を３０Ｈｚ未満、好ましくは１Ｈｚ未満、より好ましくは一分に一回未満の頻度で供給することができる。その結果、情報処理装置の使用者に蓄積する疲労を低減することができる。また、駆動に伴う消費電力を低減することができる。また、アモルファスシリコンを半導体膜に用いたトランジスタを利用する画素回路と比較して、画素回路が撮像信号を保持することができる時間を長くすることができる。具体的には、第２の選択信号を３０Ｈｚ未満、好ましくは１Ｈｚ未満、より好ましくは一分に一回未満の頻度で供給することができる。その結果、グローバルシャッター方式で撮影することができる。また、運動する被写体を歪みを抑えて撮影することができる。 << Configuration Example 2 of Semiconductor Film 508 >>
For example, a metal oxide can be used for the semiconductor film 508. As a result, the time during which the pixel circuit can hold the image signal can be lengthened as compared with the pixel circuit using a transistor using amorphous silicon as the semiconductor film. Specifically, the selection signal can be supplied at a frequency of less than 30 Hz, preferably less than 1 Hz, more preferably less than once a minute, while suppressing the occurrence of flicker. As a result, the fatigue accumulated in the user of the information processing device can be reduced. In addition, the power consumption associated with driving can be reduced. Further, as compared with a pixel circuit using a transistor using amorphous silicon as a semiconductor film, the time during which the pixel circuit can hold an image pickup signal can be lengthened. Specifically, the second selection signal can be supplied at a frequency of less than 30 Hz, preferably less than 1 Hz, more preferably less than once a minute. As a result, it is possible to shoot with the global shutter method. In addition, it is possible to shoot a moving subject with less distortion.

例えば、酸化物半導体を半導体膜５０８に用いることができる。具体的には、インジウムを含む酸化物半導体またはインジウムとガリウムと亜鉛を含む酸化物半導体を半導体膜５０８に用いることができる。 For example, an oxide semiconductor can be used for the semiconductor film 508. Specifically, an oxide semiconductor containing indium or an oxide semiconductor containing indium, gallium, and zinc can be used for the semiconductor film 508.

一例を挙げれば、オフ状態におけるリーク電流が、半導体膜にアモルファスシリコンを用いたトランジスタより小さいトランジスタを用いることができる。具体的には、酸化物半導体を半導体膜に用いたトランジスタをスイッチ等に利用することができる。これにより、アモルファスシリコンを用いたトランジスタをスイッチに利用する回路より長い時間、フローティングノードの電位を保持することができる。 As an example, a transistor whose leakage current in the off state is smaller than that of a transistor using amorphous silicon for the semiconductor film can be used. Specifically, a transistor using an oxide semiconductor as a semiconductor film can be used for a switch or the like. As a result, the potential of the floating node can be maintained for a longer time than in a circuit using a transistor using amorphous silicon as a switch.

例えば、インジウム、ガリウムおよび亜鉛を含む厚さ２５ｎｍの膜を、半導体膜５０８に用いることができる。 For example, a film having a thickness of 25 nm containing indium, gallium, and zinc can be used for the semiconductor film 508.

例えば、タンタルおよび窒素を含む厚さ１０ｎｍの膜と、銅を含む厚さ３００ｎｍの膜と、を積層した導電膜を導電膜５０４に用いることができる。なお、銅を含む膜は、絶縁膜５０６との間に、タンタルおよび窒素を含む膜を挟む領域を備える。 For example, a conductive film in which a film having a thickness of 10 nm containing tantalum and nitrogen and a film having a thickness of 300 nm containing copper is laminated can be used for the conductive film 504. The copper-containing film includes a region sandwiching the tantalum and nitrogen-containing film between the copper-containing film and the insulating film 506.

例えば、シリコンおよび窒素を含む厚さ４００ｎｍの膜と、シリコン、酸素および窒素を含む厚さ２００ｎｍの膜と、を積層した積層膜を、絶縁膜５０６に用いることができる。なお、シリコンおよび窒素を含む膜は、半導体膜５０８との間に、シリコン、酸素および窒素を含む膜を挟む領域を備える。 For example, a laminated film in which a film having a thickness of 400 nm containing silicon and nitrogen and a film having a thickness of 200 nm containing silicon, oxygen and nitrogen are laminated can be used as the insulating film 506. The film containing silicon and nitrogen includes a region sandwiching the film containing silicon, oxygen and nitrogen between the film and the semiconductor film 508.

例えば、タングステンを含む厚さ５０ｎｍの膜と、アルミニウムを含む厚さ４００ｎｍの膜と、チタンを含む厚さ１００ｎｍの膜と、をこの順で積層した導電膜を、導電膜５１２Ａまたは導電膜５１２Ｂに用いることができる。なお、タングステンを含む膜は、半導体膜５０８と接する領域を備える。 For example, a conductive film in which a film having a thickness of 50 nm containing tungsten, a film having a thickness of 400 nm containing aluminum, and a film having a thickness of 100 nm containing titanium are laminated in this order is formed on the conductive film 512A or 512B. Can be used. The film containing tungsten includes a region in contact with the semiconductor film 508.

ところで、例えば、アモルファスシリコンを半導体に用いるボトムゲート型のトランジスタの製造ラインは、酸化物半導体を半導体に用いるボトムゲート型のトランジスタの製造ラインに容易に改造できる。また、例えばポリシリコンを半導体に用いるトップゲート型のトランジスタの製造ラインは、酸化物半導体を半導体に用いるトップゲート型のトランジスタの製造ラインに容易に改造できる。いずれの改造も、既存の製造ラインを有効に活用することができる。 By the way, for example, a bottom gate type transistor manufacturing line using amorphous silicon for a semiconductor can be easily modified into a bottom gate type transistor manufacturing line using an oxide semiconductor for a semiconductor. Further, for example, a manufacturing line for a top gate type transistor using polysilicon as a semiconductor can be easily modified into a manufacturing line for a top gate type transistor using an oxide semiconductor for a semiconductor. Both modifications can make effective use of existing production lines.

これにより、チラツキを抑制することができる。または、消費電力を低減することができる。または、動きの速い動画を滑らかに表示することができる。または、豊かな階調で写真等を表示することができる。その結果、利便性、有用性または信頼性に優れた新規な機能パネルを提供することができる。 Thereby, flicker can be suppressed. Alternatively, the power consumption can be reduced. Alternatively, a fast-moving moving image can be displayed smoothly. Alternatively, a photograph or the like can be displayed with rich gradation. As a result, it is possible to provide a new functional panel that is excellent in convenience, usefulness, or reliability.

《半導体膜５０８の構成例３》
例えば、化合物半導体をトランジスタの半導体に用いることができる。具体的には、ガリウムヒ素を含む半導体を用いることができる。 << Configuration Example 3 of Semiconductor Film 508 >>
For example, a compound semiconductor can be used as a semiconductor of a transistor. Specifically, a semiconductor containing gallium arsenide can be used.

例えば、有機半導体をトランジスタの半導体に用いることができる。具体的には、ポリアセン類またはグラフェンを含む有機半導体を半導体膜に用いることができる。 For example, an organic semiconductor can be used as a semiconductor of a transistor. Specifically, an organic semiconductor containing polyacenes or graphene can be used for the semiconductor film.

《容量の構成例》
容量は、一の導電膜、他の導電膜および絶縁膜を備える。当該絶縁膜は一の導電膜および他の導電膜の間に挟まれる領域を備える。 << Example of capacity configuration >>
The capacitance includes one conductive film, another conductive film and an insulating film. The insulating film includes a region sandwiched between one conductive film and another conductive film.

例えば、導電膜５０４と、導電膜５１２Ａと、絶縁膜５０６を容量に用いることができる。 For example, the conductive film 504, the conductive film 512A, and the insulating film 506 can be used for the capacitance.

《機能層５２０の構成例２》
また、機能層５２０は、絶縁膜５２１、絶縁膜５１８、絶縁膜５１６、絶縁膜５０６および絶縁膜５０１Ｃ等を備える（図１０Ａ参照）。 << Configuration example 2 of functional layer 520 >>
Further, the functional layer 520 includes an insulating film 521, an insulating film 518, an insulating film 516, an insulating film 506, an insulating film 501C, and the like (see FIG. 10A).

絶縁膜５２１は、画素回路５３０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）および発光素子５５０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）の間に挟まれる領域を備える。 The insulating film 521 includes a region sandwiched between the pixel circuit 530G (i, j) and the light emitting element 550G (i, j).

絶縁膜５１８は、絶縁膜５２１および絶縁膜５０１Ｃの間に挟まれる領域を備える。 The insulating film 518 includes a region sandwiched between the insulating film 521 and the insulating film 501C.

絶縁膜５１６は絶縁膜５１８および絶縁膜５０１Ｃの間に挟まれる領域を備える。 The insulating film 516 includes a region sandwiched between the insulating film 518 and the insulating film 501C.

絶縁膜５０６は絶縁膜５１６および絶縁膜５０１Ｃの間に挟まれる領域を備える。 The insulating film 506 includes a region sandwiched between the insulating film 516 and the insulating film 501C.

［絶縁膜５２１］
例えば、絶縁性の無機材料、絶縁性の有機材料または無機材料と有機材料を含む絶縁性の複合材料を、絶縁膜５２１に用いることができる。 [Insulating film 521]
For example, an insulating inorganic material, an insulating organic material, or an insulating composite material containing the inorganic material and the organic material can be used for the insulating film 521.

具体的には、無機酸化物膜、無機窒化物膜または無機酸化窒化物膜等またはこれらから選ばれた複数を積層した積層材料を、絶縁膜５２１に用いることができる。 Specifically, an inorganic oxide film, an inorganic nitride film, an inorganic nitride film, or a laminated material selected from these and laminated with a plurality of laminated materials can be used for the insulating film 521.

例えば、酸化シリコン膜、窒化シリコン膜、酸化窒化シリコン膜、酸化アルミニウム膜等またはこれらから選ばれた複数を積層した積層材料を含む膜を、絶縁膜５２１に用いることができる。なお、窒化シリコン膜は緻密な膜であり、不純物の拡散を抑制する機能に優れる。 For example, a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, a silicon nitride film, an aluminum oxide film, or a film containing a laminated material selected from these can be used as the insulating film 521. The silicon nitride film is a dense film and has an excellent function of suppressing the diffusion of impurities.

例えば、ポリエステル、ポリオレフィン、ポリアミド、ポリイミド、ポリカーボネート、ポリシロキサン若しくはアクリル樹脂等またはこれらから選択された複数の樹脂の積層材料もしくは複合材料などを絶縁膜５２１に用いることができる。また、感光性を有する材料を用いて形成してもよい。これにより、絶縁膜５２１は、例えば、絶縁膜５２１と重なるさまざまな構造に由来する段差を平坦化することができる。 For example, polyester, polyolefin, polyamide, polyimide, polycarbonate, polysiloxane, acrylic resin, etc., or a laminated material or a composite material of a plurality of resins selected from these can be used for the insulating film 521. Further, it may be formed by using a material having photosensitivity. As a result, the insulating film 521 can flatten, for example, steps derived from various structures overlapping the insulating film 521.

なお、ポリイミドは熱的安定性、絶縁性、靱性、低誘電率、低熱膨張率、耐薬品性などの特性において他の有機材料に比べて優れた特性を備える。これにより、特にポリイミドを絶縁膜５２１等に好適に用いることができる。 In addition, polyimide has excellent properties as compared with other organic materials in properties such as thermal stability, insulating property, toughness, low dielectric constant, low coefficient of thermal expansion, and chemical resistance. As a result, polyimide can be particularly preferably used for the insulating film 521 and the like.

また、例えば、感光性を有する材料を用いて形成された膜を絶縁膜５２１に用いることができる。具体的には、感光性のポリイミドまたは感光性のアクリル樹脂等を用いて形成された膜を絶縁膜５２１に用いることができる。 Further, for example, a film formed by using a photosensitive material can be used for the insulating film 521. Specifically, a film formed by using photosensitive polyimide, photosensitive acrylic resin, or the like can be used as the insulating film 521.

［絶縁膜５１８］
例えば、絶縁膜５２１に用いることができる材料を絶縁膜５１８に用いることができる。 [Insulating film 518]
For example, a material that can be used for the insulating film 521 can be used for the insulating film 518.

例えば、酸素、水素、水、アルカリ金属、アルカリ土類金属等の拡散を抑制する機能を備える材料を絶縁膜５１８に用いることができる。具体的には、窒化物絶縁膜を絶縁膜５１８に用いることができる。例えば、窒化シリコン、窒化酸化シリコン、窒化アルミニウム、窒化酸化アルミニウム等を絶縁膜５１８に用いることができる。これにより、トランジスタの半導体膜への不純物の拡散を抑制することができる。 For example, a material having a function of suppressing diffusion of oxygen, hydrogen, water, alkali metal, alkaline earth metal and the like can be used for the insulating film 518. Specifically, a nitride insulating film can be used for the insulating film 518. For example, silicon nitride, silicon nitride, aluminum nitride, aluminum nitride and the like can be used for the insulating film 518. This makes it possible to suppress the diffusion of impurities into the semiconductor film of the transistor.

［絶縁膜５１６］
例えば、絶縁膜５２１に用いることができる材料を絶縁膜５１６に用いることができる。 [Insulating film 516]
For example, a material that can be used for the insulating film 521 can be used for the insulating film 516.

具体的には、絶縁膜５１８とは作製方法が異なる膜を絶縁膜５１６に用いることができる。 Specifically, a film having a manufacturing method different from that of the insulating film 518 can be used for the insulating film 516.

［絶縁膜５０６］
例えば、絶縁膜５２１に用いることができる材料を絶縁膜５０６に用いることができる。 [Insulating film 506]
For example, a material that can be used for the insulating film 521 can be used for the insulating film 506.

具体的には、酸化シリコン膜、酸化窒化シリコン膜、窒化酸化シリコン膜、窒化シリコン膜、酸化アルミニウム膜、酸化ハフニウム膜、酸化イットリウム膜、酸化ジルコニウム膜、酸化ガリウム膜、酸化タンタル膜、酸化マグネシウム膜、酸化ランタン膜、酸化セリウム膜または酸化ネオジム膜を含む膜を絶縁膜５０６に用いることができる。 Specifically, silicon oxide film, silicon nitride film, silicon nitride film, silicon nitride film, aluminum oxide film, hafnium oxide film, yttrium oxide film, zirconium oxide film, gallium oxide film, tantalum oxide film, magnesium oxide film. , A film containing a lanthanum oxide film, a cerium oxide film or a neodymium oxide film can be used for the insulating film 506.

［絶縁膜５０１Ｄ］
絶縁膜５０１Ｄは、絶縁膜５０１Ｃおよび絶縁膜５１６の間に挟まれる領域を備える。 [Insulating film 501D]
The insulating film 501D includes a region sandwiched between the insulating film 501C and the insulating film 516.

例えば、絶縁膜５０６に用いることができる材料を絶縁膜５０１Ｄに用いることができる。 For example, a material that can be used for the insulating film 506 can be used for the insulating film 501D.

［絶縁膜５０１Ｃ］
例えば、絶縁膜５２１に用いることができる材料を絶縁膜５０１Ｃに用いることができる。具体的には、シリコンおよび酸素を含む材料を絶縁膜５０１Ｃに用いることができる。これにより、画素回路、発光素子または光電変換素子等への不純物の拡散を抑制することができる。 [Insulating film 501C]
For example, a material that can be used for the insulating film 521 can be used for the insulating film 501C. Specifically, a material containing silicon and oxygen can be used for the insulating film 501C. This makes it possible to suppress the diffusion of impurities into the pixel circuit, the light emitting element, the photoelectric conversion element, or the like.

《機能層５２０の構成例３》
機能層５２０は、導電膜、配線および端子を備える。導電性を備える材料を配線、電極、端子、導電膜等に用いることができる。 << Configuration Example 3 of Functional Layer 520 >>
The functional layer 520 includes conductive films, wiring and terminals. A conductive material can be used for wiring, electrodes, terminals, conductive films and the like.

《配線等》
例えば、無機導電性材料、有機導電性材料、金属または導電性セラミックスなどを配線等に用いることができる。 《Wiring etc.》
For example, an inorganic conductive material, an organic conductive material, a metal, a conductive ceramic, or the like can be used for wiring or the like.

具体的には、アルミニウム、金、白金、銀、銅、クロム、タンタル、チタン、モリブデン、タングステン、ニッケル、鉄、コバルト、パラジウムまたはマンガンから選ばれた金属元素などを、配線等に用いることができる。または、上述した金属元素を含む合金などを、配線等に用いることができる。特に、銅とマンガンの合金がウエットエッチング法を用いた微細加工に好適である。 Specifically, metal elements selected from aluminum, gold, platinum, silver, copper, chromium, tantalum, titanium, molybdenum, tungsten, nickel, iron, cobalt, palladium or manganese can be used for wiring and the like. .. Alternatively, the above-mentioned alloy containing a metal element or the like can be used for wiring or the like. In particular, an alloy of copper and manganese is suitable for microfabrication using a wet etching method.

具体的には、アルミニウム膜上にチタン膜を積層する二層構造、窒化チタン膜上にチタン膜を積層する二層構造、窒化チタン膜上にタングステン膜を積層する二層構造、窒化タンタル膜または窒化タングステン膜上にタングステン膜を積層する二層構造、チタン膜と、そのチタン膜上にアルミニウム膜を積層し、さらにその上にチタン膜を形成する三層構造等を配線等に用いることができる。 Specifically, a two-layer structure in which a titanium film is laminated on an aluminum film, a two-layer structure in which a titanium film is laminated on a titanium nitride film, a two-layer structure in which a tungsten film is laminated on a titanium nitride film, a tantalum nitride film or A two-layer structure in which a tungsten film is laminated on a tungsten nitride film, a titanium film, and a three-layer structure in which an aluminum film is laminated on the titanium film and a titanium film is further formed on the titanium film can be used for wiring or the like. ..

具体的には、酸化インジウム、インジウム錫酸化物、インジウム亜鉛酸化物、酸化亜鉛、ガリウムを添加した酸化亜鉛などの導電性酸化物を、配線等に用いることができる。 Specifically, conductive oxides such as indium oxide, indium tin oxide, indium zinc oxide, zinc oxide, and zinc oxide added with gallium can be used for wiring and the like.

具体的には、グラフェンまたはグラファイトを含む膜を配線等に用いることができる。 Specifically, a film containing graphene or graphite can be used for wiring or the like.

例えば、酸化グラフェンを含む膜を形成し、酸化グラフェンを含む膜を還元することにより、グラフェンを含む膜を形成することができる。還元する方法としては、熱を加える方法や還元剤を用いる方法等を挙げることができる。 For example, a graphene-containing film can be formed by forming a film containing graphene oxide and reducing the film containing graphene oxide. Examples of the method of reduction include a method of applying heat and a method of using a reducing agent.

例えば、金属ナノワイヤーを含む膜を配線等に用いることができる。具体的には、銀を含むナノワイヤーを用いることができる。 For example, a film containing metal nanowires can be used for wiring and the like. Specifically, nanowires containing silver can be used.

具体的には、導電性高分子を配線等に用いることができる。 Specifically, a conductive polymer can be used for wiring and the like.

なお、例えば、導電材料ＡＣＦ１を用いて、端子５１９Ｂをフレキシブルプリント基板ＦＰＣ１と電気的に接続することができる（図８参照）。具体的には、導電材料ＣＰを用いて、端子５１９Ｂをフレキシブルプリント基板ＦＰＣ１と電気的に接続することができる。 Note that, for example, the conductive material ACF1 can be used to electrically connect the terminal 519B to the flexible printed circuit board FPC1 (see FIG. 8). Specifically, the conductive material CP can be used to electrically connect the terminal 519B to the flexible printed circuit board FPC1.

＜機能パネル７００の構成例２＞
また、機能パネル７００は、基材５１０、基材７７０および封止材７０５を備える（図１０Ａ参照）。 <Configuration example 2 of the function panel 700>
Further, the functional panel 700 includes a base material 510, a base material 770, and a sealing material 705 (see FIG. 10A).

《基材５１０、基材７７０》
透光性を備える材料を、基材５１０または基材７７０に用いることができる。 << Base material 510, base material 770 >>
A material having translucency can be used for the base material 510 or the base material 770.

例えば、可撓性を有する材料を基材５１０または基材７７０に用いることができる。これにより、可撓性を備える機能パネルを提供することができる。 For example, a flexible material can be used for the base material 510 or the base material 770. Thereby, it is possible to provide a functional panel having flexibility.

例えば、厚さ０．１ｍｍ以上０．７ｍｍ以下の材料を用いることができる。具体的には、厚さ０．１ｍｍ程度まで研磨した材料を用いることができる。これにより、重量を低減することができる。 For example, a material having a thickness of 0.1 mm or more and 0.7 mm or less can be used. Specifically, a material polished to a thickness of about 0.1 mm can be used. Thereby, the weight can be reduced.

ところで、第６世代（１５００ｍｍ×１８５０ｍｍ）、第７世代（１８７０ｍｍ×２２００ｍｍ）、第８世代（２２００ｍｍ×２４００ｍｍ）、第９世代（２４００ｍｍ×２８００ｍｍ）、第１０世代（２９５０ｍｍ×３４００ｍｍ）等のガラス基板を基材５１０または基材７７０に用いることができる。これにより、大型の表示装置を作製することができる。 By the way, glass substrates of the 6th generation (1500 mm × 1850 mm), the 7th generation (1870 mm × 2200 mm), the 8th generation (2200 mm × 2400 mm), the 9th generation (2400 mm × 2800 mm), the 10th generation (2950 mm × 3400 mm), etc. Can be used for the base material 510 or the base material 770. As a result, a large display device can be manufactured.

有機材料、無機材料または有機材料と無機材料等の複合材料等を基材５１０または基材７７０に用いることができる。 An organic material, an inorganic material, or a composite material such as an organic material and an inorganic material can be used for the base material 510 or the base material 770.

例えば、ガラス、セラミックス、金属等の無機材料を用いることができる。具体的には、無アルカリガラス、ソーダ石灰ガラス、カリガラス、クリスタルガラス、アルミノ珪酸ガラス、強化ガラス、化学強化ガラス、石英またはサファイア等を、基材５１０または基材７７０に用いることができる。または、アルミノ珪酸ガラス、強化ガラス、化学強化ガラスまたはサファイア等を、機能パネルの使用者に近い側に配置される基材５１０または基材７７０に好適に用いることができる。これにより、使用に伴う機能パネルの破損や傷付きを防止することができる。 For example, inorganic materials such as glass, ceramics, and metal can be used. Specifically, non-alkali glass, soda lime glass, potash glass, crystal glass, aluminosilicate glass, tempered glass, chemically tempered glass, quartz, sapphire and the like can be used for the base material 510 or the base material 770. Alternatively, aluminosilicate glass, tempered glass, chemically tempered glass, sapphire, or the like can be suitably used for the base material 510 or the base material 770 arranged closer to the user of the functional panel. As a result, it is possible to prevent the functional panel from being damaged or scratched due to use.

具体的には、無機酸化物膜、無機窒化物膜または無機酸窒化物膜等を用いることができる。例えば、酸化シリコン膜、窒化シリコン膜、酸化窒化シリコン膜、酸化アルミニウム膜等を用いることができる。ステンレス・スチールまたはアルミニウム等を基材５１０または基材７７０に用いることができる。 Specifically, an inorganic oxide film, an inorganic nitride film, an inorganic oxynitride film, or the like can be used. For example, a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, a silicon nitride film, an aluminum oxide film, or the like can be used. Stainless steel, aluminum and the like can be used for the base material 510 or the base material 770.

例えば、シリコンや炭化シリコンからなる単結晶半導体基板、多結晶半導体基板、シリコンゲルマニウム等の化合物半導体基板、ＳＯＩ基板等を基材５１０または基材７７０に用いることができる。これにより、半導体素子を基材５１０または基材７７０に形成することができる。 For example, a single crystal semiconductor substrate made of silicon or silicon carbide, a polycrystalline semiconductor substrate, a compound semiconductor substrate such as silicon germanium, an SOI substrate, or the like can be used as the base material 510 or the base material 770. As a result, the semiconductor element can be formed on the base material 510 or the base material 770.

例えば、樹脂、樹脂フィルムまたはプラスチック等の有機材料を基材５１０または基材７７０に用いることができる。具体的には、ポリエステル、ポリオレフィン、ポリアミド（ナイロン、アラミド等）、ポリイミド、ポリカーボネート、ポリウレタンまたはアクリル樹脂、エポキシ樹脂含またはシリコーンなどのシロキサン結合を有する樹脂を含む材料を基材５１０または基材７７０に用いることができる。例えば、これらの材料を含む樹脂フィルム、樹脂板または積層材料等を用いることができる。これにより、重量を低減することができる。または、例えば、落下に伴う破損等の発生頻度を低減することができる。 For example, an organic material such as resin, resin film or plastic can be used for the base material 510 or the base material 770. Specifically, a material containing a resin having a siloxane bond such as polyester, polyolefin, polyamide (nylon, aramid, etc.), polyimide, polycarbonate, polyurethane or acrylic resin, epoxy resin or silicone is used as the base material 510 or the base material 770. Can be used. For example, a resin film, a resin plate, a laminated material, or the like containing these materials can be used. Thereby, the weight can be reduced. Alternatively, for example, the frequency of occurrence of damage due to dropping can be reduced.

具体的には、ポリエチレンテレフタレート（ＰＥＴ）、ポリエチレンナフタレート（ＰＥＮ）、ポリエーテルサルフォン（ＰＥＳ）、シクロオレフィンポリマー（ＣＯＰ）またはシクロオレフィンコポリマー（ＣＯＣ）等を基材５１０または基材７７０に用いることができる。 Specifically, polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polyethylene naphthalate (PEN), polyether sulfone (PES), cycloolefin polymer (COP), cycloolefin copolymer (COC) and the like are used for the base material 510 or the base material 770. be able to.

例えば、金属板、薄板状のガラス板または無機材料等の膜と樹脂フィルム等を貼り合わせた複合材料を基材５１０または基材７７０に用いることができる。例えば、繊維状または粒子状の金属、ガラスもしくは無機材料等を樹脂に分散した複合材料を基材５１０または基材７７０に用いることができる。例えば、繊維状または粒子状の樹脂もしくは有機材料等を無機材料に分散した複合材料を基材５１０または基材７７０に用いることができる。 For example, a composite material obtained by laminating a film such as a metal plate, a thin glass plate, or an inorganic material and a resin film or the like can be used for the base material 510 or the base material 770. For example, a composite material in which a fibrous or particulate metal, glass, or an inorganic material is dispersed in a resin can be used for the base material 510 or the base material 770. For example, a composite material in which a fibrous or particulate resin or an organic material is dispersed in an inorganic material can be used for the base material 510 or the base material 770.

また、単層の材料または複数の層が積層された材料を、基材５１０または基材７７０に用いることができる。例えば、絶縁膜等が積層された材料を用いることができる。具体的には、酸化シリコン層、窒化シリコン層または酸化窒化シリコン層等から選ばれた一または複数の膜が積層された材料を用いることができる。これにより、例えば、基材に含まれる不純物の拡散を防ぐことができる。または、ガラスまたは樹脂に含まれる不純物の拡散を防ぐことができる。または、樹脂を透過する不純物の拡散を防ぐことができる。 Further, a single-layer material or a material in which a plurality of layers are laminated can be used for the base material 510 or the base material 770. For example, a material in which an insulating film or the like is laminated can be used. Specifically, a material in which one or more films selected from a silicon oxide layer, a silicon nitride layer, a silicon nitride layer, and the like are laminated can be used. This makes it possible to prevent the diffusion of impurities contained in the base material, for example. Alternatively, it is possible to prevent the diffusion of impurities contained in the glass or resin. Alternatively, it is possible to prevent the diffusion of impurities that permeate the resin.

また、紙または木材などを基材５１０または基材７７０に用いることができる。 Further, paper, wood or the like can be used for the base material 510 or the base material 770.

例えば、作製工程中の熱処理に耐えうる程度の耐熱性を有する材料を基材５１０または基材７７０に用いることができる。具体的には、トランジスタまたは容量等を直接形成する作成工程中に加わる熱に耐熱性を有する材料を、基材５１０または基材７７０に用いることができる。 For example, a material having heat resistance sufficient to withstand the heat treatment during the manufacturing process can be used for the base material 510 or the base material 770. Specifically, a material having heat resistance to heat applied during the manufacturing process of directly forming a transistor, a capacitance, or the like can be used for the base material 510 or the base material 770.

例えば、作製工程中に加わる熱に耐熱性を有する工程用基板に絶縁膜、トランジスタまたは容量等を形成し、形成された絶縁膜、トランジスタまたは容量等を、例えば、基材５１０または基材７７０に転置する方法を用いることができる。これにより、例えば、可撓性を有する基板に絶縁膜、トランジスタまたは容量等を形成できる。 For example, an insulating film, a transistor, a capacitance, or the like is formed on a process substrate having heat resistance to heat applied during the manufacturing process, and the formed insulating film, the transistor, the capacitance, or the like is applied to, for example, the substrate 510 or the substrate 770. A method of translocation can be used. Thereby, for example, an insulating film, a transistor, a capacitance, or the like can be formed on a flexible substrate.

《封止材７０５》
封止材７０５は、機能層５２０および基材７７０の間に挟まれる領域を備え、機能層５２０および基材７７０を貼り合わせる機能を備える（図１０Ａ参照）。 << Encapsulant 705 >>
The sealing material 705 includes a region sandwiched between the functional layer 520 and the base material 770, and has a function of bonding the functional layer 520 and the base material 770 (see FIG. 10A).

無機材料、有機材料または無機材料と有機材料の複合材料等を封止材７０５に用いることができる。 An inorganic material, an organic material, a composite material of an inorganic material and an organic material, or the like can be used for the sealing material 705.

例えば、熱溶融性の樹脂または硬化性の樹脂等の有機材料を、封止材７０５に用いることができる。 For example, an organic material such as a heat-meltable resin or a curable resin can be used for the sealing material 705.

例えば、反応硬化型接着剤、光硬化型接着剤、熱硬化型接着剤または／および嫌気型接着剤等の有機材料を封止材７０５に用いることができる。 For example, organic materials such as reaction curable adhesives, photocurable adhesives, thermosetting adhesives and / and anaerobic adhesives can be used for the encapsulant 705.

具体的には、エポキシ樹脂、アクリル樹脂、シリコーン樹脂、フェノール樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、イミド樹脂、ＰＶＣ（ポリビニルクロライド）樹脂、ＰＶＢ（ポリビニルブチラル）樹脂、ＥＶＡ（エチレンビニルアセテート）樹脂等を含む接着剤を封止材７０５に用いることができる。 Specifically, an adhesive containing epoxy resin, acrylic resin, silicone resin, phenol resin, polyimide resin, imide resin, PVC (polyvinyl chloride) resin, PVB (polyvinyl chloride) resin, EVA (ethylene vinyl acetate) resin and the like. Can be used as the sealing material 705.

＜機能パネル７００の構成例３＞
機能パネル７００は、機能層７２０を備える（図１０Ａ参照）。また、機能パネル７００は、構造体ＫＢなどを備える。 <Structure example 3 of the function panel 700>
The functional panel 700 includes a functional layer 720 (see FIG. 10A). Further, the functional panel 700 includes a structure KB and the like.

《機能層７２０》
機能層７２０は、遮光膜ＢＭおよび絶縁膜７７１を備える。 << Functional layer 720 >>
The functional layer 720 includes a light-shielding film BM and an insulating film 771.

《遮光膜ＢＭ》
遮光膜ＢＭは画素７０２Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）と重なる領域に開口部を備える。また、遮光膜ＢＭは画素７０２Ｓ（ｉ，ｊ）と重なる領域に開口部を備える。例えば、暗色の材料を遮光膜ＢＭに用いることができる。これにより、表示のコントラストを向上することができる。 << Shading film BM >>
The light-shielding film BM is provided with an opening in a region overlapping the pixels 702G (i, j). Further, the light-shielding film BM is provided with an opening in a region overlapping the pixels 702S (i, j). For example, a dark-colored material can be used for the light-shielding film BM. Thereby, the contrast of the display can be improved.

《絶縁膜７７１》
絶縁膜７７１は、基材７７０と遮光膜ＢＭの間に挟まれる領域を備える。 << Insulation film 771 >>
The insulating film 771 includes a region sandwiched between the base material 770 and the light-shielding film BM.

《構造体ＫＢ》
構造体ＫＢは、機能層５２０および基材７７０の間に挟まれる領域を備える。また、構造体ＫＢは、機能層５２０および基材７７０の間に所定の間隙を設ける機能を備える。 << Structure KB >>
The structure KB comprises a region sandwiched between the functional layer 520 and the substrate 770. Further, the structure KB has a function of providing a predetermined gap between the functional layer 520 and the base material 770.

＜機能パネル７００の構成例４＞
機能パネル７００は、機能膜７７０Ｐなどを備える（図１０Ａ参照）。 <Structure example 4 of function panel 700>
The functional panel 700 includes a functional film 770P and the like (see FIG. 10A).

《機能膜７７０Ｐ等》
機能膜７７０Ｐは、発光素子５５０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）と重なる領域を備える。 << Functional film 770P, etc. >>
The functional film 770P includes a region that overlaps with the light emitting element 550G (i, j).

例えば、反射防止フィルム、偏光フィルム、位相差フィルム、光拡散フィルムまたは集光フィルム等を機能膜７７０Ｐに用いることができる。 For example, an antireflection film, a polarizing film, a retardation film, a light diffusing film, a condensing film and the like can be used for the functional film 770P.

例えば、厚さ１μｍ以下の反射防止膜を、機能膜７７０Ｐに用いることができる。具体的には、誘電体を３層以上、好ましくは５層以上、より好ましくは１５層以上積層した積層膜を機能膜７７０Ｐに用いることができる。これにより、反射率を０．５％以下好ましくは０．０８％以下に抑制することができる。 For example, an antireflection film having a thickness of 1 μm or less can be used for the functional film 770P. Specifically, a laminated film in which three or more layers, preferably five or more layers, and more preferably 15 or more layers of dielectrics are laminated can be used for the functional film 770P. As a result, the reflectance can be suppressed to 0.5% or less, preferably 0.08% or less.

例えば、円偏光フィルムを機能膜７７０Ｐに用いることができる。 For example, a circularly polarizing film can be used for the functional film 770P.

また、ゴミの付着を抑制する帯電防止膜、汚れを付着しにくくする撥水性の膜、汚れを付着しにくくする撥油性の膜、反射防止膜（アンチ・リフレクション膜）、非光沢処理膜（アンチ・グレア膜）、使用に伴う傷の発生を抑制するハードコート膜、発生した傷が修復する自己修復性のフィルムなどを、機能膜７７０Ｐに用いることができる。 In addition, an antistatic film that suppresses the adhesion of dust, a water-repellent film that makes it difficult for dirt to adhere, an oil-repellent film that makes it difficult for dirt to adhere, an antireflection film (anti-reflection film), and a non-glare treatment film (anti). A glare film), a hard coat film that suppresses the occurrence of scratches due to use, a self-healing film that repairs the generated scratches, and the like can be used for the functional film 770P.

＜機能パネル７００の構成例５＞
また、機能パネル７００は、絶縁膜５２８および絶縁膜５７３を有する（図１０Ａ参照）。 <Structure example 5 of the function panel 700>
Further, the functional panel 700 has an insulating film 528 and an insulating film 573 (see FIG. 10A).

《絶縁膜５２８》
絶縁膜５２８は機能層５２０および基材７７０の間に挟まれる領域を備え、絶縁膜５２８は発光素子５５０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）と重なる領域に開口部を備える（図１０Ａ参照）。 << Insulation film 528 >>
The insulating film 528 has a region sandwiched between the functional layer 520 and the base material 770, and the insulating film 528 has an opening in a region overlapping the light emitting element 550G (i, j) (see FIG. 10A).

例えば、絶縁膜５２１に用いることができる材料を、絶縁膜５２８に用いることができる。具体的には、酸化珪素膜、アクリル樹脂を含む膜またはポリイミドを含む膜等を絶縁膜５２８に用いることができる。 For example, a material that can be used for the insulating film 521 can be used for the insulating film 528. Specifically, a silicon oxide film, a film containing an acrylic resin, a film containing polyimide, or the like can be used for the insulating film 528.

《絶縁膜５７３》
絶縁膜５７３は、機能層５２０との間に発光素子５５０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）を挟む領域を備える（図１０Ａ参照）。 << Insulation film 573 >>
The insulating film 573 includes a region sandwiching the light emitting element 550G (i, j) between the insulating film 573 and the functional layer 520 (see FIG. 10A).

例えば、単数の膜または複数の膜を積層した積層膜を絶縁膜５７３に用いることができる。具体的には、発光素子５５０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）を損傷し難い方法で形成することができる絶縁膜５７３Ａと、欠陥の少ない緻密な絶縁膜５７３Ｂと、を積層した積層膜を、絶縁膜５７３に用いることができる。これにより、発光素子５５０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）への不純物の拡散を抑制することができる。または、発光素子５５０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）の信頼性を高めることができる。 For example, a single film or a laminated film obtained by laminating a plurality of films can be used as the insulating film 573. Specifically, the insulating film 573 is formed by laminating an insulating film 573A that can form the light emitting element 550G (i, j) in a manner that is not easily damaged and a dense insulating film 573B that has few defects. Can be used. As a result, the diffusion of impurities into the light emitting element 550G (i, j) can be suppressed. Alternatively, the reliability of the light emitting element 550G (i, j) can be improved.

《発光素子５５０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）の構成例２》
有機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子、無機エレクトロルミネッセンス素子、発光ダイオードまたはＱＤＬＥＤ（Ｑｕａｎｔｕｍ　Ｄｏｔ　ＬＥＤ）等を、発光素子５５０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）に用いることができる（図１０Ａ参照）。 << Configuration Example 2 of Light Emitting Element 550G (i, j) >>
An organic electroluminescence element, an inorganic electroluminescence element, a light emitting diode, a QDLED (Quantum Dot LED), or the like can be used for the light emitting element 550G (i, j) (see FIG. 10A).

例えば、電極５５１Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）、電極５５２および発光性の材料を含む層５５３Ｇ（ｊ）を、発光素子５５０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）に用いることができる。また、発光性の材料を含む層５５３Ｇ（ｊ）は、電極５５１Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）および電極５５２に挟まれる領域を備える。 For example, a layer 553G (j) containing an electrode 551G (i, j), an electrode 552, and a luminescent material can be used for the light emitting element 550G (i, j). Further, the layer 553G (j) containing the luminescent material includes a region sandwiched between the electrodes 551G (i, j) and the electrodes 552.

《発光性の材料を含む層５５３Ｇ（ｊ）の構成例１》
例えば、積層材料を発光性の材料を含む層５５３Ｇ（ｊ）に用いることができる。 << Configuration Example 1 of Layer 553G (j) Containing a Luminescent Material >>
For example, the laminated material can be used for layer 553G (j) containing a luminescent material.

例えば、青色の光を発する材料、緑色の光を発する材料、赤色の光を発する材料、赤外線を発する材料または紫外線を発する材料を、発光性の材料を含む層５５３Ｇ（ｊ）に用いることができる。 For example, a material that emits blue light, a material that emits green light, a material that emits red light, a material that emits infrared rays, or a material that emits ultraviolet rays can be used for the layer 553G (j) containing a luminescent material. ..

《発光性の材料を含む層５５３Ｇ（ｊ）の構成例２》
例えば、白色の光を発するように積層された積層材料を、発光性の材料を含む層５５３Ｇ（ｊ）に用いることができる。 << Configuration Example 2 of Layer 553G (j) Containing a Luminescent Material >>
For example, a laminated material laminated so as to emit white light can be used for the layer 553G (j) containing a luminescent material.

具体的には、色相が互いに異なる光を発する複数の材料を、発光性の材料を含む層５５３Ｇ（ｊ）に用いることができる。 Specifically, a plurality of materials that emit light having different hues can be used for the layer 553G (j) containing the luminescent material.

例えば、青色の光を発する蛍光材料を含む発光性の材料を含む層と、緑色および赤色の光を発する蛍光材料以外の材料を含む層を積層した積層材料を、発光性の材料を含む層５５３Ｇ（ｊ）に用いることができる。または、青色の光を発する蛍光材料を含む発光性の材料を含む層と、黄色の光を発する蛍光材料以外の材料を含む層と、を積層した積層材料を、発光性の材料を含む層５５３Ｇ（ｊ）に用いることができる。 For example, a laminated material obtained by laminating a layer containing a luminescent material containing a fluorescent material that emits blue light and a layer containing a material other than the fluorescent material that emits green and red light, and a layer 553G containing the luminescent material. It can be used in (j). Alternatively, a laminated material obtained by laminating a layer containing a luminescent material containing a fluorescent material that emits blue light and a layer containing a material other than the fluorescent material that emits yellow light is used as a layer 553G containing the luminescent material. It can be used in (j).

なお、発光性の材料を含む層５５３Ｇ（ｊ）に、例えば、着色膜ＣＦを重ねて用いることができる。これにより、白色の光から、所定の色相の光を取り出すことができる。 In addition, for example, a colored film CF can be superposed on the layer 553G (j) containing a luminescent material. As a result, light having a predetermined hue can be extracted from the white light.

《発光性の材料を含む層５５３Ｇ（ｊ）の構成例３》
例えば、青色の光または紫外線を発するように積層された積層材料を、発光性の材料を含む層５５３Ｇ（ｊ）に用いることができる。また、例えば、色変換層ＣＣを重ねて用いることができる。 << Configuration Example 3 of Layer 553G (j) Containing Luminescent Material >>
For example, a laminated material laminated so as to emit blue light or ultraviolet rays can be used for the layer 553G (j) containing a luminescent material. Further, for example, the color conversion layers CC can be stacked and used.

《発光性の材料を含む層５５３Ｇ（ｊ）の構成例４》
発光性の材料を含む層５５３Ｇ（ｊ）は、発光ユニットを備える。発光ユニットは、一方から注入された電子が他方から注入された正孔と再結合する領域を１つ備える。また、発光ユニットは発光性の材料を含み、発光性の材料は電子と正孔の再結合により生じるエネルギーを光として放出する。なお、正孔輸送層および電子輸送層を発光ユニットに用いることができる。正孔輸送層は電子輸送層より正極側に配置され、正孔輸送層は電子輸送層より正孔の移動度が高い。 << Configuration Example 4 of Layer 553G (j) Containing Luminescent Material >>
The layer 553G (j) containing the luminescent material comprises a luminescent unit. The light emitting unit includes one region in which an electron injected from one side recombines with a hole injected from the other side. Further, the light emitting unit includes a light emitting material, and the light emitting material emits energy generated by recombination of electrons and holes as light. The hole transport layer and the electron transport layer can be used for the light emitting unit. The hole transport layer is arranged on the positive electrode side of the electron transport layer, and the hole transport layer has higher hole mobility than the electron transport layer.

例えば、複数の発光ユニットおよび中間層を発光性の材料を含む層５５３Ｇ（ｊ）に用いることができる。中間層は、二つの発光ユニットの間に挟まれる領域を備える。中間層は電荷発生領域を備え、中間層は陰極側に配置された発光ユニットに正孔を供給し、陽極側に配置された発光ユニットに電子を供給する機能を備える。なお、複数の発光ユニットおよび中間層を備える構成をタンデム型の発光素子という場合がある。 For example, a plurality of light emitting units and an intermediate layer can be used for the layer 553G (j) containing a light emitting material. The intermediate layer comprises a region sandwiched between the two light emitting units. The intermediate layer has a charge generation region, and the intermediate layer has a function of supplying holes to a light emitting unit arranged on the cathode side and supplying electrons to a light emitting unit arranged on the anode side. A configuration including a plurality of light emitting units and an intermediate layer may be referred to as a tandem type light emitting element.

これにより、発光に係る電流効率を高めることができる。または、同じ輝度において、発光素子を流れる電流密度を下げることができる。または、発光素子の信頼性を高めることができる。 As a result, the current efficiency related to light emission can be increased. Alternatively, the current density flowing through the light emitting element can be reduced at the same brightness. Alternatively, the reliability of the light emitting element can be improved.

例えば、一の色相の光を発する材料を含む発光ユニットを、他の色相の光を発する材料を含む発光ユニットと重ねて、発光性の材料を含む層５５３Ｇ（ｊ）に用いることができる。または、一の色相の光を発する材料を含む発光ユニットを、同一の色相の光を発する材料を含む発光ユニットと重ねて、発光性の材料を含む層５５３Ｇ（ｊ）に用いることができる。具体的には、青色の光を発する材料を含む二つの発光ユニットを重ねて用いることができる。 For example, a light emitting unit containing a material that emits light of one hue can be superposed on a light emitting unit that contains a material that emits light of another hue, and can be used for the layer 553G (j) containing the light emitting material. Alternatively, a light emitting unit containing a material that emits light of one hue can be superposed on a light emitting unit that contains a material that emits light of the same hue, and can be used for the layer 553G (j) containing the light emitting material. Specifically, two light emitting units containing a material that emits blue light can be used in an overlapping manner.

ところで、例えば、高分子化合物（オリゴマー、デンドリマー、ポリマー等）、中分子化合物（低分子と高分子の中間領域の化合物：分子量４００以上４０００以下）等を、発光性の材料を含む層５５３Ｇ（ｊ）に用いることができる。 By the way, for example, a polymer compound (oligomer, dendrimer, polymer, etc.), a medium molecular compound (a compound in the intermediate region between a small molecule and a polymer: a compound having a molecular weight of 400 or more and 4000 or less), etc. ) Can be used.

《電極５５１Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）、電極５５２》
例えば、配線等に用いることができる材料を電極５５１Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）または電極５５２に用いることができる。具体的には、可視光について透光性を有する材料を電極５５１Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）または電極５５２に用いることができる。 << Electrode 551G (i, j), Electrode 552 >>
For example, a material that can be used for wiring or the like can be used for the electrode 551G (i, j) or the electrode 552. Specifically, a material having translucency with respect to visible light can be used for the electrode 551G (i, j) or the electrode 552.

例えば、導電性酸化物またはインジウムを含む導電性酸化物、酸化インジウム、インジウム錫酸化物、インジウム亜鉛酸化物、酸化亜鉛、ガリウムを添加した酸化亜鉛などを用いることができる。または、光が透過する程度に薄い金属膜を用いることができる。または、可視光について透光性を有する材料を用いることができる。 For example, a conductive oxide or a conductive oxide containing indium, indium oxide, indium tin oxide, indium zinc oxide, zinc oxide, zinc oxide added with gallium, or the like can be used. Alternatively, a metal film thin enough to transmit light can be used. Alternatively, a material having translucency for visible light can be used.

例えば、光の一部を透過し、光の他の一部を反射する金属膜を電極５５１Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）または電極５５２に用いることができる。例えば、発光性の材料を含む層５５３Ｇ（ｊ）などを用いて、電極５５１Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）および電極５５２の間の距離を調整する。 For example, a metal film that transmits a part of light and reflects another part of light can be used for the electrode 551G (i, j) or the electrode 552. For example, a layer 553G (j) containing a luminescent material is used to adjust the distance between the electrodes 551G (i, j) and the electrodes 552.

これにより、微小共振器構造を発光素子５５０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）に設けることができる。または、所定の波長の光を他の光より効率よく取り出すことができる。または、スペクトルの半値幅が狭い光を取り出すことができる。または、鮮やかな色の光を取り出すことができる。 As a result, the microcavity structure can be provided in the light emitting element 550G (i, j). Alternatively, light having a predetermined wavelength can be extracted more efficiently than other light. Alternatively, light with a narrow half width of the spectrum can be extracted. Alternatively, brightly colored light can be extracted.

例えば、効率よく光を反射する膜を、電極５５１Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）または電極５５２に用いることができる。具体的には、銀およびパラジウム等を含む材料または銀および銅等を含む材料を金属膜に用いることができる。 For example, a film that efficiently reflects light can be used for the electrode 551G (i, j) or the electrode 552. Specifically, a material containing silver, palladium, or the like or a material containing silver, copper, or the like can be used for the metal film.

また、電極５５１Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）は、開口部５９１Ｇにおいて、画素回路５３０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）と電気的に接続される（図９Ａ参照）。電極５５１Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）は、例えば、絶縁膜５２８に形成される開口部と重なり、電極５５１Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）は周縁に絶縁膜５２８を備える。 Further, the electrode 551G (i, j) is electrically connected to the pixel circuit 530G (i, j) at the opening 591G (see FIG. 9A). The electrode 551G (i, j) overlaps with, for example, an opening formed in the insulating film 528, and the electrode 551G (i, j) has an insulating film 528 on the peripheral edge thereof.

これにより、電極５５１Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）および電極５５２の短絡を防止することができる。 This makes it possible to prevent a short circuit between the electrodes 551G (i, j) and the electrode 552.

《光電変換素子ＰＤ（ｉ，ｊ）の構成例１》
光電変換素子ＰＤ（ｉ，ｊ）は、電極５５１Ｓ（ｉ，ｊ）、電極５５２および光電変換材料を含む層５５３Ｓ（ｊ）を備える（図９Ａ参照）。 << Configuration Example 1 of Photoelectric Conversion Element PD (i, j) >>
The photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j) includes an electrode 551S (i, j), an electrode 552, and a layer 553S (j) containing a photoelectric conversion material (see FIG. 9A).

例えば、ヘテロ接合型の光電変換素子、バルクヘテロ接合型の光電変換素子等を、光電変換素子ＰＤ（ｉ，ｊ）に用いることができる。 For example, a heterojunction type photoelectric conversion element, a bulk heterojunction type photoelectric conversion element, or the like can be used for the photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j).

［光電変換材料を含む層５５３Ｓ（ｊ）の構成例１］
例えば、ｐ型の半導体膜とｎ型の半導体膜が互いに接するように積層した積層膜を、光電変換材料を含む層５５３Ｓ（ｊ）に用いることができる。なお、光電変換材料を含む層５５３Ｓ（ｊ）にこのような構造の積層膜を用いる光電変換素子ＰＤ（ｉ，ｊ）を、ＰＮ型のフォトダイオードということができる。 [Structure 1 of layer 553S (j) containing photoelectric conversion material]
For example, a laminated film in which a p-type semiconductor film and an n-type semiconductor film are laminated so as to be in contact with each other can be used for the layer 553S (j) containing a photoelectric conversion material. The photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j) that uses a laminated film having such a structure on the layer 553S (j) containing the photoelectric conversion material can be called a PN-type photodiode.

例えば、ｐ型の半導体膜およびｎ型の半導体膜の間にｉ型の半導体膜を挟むように、ｐ型の半導体膜、ｉ型の半導体膜およびｎ型の半導体膜を積層した積層膜を、光電変換材料を含む層５５３Ｓ（ｊ）に用いることができる。なお、光電変換材料を含む層５５３Ｓ（ｊ）にこのような構造の積層膜を用いる光電変換素子ＰＤ（ｉ，ｊ）を、ＰＩＮ型のフォトダイオードということができる。 For example, a laminated film in which a p-type semiconductor film, an i-type semiconductor film, and an n-type semiconductor film are laminated so as to sandwich an i-type semiconductor film between a p-type semiconductor film and an n-type semiconductor film. It can be used for the layer 553S (j) containing a photoelectric conversion material. The photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j) that uses a laminated film having such a structure on the layer 553S (j) containing the photoelectric conversion material can be called a PIN type photodiode.

例えば、ｐ＋型の半導体膜およびｎ型の半導体膜の間にｐ−型の半導体膜を挟み、当該ｐ−型の半導体膜および当該ｎ型の半導体膜の間にｐ型の半導体膜を挟むように、ｐ＋型の半導体膜、ｐ−型の半導体膜、ｐ型の半導体膜およびｎ型の半導体膜を積層した積層膜を、光電変換材料を含む層５５３Ｓ（ｊ）に用いることができる。なお、光電変換材料を含む層５５３Ｓ（ｊ）にこのような構造の積層膜を用いる光電変換素子ＰＤ（ｉ，ｊ）を、アバランシェフォトダイオードということができる。 For example, a p-type semiconductor film is sandwiched between a p + type semiconductor film and an n-type semiconductor film, and a p-type semiconductor film is sandwiched between the p-type semiconductor film and the n-type semiconductor film. A laminated film obtained by laminating a p + type semiconductor film, a p-type semiconductor film, a p-type semiconductor film, and an n-type semiconductor film can be used for the layer 553S (j) containing a photoelectric conversion material. A photoelectric conversion element PD (i, j) using a laminated film having such a structure on a layer 553S (j) containing a photoelectric conversion material can be called an avalanche photodiode.

［光電変換材料を含む層５５３Ｓ（ｊ）の構成例２］
例えば、１４族の元素を含む半導体を、光電変換材料を含む層５５３Ｓ（ｊ）に用いることができる。具体的には、シリコンを含む半導体を、光電変換材料を含む層５５３Ｓ（ｊ）に用いることができる。例えば、水素化アモルファスシリコン、微結晶シリコン、ポリシリコンまたは単結晶シリコン等を、光電変換材料を含む層５５３Ｓ（ｊ）に用いることができる。 [Structure 2 of layer 553S (j) containing photoelectric conversion material]
For example, a semiconductor containing a Group 14 element can be used for layer 553S (j) containing a photoelectric conversion material. Specifically, a semiconductor containing silicon can be used for the layer 553S (j) containing a photoelectric conversion material. For example, hydrogenated amorphous silicon, microcrystalline silicon, polysilicon, single crystal silicon, or the like can be used for layer 553S (j) containing a photoelectric conversion material.

例えば、有機半導体を、光電変換材料を含む層５５３Ｓ（ｊ）に用いることができる。具体的には、発光性の材料を含む層５５３Ｇ（ｊ）に用いる層の一部を、光電変換材料を含む層５５３Ｓ（ｊ）の一部に用いることができる。 For example, an organic semiconductor can be used for layer 553S (j) containing a photoelectric conversion material. Specifically, a part of the layer used for the layer 553G (j) containing a luminescent material can be used as a part of the layer 553S (j) containing a photoelectric conversion material.

具体的には、発光性の材料を含む層５５３Ｇ（ｊ）に用いる正孔輸送層および電子輸送層を、光電変換材料を含む層５５３Ｓ（ｊ）に用いることができる。これにより、作製工程を簡略化することができる。 Specifically, the hole transport layer and the electron transport layer used for the layer 553G (j) containing the luminescent material can be used for the layer 553S (j) containing the photoelectric conversion material. As a result, the manufacturing process can be simplified.

また、例えば、フラーレン（例えばＣ６０、Ｃ７０等）またはその誘導体等の電子受容性の有機半導体材料をｎ型の半導体膜に用いることができる。 Further, for example, an electron-accepting organic semiconductor material such as fullerene (for example, C 60 , C 70, etc.) or a derivative thereof can be used for the n-type semiconductor film.

また、例えば、銅（ＩＩ）フタロシアニン（Ｃｏｐｐｅｒ（ＩＩ）　ｐｈｔｈａｌｏｃｙａｎｉｎｅ；ＣｕＰｃ）またはテトラフェニルジベンゾペリフランテン（Ｔｅｔｒａｐｈｅｎｙｌｄｉｂｅｎｚｏｐｅｒｉｆｌａｎｔｈｅｎｅ；ＤＢＰ）等の電子供与性の有機半導体材料をｐ型の半導体膜に用いることができる。 Further, for example, an electron-donating organic semiconductor material such as copper (II) phthalocyanine (CuPc) or tetraphenyldibenzoperiflanthene (DBP) can be used for the p-type semiconductor film. ..

また、例えば、電子受容性の半導体材料と電子供与性の半導体材料とを共蒸着した膜をｉ型の半導体膜に用いることができる。 Further, for example, a film in which an electron-accepting semiconductor material and an electron-donating semiconductor material are co-deposited can be used as an i-type semiconductor film.

《領域２３１の構成例１》
領域２３１は、一群の画素７０３（ｉ，１）乃至画素７０３（ｉ，ｎ）および他の一群の画素７０３（１，ｊ）乃至画素７０３（ｍ，ｊ）を備える（図３Ａ参照）。 << Configuration example 1 of region 231 >>
Region 231 includes a group of pixels 703 (i, 1) to 703 (i, n) and another group of pixels 703 (1, j) to 703 (m, j) (see FIG. 3A).

一群の画素７０３（ｉ，１）乃至画素７０３（ｉ，ｎ）は、行方向（図中に矢印Ｒ１で示す方向）に配設され、一群の画素７０３（ｉ，１）乃至画素７０３（ｉ，ｎ）は、画素７０３（ｉ，ｊ）を含む。 The group of pixels 703 (i, 1) to 703 (i, n) are arranged in the row direction (the direction indicated by the arrow R1 in the drawing), and the group of pixels 703 (i, 1) to 703 (i). , N) include pixels 703 (i, j).

また、導電膜Ｇ１（ｉ）は、前記一群の画素７０３（ｉ，１）乃至画素７０３（ｉ，ｎ）と電気的に接続され、一群の画素７０３（ｉ，１）乃至画素７０３（ｉ，ｎ）は、導電膜ＴＸ（ｉ）と電気的に接続される。 Further, the conductive film G1 (i) is electrically connected to the group of pixels 703 (i, 1) to 703 (i, n), and the group of pixels 703 (i, 1) to 703 (i, n) is electrically connected. n) is electrically connected to the conductive film TX (i).

他の一群の画素７０３（１，ｊ）乃至画素７０３（ｍ，ｊ）は、行方向と交差する列方向（図中に矢印Ｃ１で示す方向）に配設され、他の一群の画素７０３（１，ｊ）乃至画素７０３（ｍ，ｊ）は、画素７０３（ｉ，ｊ）を含む。 The other group of pixels 703 (1, j) to 703 (m, j) are arranged in the column direction (direction indicated by the arrow C1 in the figure) intersecting the row direction, and the other group of pixels 703 ( 1, j) to pixel 703 (m, j) includes pixel 703 (i, j).

また、他の一群の画素７０３（１，ｊ）乃至画素７０３（ｍ，ｊ）は、導電膜Ｓ１ｇ（ｊ）と電気的に接続され、他の一群の画素７０３（１，ｊ）乃至画素７０３（ｍ，ｊ）は、導電膜ＷＸ（ｊ）と電気的に接続される。 Further, the other group of pixels 703 (1, j) to 703 (m, j) are electrically connected to the conductive film S1g (j), and the other group of pixels 703 (1, j) to pixel 703 are electrically connected to each other. (M, j) is electrically connected to the conductive film WX (j).

これにより、複数の画素から撮像情報を取得することができる。または、複数の画素に画像情報を供給することができる。その結果、利便性、有用性または信頼性に優れた新規な機能パネルを提供することができる。 As a result, imaging information can be acquired from a plurality of pixels. Alternatively, image information can be supplied to a plurality of pixels. As a result, it is possible to provide a new functional panel that is excellent in convenience, usefulness, or reliability.

《領域２３１の構成例２》
領域２３１は領域２３１（１）を備え、領域２３１（１）は画素７０３（ｇ，ｈ）を備える（図１Ａおよび図７Ａ参照）。 << Configuration example 2 of region 231 >>
Region 231 comprises region 231 (1) and region 231 (1) comprises pixels 703 (g, h) (see FIGS. 1A and 7A).

画素７０３（ｇ，ｈ）は、発光素子５５０（１）を含む（図２Ｃおよび図２Ｄ参照）。具体的には、青色を表示する画素７０２Ｂ（ｇ，ｈ）、緑色を表示する画素７０２Ｇ（ｇ，ｈ）、赤色を表示する画素７０２Ｒ（ｇ，ｈ）および発光素子５５０（１）を含む画素７０２Ｎ（ｇ，ｈ）を、画素７０３（ｇ，ｈ）に用いることができる（図２Ｃおよび図７Ｃ参照）。 Pixel 703 (g, h) includes a light emitting element 550 (1) (see FIGS. 2C and 2D). Specifically, a pixel including a pixel 702B (g, h) displaying blue, a pixel 702G (g, h) displaying green, a pixel 702R (g, h) displaying red, and a light emitting element 550 (1). 702N (g, h) can be used for pixel 703 (g, h) (see FIGS. 2C and 7C).

＜機能パネルの構成例７＞
また、本発明の一態様の情報処理装置に用いることができる機能パネルは、マルチプレクサＭＵＸと、増幅回路ＡＭＰと、アナログデジタル変換回路ＡＤＣと、を有する（図３Ａ参照）。 <Function panel configuration example 7>
Further, the functional panel that can be used in the information processing apparatus of one aspect of the present invention includes a multiplexer MUX, an amplifier circuit AMP, and an analog-to-digital conversion circuit ADC (see FIG. 3A).

マルチプレクサＭＵＸは、複数のサンプリング回路ＳＣ（ｊ）から一つを選んで撮像信号を取得し、例えば増幅回路ＡＭＰに供給する機能を備える。 The multiplexer MUX has a function of selecting one from a plurality of sampling circuits SC (j) to acquire an imaging signal and supplying it to, for example, an amplifier circuit AMP.

具体的には、サンプリング回路ＳＣ（１）の第３の端子ＯＵＴ（１）乃至サンプリング回路ＳＣ（９）の第３の端子ＯＵＴ（９）と電気的に接続され、所定のサンプリング回路から撮像信号を取得し、増幅回路ＡＭＰに供給することができる。 Specifically, it is electrically connected to the third terminal OUT (1) of the sampling circuit SC (1) to the third terminal OUT (9) of the sampling circuit SC (9), and an imaging signal is transmitted from a predetermined sampling circuit. Can be obtained and supplied to the amplifier circuit AMP.

これにより、行方向に配設される複数の画素から所定の画素を選択して撮像情報を取得することができる。または、同時に取得する撮像信号の数を所定の数に抑制することができる。または、入力チャンネル数が、行方向に配設される画素の数より少ないアナログデジタル変換回路ＡＤＣを用いることができる。その結果、利便性、有用性または信頼性に優れた新規な機能パネルを提供することができる。 As a result, it is possible to acquire imaging information by selecting a predetermined pixel from a plurality of pixels arranged in the row direction. Alternatively, the number of imaging signals acquired at the same time can be suppressed to a predetermined number. Alternatively, an analog-to-digital conversion circuit ADC whose number of input channels is smaller than the number of pixels arranged in the row direction can be used. As a result, it is possible to provide a new functional panel that is excellent in convenience, usefulness, or reliability.

増幅回路ＡＭＰは撮像信号を増幅し、アナログデジタル変換回路ＡＤＣに供給することができる。 The amplifier circuit AMP can amplify the image pickup signal and supply it to the analog-to-digital conversion circuit ADC.

なお、機能層５２０はマルチプレクサＭＵＸおよび増幅回路ＡＭＰを備える。 The functional layer 520 includes a multiplexer MUX and an amplifier circuit AMP.

これにより、例えば、画素回路５３０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）に用いる半導体膜を形成する工程において、マルチプレクサＭＵＸおよび増幅回路ＡＭＰに用いる半導体膜を形成することができる。または、機能パネルの作製工程を簡略化することができる。その結果、利便性、有用性または信頼性に優れた新規な機能パネルを提供することができる。 Thereby, for example, in the step of forming the semiconductor film used for the pixel circuit 530G (i, j), the semiconductor film used for the multiplexer MUX and the amplifier circuit AMP can be formed. Alternatively, the manufacturing process of the functional panel can be simplified. As a result, it is possible to provide a new functional panel that is excellent in convenience, usefulness, or reliability.

アナログデジタル変換回路ＡＤＣは、アナログの撮像信号をデジタル信号に変換する機能を備える。 The analog-to-digital conversion circuit ADC has a function of converting an analog imaging signal into a digital signal.

なお、本実施の形態は、本明細書で示す他の実施の形態と適宜組み合わせることができる。 It should be noted that this embodiment can be appropriately combined with other embodiments shown in the present specification.

（実施の形態４）
本実施の形態では、本発明の一態様の情報処理装置に用いることができる機能パネルの構成について、図１２を参照しながら説明する。 (Embodiment 4)
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the functional panel that can be used in the information processing apparatus of one aspect of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.

図１２は本発明の一態様の表示装置の構成を説明する図である。図１２Ａは本発明の一態様の表示装置のブロック図であり、図１２Ｂ乃至図１２Ｄは本発明の一態様の表示装置の外観を説明する投影図である。 FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a display device according to an aspect of the present invention. 12A is a block diagram of the display device of one aspect of the present invention, and FIGS. 12B to 12D are projection views illustrating the appearance of the display device of one aspect of the present invention.

＜表示装置の構成例＞
本実施の形態で説明する表示装置は、機能パネル７００と、制御部２３８と、を有する（図１２Ａ参照）。 <Display device configuration example>
The display device described in this embodiment includes a function panel 700 and a control unit 238 (see FIG. 12A).

《制御部２３８の構成例１》
制御部２３８は、画像情報ＶＩおよび制御情報ＣＩを供給される。例えば、クロック信号またはタイミング信号などを制御情報ＣＩに用いることができる。 << Configuration Example 1 of Control Unit 238 >>
The control unit 238 is supplied with the image information VI and the control information CI. For example, a clock signal, a timing signal, or the like can be used for the control information CI.

制御部２３８は画像情報ＶＩに基づいて情報Ｖ１１を生成し、制御情報ＣＩに基づいて制御信号を生成する。また、制御部２３８は情報Ｖ１１および制御信号を供給する。 The control unit 238 generates information V11 based on the image information VI, and generates a control signal based on the control information CI. Further, the control unit 238 supplies the information V11 and the control signal.

例えば、情報Ｖ１１は、８ｂｉｔ以上好ましくは１２ｂｉｔ以上の階調を含む。また、例えば、駆動回路に用いるシフトレジスタのクロック信号またはスタートパルスなどを、制御信号に用いることができる。 For example, the information V11 includes a gradation of 8 bits or more, preferably 12 bits or more. Further, for example, a clock signal or a start pulse of a shift register used in a drive circuit can be used as a control signal.

《制御部２３８の構成例２》
例えば、伸張回路２３４および画像処理回路２３５を制御部２３８に用いることができる。 << Configuration Example 2 of Control Unit 238 >>
For example, the extension circuit 234 and the image processing circuit 235 can be used for the control unit 238.

《伸張回路２３４》
伸張回路２３４は、圧縮された状態で供給される画像情報ＶＩを伸張する機能を備える。伸張回路２３４は、記憶部を備える。記憶部は、例えば伸張された画像情報を記憶する機能を備える。 << Extension circuit 234 >>
The decompression circuit 234 has a function of decompressing the image information VI supplied in a compressed state. The extension circuit 234 includes a storage unit. The storage unit has, for example, a function of storing the stretched image information.

《画像処理回路２３５》
画像処理回路２３５は、例えば、記憶領域を備える。記憶領域は、例えば、画像情報ＶＩに含まれる情報を記憶する機能を備える。 << Image processing circuit 235 >>
The image processing circuit 235 includes, for example, a storage area. The storage area has, for example, a function of storing information included in the image information VI.

画像処理回路２３５は、例えば、所定の特性曲線に基づいて画像情報ＶＩを補正して情報Ｖ１１を生成する機能と、情報Ｖ１１を供給する機能を備える。 The image processing circuit 235 has, for example, a function of correcting the image information VI based on a predetermined characteristic curve to generate information V11 and a function of supplying information V11.

《機能パネルの構成例１》
機能パネル７００は情報Ｖ１１および制御信号を供給される。例えば、実施の形態２または実施の形態３において説明する機能パネル７００を用いることができる。 << Configuration example of function panel 1 >>
The functional panel 700 is supplied with information V11 and control signals. For example, the functional panel 700 described in the second embodiment or the third embodiment can be used.

《画素７０３（ｉ，ｊ）の構成例５》
画素７０３（ｉ，ｊ）は、情報Ｖ１１に基づいて発光する。また、画素７０３（ｇ，ｈ）も、情報Ｖ１１に基づいて発光する。 << Configuration Example 5 of Pixel 703 (i, j) >>
Pixels 703 (i, j) emit light based on the information V11. Pixels 703 (g, h) also emit light based on the information V11.

これにより、表示素子を用いて画像情報を表示することができる。または、画像情報を用いて、発光素子５５０（１）から光を発することができる。その結果、利便性、有用性または信頼性に優れた新規な表示装置を提供することができる。または、例えば、スマートウオッチ（図１２Ｂ参照）、映像モニター（図１２Ｃ参照）またはノートブックコンピュータ（図１２Ｄ参照）などを提供することができる。 This makes it possible to display image information using the display element. Alternatively, the image information can be used to emit light from the light emitting element 550 (1). As a result, it is possible to provide a new display device having excellent convenience, usefulness or reliability. Alternatively, for example, a smart watch (see FIG. 12B), a video monitor (see FIG. 12C), a notebook computer (see FIG. 12D), and the like can be provided.

《機能パネルの構成例２》
例えば、機能パネル７００は駆動回路および制御回路を備える（図１２Ａ参照）。 << Functional panel configuration example 2 >>
For example, the functional panel 700 includes a drive circuit and a control circuit (see FIG. 12A).

《駆動回路》
駆動回路は制御信号に基づいて動作する。制御信号を用いることにより、複数の駆動回路の動作を同期することができる。 《Drive circuit》
The drive circuit operates based on the control signal. By using the control signal, the operations of a plurality of drive circuits can be synchronized.

例えば、駆動回路ＧＤを機能パネル７００に用いることができる。駆動回路ＧＤは、制御信号を供給され、第１の選択信号を供給する機能を備える。 For example, the drive circuit GD can be used for the functional panel 700. The drive circuit GD has a function of supplying a control signal and supplying a first selection signal.

また、例えば、駆動回路ＳＤを機能パネル７００に用いることができる。駆動回路ＳＤは、制御信号および情報Ｖ１１を供給され、画像信号を供給することができる。 Further, for example, the drive circuit SD can be used for the function panel 700. The drive circuit SD is supplied with a control signal and information V11, and can supply an image signal.

また、例えば、駆動回路ＲＤを機能パネル７００に用いることができる。駆動回路ＲＤは制御信号を供給され、第２の選択信号を供給することができる。 Further, for example, the drive circuit RD can be used for the function panel 700. The drive circuit RD is supplied with a control signal and can supply a second selection signal.

また、例えば、読み出し回路ＲＣを機能パネル７００に用いることができる。読み出し回路ＲＣは制御信号を供給され、例えば、相関二重サンプリング法を用いて、撮像信号を読み出すことができる。 Further, for example, the read circuit RC can be used for the function panel 700. The read-out circuit RC is supplied with a control signal, and for example, an image pickup signal can be read out by using a correlated double sampling method.

《制御回路２４３》
制御回路２４３は制御信号を生成し、供給する機能を備える。例えば、クロック信号またはタイミング信号などを制御信号に用いることができる。 << Control circuit 243 >>
The control circuit 243 has a function of generating and supplying a control signal. For example, a clock signal, a timing signal, or the like can be used as a control signal.

具体的には、リジッド基板上に形成された制御回路を機能パネルに用いることができる。または、フレキシブルプリント基板を用いて、リジッド基板上に形成された制御回路を制御部２３８と電気的に接続することができる。 Specifically, the control circuit formed on the rigid substrate can be used for the functional panel. Alternatively, the flexible printed circuit board can be used to electrically connect the control circuit formed on the rigid substrate to the control unit 238.

《制御回路２３３》
例えば、タイミングコントローラを制御回路２３３に用いることができる。 << Control circuit 233 >>
For example, a timing controller can be used in the control circuit 233.

なお、本実施の形態は、本明細書で示す他の実施の形態と適宜組み合わせることができる。 It should be noted that this embodiment can be appropriately combined with other embodiments shown in the present specification.

（実施の形態５）
本実施の形態では、本発明の一態様の入出力装置の構成について、図１３を参照しながら説明する。 (Embodiment 5)
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the input / output device of one aspect of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.

図１３は本発明の一態様の入出力装置の構成を説明するブロック図である。 FIG. 13 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of an input / output device according to an aspect of the present invention.

＜入出力装置の構成例１＞
本実施の形態で説明する入出力装置は、入力部２４０と、表示部２３０と、を有する（図１３参照）。 <I / O device configuration example 1>
The input / output device described in this embodiment includes an input unit 240 and a display unit 230 (see FIG. 13).

《表示部２３０の構成例》
表示部２３０は、機能パネルを備える。例えば、実施の形態２または実施の形態３に記載の機能パネル７００を表示部２３０に用いることができる。なお、入力部２４０および表示部２３０を有する構成を入出力パネル７００ＴＰということができる。 << Configuration example of display unit 230 >>
The display unit 230 includes a functional panel. For example, the functional panel 700 according to the second or third embodiment can be used for the display unit 230. The configuration having the input unit 240 and the display unit 230 can be referred to as an input / output panel 700TP.

《入力部２４０の構成例》
入力部２４０は検知領域２４１を備える。入力部２４０は検知領域２４１に近接するものを検知する機能を備える。 << Configuration example of input unit 240 >>
The input unit 240 includes a detection area 241. The input unit 240 has a function of detecting an object close to the detection area 241.

また、検知領域２４１は、画素７０３（ｉ，ｊ）と重なる領域を備える。 Further, the detection area 241 includes an area that overlaps with the pixel 703 (i, j).

これにより、表示部を用いて画像情報を表示しながら、表示部と重なる領域に近接するものを検知することができる。または、表示部に近接させる指などをポインタに用いて、位置情報を入力することができる。または、位置情報を表示部に表示する画像情報に関連付けることができる。その結果、利便性、有用性または信頼性に優れた新規な入出力装置を提供することができる。 As a result, while displaying the image information using the display unit, it is possible to detect an object close to the area overlapping the display unit. Alternatively, the position information can be input by using a finger or the like close to the display unit as the pointer. Alternatively, the position information can be associated with the image information displayed on the display unit. As a result, it is possible to provide a new input / output device having excellent convenience, usefulness, or reliability.

《検知領域２４１の構成例１》
検知領域２４１は、例えば、単数または複数の検知器を備える。 << Configuration Example 1 of Detection Area 241 >>
The detection area 241 includes, for example, one or more detectors.

検知領域２４１は、一群の検知器８０２（ｇ，１）乃至検知器８０２（ｇ，ｑ）と、他の一群の検知器８０２（１，ｈ）乃至検知器８０２（ｐ，ｈ）と、を有する。なお、ｇは１以上ｐ以下の整数であり、ｈは１以上ｑ以下の整数であり、ｐおよびｑは１以上の整数である。 The detection area 241 includes a group of detectors 802 (g, 1) to 802 (g, q) and another group of detectors 802 (1, h) to 802 (p, h). Have. Note that g is an integer of 1 or more and p or less, h is an integer of 1 or more and q or less, and p and q are integers of 1 or more.

一群の検知器８０２（ｇ，１）乃至検知器８０２（ｇ，ｑ）は、検知器８０２（ｇ，ｈ）を含み、行方向（図中に矢印Ｒ２で示す方向）に配設される。なお、矢印Ｒ２で示す方向は、矢印Ｒ１で示す方向と同じであっても良いし、異なっていてもよい。 The group of detectors 802 (g, 1) to 802 (g, q) includes the detectors 802 (g, h) and are arranged in the row direction (direction indicated by arrow R2 in the drawing). The direction indicated by the arrow R2 may be the same as or different from the direction indicated by the arrow R1.

また、他の一群の検知器８０２（１，ｈ）乃至検知器８０２（ｐ，ｈ）は、検知器８０２（ｇ，ｈ）を含み、行方向と交差する列方向（図中に矢印Ｃ２で示す方向）に配設される。 Further, another group of detectors 802 (1, h) to 802 (p, h) includes the detector 802 (g, h), and the column direction intersecting the row direction (arrow C2 in the figure). It is arranged in the direction shown).

《検知器》
検知器は近接するポインタを検知する機能を備える。例えば、指やスタイラスペン等をポインタに用いることができる。例えば、金属片またはコイル等を、スタイラスペンに用いることができる。 《Detector》
The detector has a function of detecting a nearby pointer. For example, a finger, a stylus pen, or the like can be used as a pointer. For example, a metal piece, a coil, or the like can be used for the stylus pen.

具体的には、静電容量方式の近接センサ、電磁誘導方式の近接センサ、光学方式の近接センサ、抵抗膜方式の近接センサなどを、検知器に用いることができる。 Specifically, a capacitance type proximity sensor, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor, an optical type proximity sensor, a resistance film type proximity sensor, and the like can be used as the detector.

また、複数の方式の検知器を併用することもできる。例えば、指を検知する検知器と、スタイラスペンを検知する検知器とを、併用することができる。 In addition, a plurality of types of detectors can be used together. For example, a detector that detects a finger and a detector that detects a stylus pen can be used together.

これにより、ポインタの種類を判別することができる。または、判別したポインタの種類に基づいて、異なる命令を検知情報に関連付けることができる。具体的には、ポインタに指を用いたと判別した場合は、検知情報をジェスチャーと関連付けることができる。または、ポインタにスタイラスペンを用いたと判別した場合は、検知情報を描画処理と関連付けることができる。 This makes it possible to determine the type of pointer. Alternatively, different instructions can be associated with the detection information based on the determined pointer type. Specifically, when it is determined that a finger is used for the pointer, the detection information can be associated with the gesture. Alternatively, when it is determined that the stylus pen is used for the pointer, the detection information can be associated with the drawing process.

具体的には、静電容量方式、感圧方式または光学方式の近接センサを用いて、指を検知することができる。または、電磁誘導方式または光学方式の近接センサを用いて、スタイラスペンを検知することができる。 Specifically, a finger can be detected by using a capacitance type, pressure sensitive type or optical type proximity sensor. Alternatively, the stylus pen can be detected by using an electromagnetic induction type or an optical type proximity sensor.

《入力部２４０の構成例２》
入力部２４０は発振回路ＯＳＣおよび検知回路ＤＣを備える（図１３参照）。 << Configuration Example 2 of Input Unit 240 >>
The input unit 240 includes an oscillation circuit OSC and a detection circuit DC (see FIG. 13).

発振回路ＯＳＣは探索信号を検知器８０２（ｇ，ｈ）に供給する。例えば、矩形波、のこぎり波、三角波、サイン波等を、探索信号に用いることができる。 The oscillation circuit OSC supplies the search signal to the detector 802 (g, h). For example, a square wave, a sawtooth wave, a triangular wave, a sine wave, or the like can be used as a search signal.

検知器８０２（ｇ，ｈ）は、検知器８０２（ｇ，ｈ）に近接するポインタまでの距離および探索信号に基づいて変化する検知信号を生成し供給する。 The detector 802 (g, h) generates and supplies a detection signal that changes based on the distance to the pointer close to the detector 802 (g, h) and the search signal.

検知回路ＤＣは検知信号に基づいて入力情報を供給する。 The detection circuit DC supplies input information based on the detection signal.

これにより、近接するポインタから検知領域２４１までの距離を検知することができる。または、検知領域２４１内においてポインタが最も近接する位置を検知することができる。 As a result, the distance from the adjacent pointer to the detection area 241 can be detected. Alternatively, the position where the pointer is closest to the detection area 241 can be detected.

なお、本実施の形態は、本明細書で示す他の実施の形態と適宜組み合わせることができる。 It should be noted that this embodiment can be appropriately combined with other embodiments shown in the present specification.

（実施の形態６）
本実施の形態では、本発明の一態様の情報処理装置の構成について、図１４乃至図１６を参照しながら説明する。 (Embodiment 6)
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the information processing apparatus according to one aspect of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16.

図１４Ａは本発明の一態様の情報処理装置の構成を説明するブロック図である。図１４Ｂおよび図１４Ｃは、情報処理装置の外観の一例を説明する投影図である。 FIG. 14A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of an information processing device according to an aspect of the present invention. 14B and 14C are projection views illustrating an example of the appearance of the information processing apparatus.

図１５は、本発明の一態様のプログラムを説明するフローチャートである。図１５Ａは、本発明の一態様のプログラムの主の処理を説明するフローチャートであり、図１５Ｂは、割り込み処理を説明するフローチャートである。 FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a program of one aspect of the present invention. FIG. 15A is a flowchart illustrating the main processing of the program of one aspect of the present invention, and FIG. 15B is a flowchart illustrating interrupt processing.

図１６は、本発明の一態様のプログラムを説明する図である。図１６Ａは、本発明の一態様のプログラムの割り込み処理を説明するフローチャートである。また、図１６Ｂは、情報処理装置の操作を説明する模式図であり、図１６Ｃは、本発明の一態様の情報処理装置の動作を説明するタイミングチャートである。 FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a program of one aspect of the present invention. FIG. 16A is a flowchart illustrating interrupt processing of the program of one aspect of the present invention. Further, FIG. 16B is a schematic diagram illustrating the operation of the information processing apparatus, and FIG. 16C is a timing chart illustrating the operation of the information processing apparatus according to one aspect of the present invention.

＜情報処理装置の構成例１＞
本実施の形態で説明する情報処理装置は、演算装置２１０と、入出力装置２２０と、を有する（図１４Ａ参照）。なお、入出力装置２２０は、演算装置２１０と電気的に接続される。また、情報処理装置２００は筐体を備えることができる（図１４Ｂおよび図１４Ｃ参照）。 <Configuration example 1 of information processing device>
The information processing device described in this embodiment includes an arithmetic unit 210 and an input / output device 220 (see FIG. 14A). The input / output device 220 is electrically connected to the arithmetic unit 210. In addition, the information processing device 200 can include a housing (see FIGS. 14B and 14C).

《演算装置２１０の構成例１》
演算装置２１０は入力情報ＩＩまたは検知情報ＤＳを供給される。演算装置２１０は入力情報ＩＩまたは検知情報ＤＳに基づいて、制御情報ＣＩおよび画像情報ＶＩを生成し、制御情報ＣＩおよび画像情報ＶＩを供給する。 << Configuration Example 1 of Arithmetic Logic Unit 210 >>
The arithmetic unit 210 is supplied with the input information II or the detection information DS. The arithmetic unit 210 generates the control information CI and the image information VI based on the input information II or the detection information DS, and supplies the control information CI and the image information VI.

演算装置２１０は、演算部２１１および記憶部２１２を備える。また、演算装置２１０は、伝送路２１４および入出力インターフェース２１５を備える。 The arithmetic unit 210 includes an arithmetic unit 211 and a storage unit 212. Further, the arithmetic unit 210 includes a transmission line 214 and an input / output interface 215.

伝送路２１４は、演算部２１１、記憶部２１２、および入出力インターフェース２１５と電気的に接続される。 The transmission line 214 is electrically connected to the arithmetic unit 211, the storage unit 212, and the input / output interface 215.

《演算部２１１》
演算部２１１は、例えばプログラムを実行する機能を備える。 << Calculation unit 211 >>
The calculation unit 211 has, for example, a function of executing a program.

《記憶部２１２》
記憶部２１２は、例えば演算部２１１が実行するプログラム、初期情報、設定情報または画像等を記憶する機能を有する。 《Memory part 212》
The storage unit 212 has a function of storing, for example, a program, initial information, setting information, an image, or the like executed by the calculation unit 211.

具体的には、ハードディスク、フラッシュメモリまたは酸化物半導体を含むトランジスタを用いたメモリ等を用いることができる。 Specifically, a hard disk, a flash memory, a memory using a transistor including an oxide semiconductor, or the like can be used.

《入出力インターフェース２１５、伝送路２１４》
入出力インターフェース２１５は端子または配線を備え、情報を供給し、情報を供給される機能を備える。例えば、伝送路２１４と電気的に接続することができる。また、入出力装置２２０と電気的に接続することができる。 << I / O interface 215, transmission line 214 >>
The input / output interface 215 includes terminals or wiring, and has a function of supplying information and being supplied with information. For example, it can be electrically connected to the transmission line 214. Further, it can be electrically connected to the input / output device 220.

伝送路２１４は配線を備え、情報を供給し、情報を供給される機能を備える。例えば、入出力インターフェース２１５と電気的に接続することができる。また、演算部２１１、記憶部２１２または入出力インターフェース２１５と電気的に接続することができる。 The transmission line 214 includes wiring, supplies information, and has a function of being supplied with information. For example, it can be electrically connected to the input / output interface 215. Further, it can be electrically connected to the calculation unit 211, the storage unit 212, or the input / output interface 215.

《入出力装置２２０の構成例》
入出力装置２２０は、入力情報ＩＩおよび検知情報ＤＳを供給する。入出力装置２２０は、制御情報ＣＩおよび画像情報ＶＩを供給される（図１４Ａ参照）。 << Configuration example of input / output device 220 >>
The input / output device 220 supplies the input information II and the detection information DS. The input / output device 220 is supplied with the control information CI and the image information VI (see FIG. 14A).

例えば、キーボードのスキャンコード、位置情報、ボタンの操作情報、音声情報または画像情報等を入力情報ＩＩに用いることができる。または、例えば、情報処理装置２００が使用される環境等の照度情報、姿勢情報、加速度情報、方位情報、圧力情報、温度情報または湿度情報等を検知情報ＤＳに用いることができる。 For example, keyboard scan code, position information, button operation information, voice information, image information, and the like can be used as input information II. Alternatively, for example, illuminance information, attitude information, acceleration information, orientation information, pressure information, temperature information, humidity information, etc. of the environment in which the information processing apparatus 200 is used can be used for the detection information DS.

例えば、画像情報ＶＩを表示する輝度を制御する信号、彩度を制御する信号、色相を制御する信号を、制御情報ＣＩに用いることができる。または、画像情報ＶＩの一部の表示を変化する信号を、制御情報ＣＩに用いることができる。 For example, a signal for controlling the brightness, a signal for controlling the saturation, and a signal for controlling the hue for displaying the image information VI can be used for the control information CI. Alternatively, a signal that changes the display of a part of the image information VI can be used for the control information CI.

入出力装置２２０は、表示部２３０、入力部２４０および検知部２５０を備える。例えば、実施の形態５において説明する入出力装置を入出力装置２２０に用いることができる。また、入出力装置２２０は通信部２９０を備えることができる。 The input / output device 220 includes a display unit 230, an input unit 240, and a detection unit 250. For example, the input / output device described in the fifth embodiment can be used for the input / output device 220. Further, the input / output device 220 can include a communication unit 290.

《表示部２３０の構成例》
表示部２３０は制御情報ＣＩに基づいて、画像情報ＶＩを表示する。 << Configuration example of display unit 230 >>
The display unit 230 displays the image information VI based on the control information CI.

表示部２３０は、制御部２３８と、駆動回路ＧＤと、駆動回路ＳＤと、機能パネル７００と、を有する（図１２参照）。例えば、実施の形態４において説明する表示装置を表示部２３０に用いることができる。 The display unit 230 includes a control unit 238, a drive circuit GD, a drive circuit SD, and a function panel 700 (see FIG. 12). For example, the display device described in the fourth embodiment can be used for the display unit 230.

《入力部２４０の構成例》
入力部２４０は入力情報ＩＩを生成する。例えば、入力部２４０は、位置情報Ｐ１を供給する機能を備える。 << Configuration example of input unit 240 >>
The input unit 240 generates the input information II. For example, the input unit 240 has a function of supplying position information P1.

例えば、ヒューマンインターフェイス等を入力部２４０に用いることができる（図１４Ａ参照）。具体的には、キーボード、マウス、タッチセンサ、マイクまたはカメラ等を入力部２４０に用いることができる。 For example, a human interface or the like can be used for the input unit 240 (see FIG. 14A). Specifically, a keyboard, mouse, touch sensor, microphone, camera, or the like can be used for the input unit 240.

また、表示部２３０に重なる領域を備えるタッチセンサを用いることができる。なお、表示部２３０と表示部２３０に重なる領域を備えるタッチセンサを備える入出力装置を、タッチパネルまたはタッチスクリーンということができる。 Further, a touch sensor having an area overlapping the display unit 230 can be used. An input / output device including a touch sensor having an area overlapping the display unit 230 and the display unit 230 can be referred to as a touch panel or a touch screen.

例えば、使用者は、タッチパネルに触れた指をポインタに用いて様々なジェスチャー（タップ、ドラッグ、スワイプまたはピンチイン等）をすることができる。 For example, the user can make various gestures (tap, drag, swipe, pinch-in, etc.) by using the finger touching the touch panel as a pointer.

例えば、演算装置２１０は、タッチパネルに接触する指の位置または軌跡等の情報を解析し、解析結果が所定の条件を満たすとき、所定のジェスチャーが供給されたとすることができる。これにより、使用者は、所定のジェスチャーにあらかじめ関連付けられた所定の操作命令を、当該ジェスチャーを用いて供給できる。 For example, the arithmetic unit 210 analyzes information such as the position or locus of a finger in contact with the touch panel, and when the analysis result satisfies a predetermined condition, it can be assumed that a predetermined gesture is supplied. As a result, the user can supply a predetermined operation command associated with the predetermined gesture in advance by using the gesture.

一例を挙げれば、使用者は、画像情報の表示位置を変更する「スクロール命令」を、タッチパネルに沿ってタッチパネルに接触する指を移動するジェスチャーを用いて供給できる。 For example, the user can supply a "scroll command" for changing the display position of image information by using a gesture of moving a finger touching the touch panel along the touch panel.

また、使用者は、領域２３１の端部にナビゲーションパネルＮＰを引き出して表示する「ドラッグ命令」を、領域２３１の端部に接する指を移動するジェスチャーを用いて供給できる（図１４Ｃ参照）。また、使用者は、ナビゲーションパネルＮＰにインデックス画像ＩＮＤ、他のページの一部または他のページのサムネイル画像ＴＮを、所定の順番でパラパラ表示する「リーフスルー命令」を、指を強く押し付ける位置を移動するジェスチャーを用いて供給できる。または、指を押し付ける圧力を用いて供給できる。これにより、紙の書籍のページをパラパラめくるように、電子書籍端末のページをめくることができる。または、サムネイル画像ＴＮまたはインデックス画像ＩＮＤを頼りに、所定のページを探すことができる。 Further, the user can supply a "drag command" for pulling out and displaying the navigation panel NP at the end of the area 231 by using a gesture of moving a finger in contact with the end of the area 231 (see FIG. 14C). In addition, the user strongly presses the "leaf-through command" that displays the index image IND, the thumbnail image TN of a part of another page or the thumbnail image TN of another page on the navigation panel NP in a predetermined order. Can be supplied using moving gestures. Alternatively, it can be supplied using the pressure of pressing a finger. As a result, the pages of the electronic book terminal can be turned like the pages of a paper book. Alternatively, a predetermined page can be searched by relying on the thumbnail image TN or the index image IND.

《検知部２５０の構成例》
検知部２５０は検知情報ＤＳを生成する。例えば、検知部２５０は、情報処理装置２００が使用される環境の照度を検出する機能を備え、照度情報を供給する機能を備える。 << Configuration example of detection unit 250 >>
The detection unit 250 generates the detection information DS. For example, the detection unit 250 has a function of detecting the illuminance of the environment in which the information processing device 200 is used, and has a function of supplying illuminance information.

検知部２５０は、周囲の状態を検知して検知情報を供給する機能を備える。具体的には、照度情報、姿勢情報、加速度情報、方位情報、圧力情報、温度情報または湿度情報等を供給できる。 The detection unit 250 has a function of detecting the surrounding state and supplying the detection information. Specifically, illuminance information, attitude information, acceleration information, orientation information, pressure information, temperature information, humidity information and the like can be supplied.

例えば、光検出器、姿勢検出器、加速度センサ、方位センサ、ＧＰＳ（Ｇｌｏｂａｌ　ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎｉｎｇ　Ｓｙｓｔｅｍ）信号受信回路、感圧スイッチ、圧力センサ、温度センサ、湿度センサまたはカメラ等を、検知部２５０に用いることができる。 For example, a photodetector, an attitude detector, an acceleration sensor, an orientation sensor, a GPS (Global positioning System) signal receiving circuit, a pressure sensitive switch, a pressure sensor, a temperature sensor, a humidity sensor, a camera, or the like can be used for the detection unit 250. it can.

《通信部２９０》
通信部２９０は、ネットワークに情報を供給し、ネットワークから情報を取得する機能を備える。 << Communication unit 290 >>
The communication unit 290 has a function of supplying information to the network and acquiring information from the network.

《筐体》
なお、筐体は入出力装置２２０または演算装置２１０を収納する機能を備える。または、筐体は表示部２３０または演算装置２１０を支持する機能を備える。 《Case》
The housing has a function of accommodating the input / output device 220 or the arithmetic unit 210. Alternatively, the housing has a function of supporting the display unit 230 or the arithmetic unit 210.

これにより、入力情報または検知情報に基づいて、制御情報を生成することができる。または、入力情報または検知情報に基づいて、画像情報を表示することができる。または、情報処理装置は、情報処理装置が使用される環境において、情報処理装置の筐体が受ける光の強さを把握して動作することができる。または、情報処理装置の使用者は、表示方法を選択することができる。その結果、利便性、有用性または信頼性に優れた新規な情報処理装置を提供することができる。 Thereby, control information can be generated based on the input information or the detection information. Alternatively, the image information can be displayed based on the input information or the detection information. Alternatively, the information processing device can operate by grasping the intensity of light received by the housing of the information processing device in the environment in which the information processing device is used. Alternatively, the user of the information processing device can select the display method. As a result, it is possible to provide a new information processing apparatus having excellent convenience, usefulness, or reliability.

なお、これらの構成は明確に分離できず、一つの構成が他の構成を兼ねる場合や他の構成の一部を含む場合がある。例えばタッチセンサが機能パネルに重ねられたタッチパネルは、表示部であるとともに入力部でもある。 It should be noted that these configurations cannot be clearly separated, and one configuration may serve as another configuration or may include a part of another configuration. For example, a touch panel on which a touch sensor is superimposed on a function panel is both a display unit and an input unit.

《演算装置２１０の構成例２》
演算装置２１０は人工知能部２１３を備える（図１４Ａ参照）。 << Configuration Example 2 of Arithmetic Logic Unit 210 >>
The arithmetic unit 210 includes an artificial intelligence unit 213 (see FIG. 14A).

人工知能部２１３は入力情報ＩＩまたは検知情報ＤＳを供給され、人工知能部２１３は入力情報ＩＩまたは検知情報ＤＳに基づいて、制御情報ＣＩを推論する。また、人工知能部２１３は制御情報ＣＩを供給する。 The artificial intelligence unit 213 is supplied with the input information II or the detection information DS, and the artificial intelligence unit 213 infers the control information CI based on the input information II or the detection information DS. In addition, the artificial intelligence unit 213 supplies the control information CI.

これにより、好適であると感じられるように表示する制御情報ＣＩを生成することができる。または、好適であると感じられるように表示することができる。または、快適であると感じられるように表示する制御情報ＣＩを生成することができる。または、快適であると感じられるように表示することができる。その結果、利便性、有用性または信頼性に優れた新規な情報処理装置を提供することができる。 This makes it possible to generate control information CI that is displayed so as to be felt to be suitable. Alternatively, it can be displayed as if it were suitable. Alternatively, the control information CI that is displayed so as to be comfortable can be generated. Alternatively, it can be displayed so that it feels comfortable. As a result, it is possible to provide a new information processing apparatus having excellent convenience, usefulness, or reliability.

［入力情報ＩＩに対する自然言語処理］
具体的には、人工知能部２１３は入力情報ＩＩを自然言語処理して、入力情報ＩＩ全体から１つの特徴を抽出することができる。例えば、人工知能部２１３は、入力情報ＩＩに込められた感情等を推論し特徴にすることができる。また、当該特徴に好適であると経験的に感じられる色彩、模様または書体等を推論することができる。また、人工知能部２１３は、文字の色、模様または書体を指定する情報、背景の色または模様を指定する情報を生成し、制御情報ＣＩに用いることができる。 [Natural language processing for input information II]
Specifically, the artificial intelligence unit 213 can process the input information II in natural language and extract one feature from the entire input information II. For example, the artificial intelligence unit 213 can infer and characterize the emotions and the like contained in the input information II. In addition, it is possible to infer colors, patterns, typefaces, etc. that are empirically felt to be suitable for the feature. Further, the artificial intelligence unit 213 can generate information for designating a character color, a pattern or a typeface, and information for designating a background color or a pattern, and can use it for the control information CI.

具体的には、人工知能部２１３は入力情報ＩＩを自然言語処理して、入力情報ＩＩに含まれる一部の言葉を抽出することができる。例えば、人工知能部２１３は文法的な誤り、事実誤認または感情を含む表現等を抽出することができる。また、人工知能部２１３は、抽出した一部を他の一部とは異なる色彩、模様または書体等で表示する制御情報ＣＩを生成し、制御情報ＣＩに用いることができる。 Specifically, the artificial intelligence unit 213 can process the input information II in natural language to extract some words included in the input information II. For example, the artificial intelligence unit 213 can extract grammatical errors, factual misunderstandings, expressions including emotions, and the like. Further, the artificial intelligence unit 213 can generate a control information CI that displays the extracted part in a color, pattern, typeface, or the like different from the other part, and can use it for the control information CI.

［入力情報ＩＩに対する画像処理］
具体的には、人工知能部２１３は入力情報ＩＩを画像処理して、入力情報ＩＩから１つの特徴を抽出することができる。例えば、人工知能部２１３は、入力情報ＩＩが撮影された年代、屋内または屋外、昼または夜等を推論し特徴にすることができる。また、当該特徴に好適であると経験的に感じられる色調を推論し、当該色調を表示に用いるための制御情報ＣＩを生成することができる。具体的には、濃淡の表現に用いる色（例えば、フルカラー、白黒または茶褐色等）を指定する情報を制御情報ＣＩに用いることができる。 [Image processing for input information II]
Specifically, the artificial intelligence unit 213 can perform image processing on the input information II to extract one feature from the input information II. For example, the artificial intelligence unit 213 can infer and characterize the date when the input information II was taken, indoors or outdoors, day or night, and the like. In addition, it is possible to infer a color tone that is empirically felt to be suitable for the feature and generate control information CI for using the color tone for display. Specifically, information for designating a color (for example, full color, black and white, brownish brown, etc.) used for expressing shading can be used for the control information CI.

具体的には、人工知能部２１３は入力情報ＩＩを画像処理して、入力情報ＩＩに含まれる一部の画像を抽出することができる。例えば、抽出した画像の一部と他の一部の間に境界を表示する制御情報ＣＩを生成することができる。具体的には、抽出した画像の一部を囲む矩形を表示する制御情報ＣＩを生成することができる。 Specifically, the artificial intelligence unit 213 can perform image processing on the input information II to extract a part of the images included in the input information II. For example, control information CI that displays a boundary between a part of the extracted image and another part can be generated. Specifically, it is possible to generate control information CI that displays a rectangle that surrounds a part of the extracted image.

［検知情報ＤＳを用いる推論］
具体的には、人工知能部２１３は検知情報ＤＳを用いて、推論を生成することができる。または、推論に基づいて、情報処理装置２００の使用者が快適であると感じられるように制御情報ＣＩを生成することができる。 [Inference using detection information DS]
Specifically, the artificial intelligence unit 213 can generate an inference by using the detection information DS. Alternatively, based on inference, the control information CI can be generated so that the user of the information processing apparatus 200 feels comfortable.

具体的には、環境の照度等に基づいて、人工知能部２１３は、表示の明るさが快適であると感じられるように、表示の明るさを調整する制御情報ＣＩを生成することができる。または、人工知能部２１３は環境の騒音等に基づいて大きさが快適であると感じられるように、音量を調整する制御情報ＣＩを生成することができる。 Specifically, the artificial intelligence unit 213 can generate control information CI that adjusts the brightness of the display so that the brightness of the display is felt to be comfortable, based on the illuminance of the environment and the like. Alternatively, the artificial intelligence unit 213 can generate control information CI for adjusting the volume so that the size is felt to be comfortable based on the noise of the environment or the like.

なお、表示部２３０が備える制御部２３８に供給するクロック信号またはタイミング信号などを制御情報ＣＩに用いることができる。または、入力部２４０が備える制御部２４８に供給するクロック信号またはタイミング信号などを制御情報ＣＩに用いることができる。 The clock signal or timing signal supplied to the control unit 238 included in the display unit 230 can be used for the control information CI. Alternatively, a clock signal, a timing signal, or the like supplied to the control unit 248 included in the input unit 240 can be used for the control information CI.

＜情報処理装置の構成例２＞
本発明の一態様の情報処理装置の別の構成について、図１５Ａおよび図１５Ｂを参照しながら説明する。 <Configuration example 2 of information processing device>
Another configuration of the information processing apparatus according to one aspect of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 15A and 15B.

《プログラム》
本発明の一態様のプログラムは、下記のステップを有する（図１５Ａ参照）。 "program"
The program of one aspect of the invention has the following steps (see FIG. 15A).

［第１のステップ］
第１のステップにおいて、設定を初期化する（図１５Ａ（Ｓ１）参照）。 [First step]
In the first step, the settings are initialized (see FIG. 15A (S1)).

例えば、起動時に表示する所定の画像情報と、当該画像情報を表示する所定のモードと、当該画像情報を表示する所定の表示方法を特定する情報と、を記憶部２１２から取得する。具体的には、一の静止画像情報または他の動画像情報を所定の画像情報に用いることができる。また、第１のモードまたは第２のモードを所定のモードに用いることができる。 For example, predetermined image information to be displayed at startup, a predetermined mode for displaying the image information, and information for specifying a predetermined display method for displaying the image information are acquired from the storage unit 212. Specifically, one still image information or another moving image information can be used for predetermined image information. Moreover, the first mode or the second mode can be used for a predetermined mode.

［第２のステップ］
第２のステップにおいて、割り込み処理を許可する（図１５Ａ（Ｓ２）参照）。なお、割り込み処理が許可された演算装置は、主の処理と並行して割り込み処理を行うことができる。割り込み処理から主の処理に復帰した演算装置は、割り込み処理をして得た結果を主の処理に反映することができる。 [Second step]
In the second step, interrupt processing is enabled (see FIG. 15A (S2)). The arithmetic unit for which interrupt processing is permitted can perform interrupt processing in parallel with the main processing. The arithmetic unit that has returned from the interrupt processing to the main processing can reflect the result obtained by the interrupt processing in the main processing.

なお、カウンタの値が初期値であるとき、演算装置に割り込み処理をさせ、割り込み処理から復帰する際に、カウンタを初期値以外の値としてもよい。これにより、プログラムを起動した後に常に割り込み処理をさせることができる。 When the value of the counter is the initial value, the arithmetic unit may perform interrupt processing, and when returning from the interrupt processing, the counter may be set to a value other than the initial value. As a result, interrupt processing can always be performed after the program is started.

［第３のステップ］
第３のステップにおいて、第１のステップまたは割り込み処理において選択された、所定のモードまたは所定の表示方法を用いて画像情報を表示する（図１５Ａ（Ｓ３）参照）。なお、所定のモードは情報を表示するモードを特定し、所定の表示方法は画像情報を表示する方法を特定する。また、例えば、画像情報ＶＩを表示する情報に用いることができる。 [Third step]
In the third step, the image information is displayed using the predetermined mode or the predetermined display method selected in the first step or the interrupt processing (see FIG. 15A (S3)). The predetermined mode specifies a mode for displaying information, and the predetermined display method specifies a method for displaying image information. Further, for example, it can be used for information for displaying image information VI.

例えば、画像情報ＶＩを表示する一の方法を、第１のモードに関連付けることができる。または、画像情報ＶＩを表示する他の方法を第２のモードに関連付けることができる。これにより、選択されたモードに基づいて表示方法を選択することができる。 For example, one method of displaying image information VI can be associated with a first mode. Alternatively, another method of displaying the image information VI can be associated with the second mode. This makes it possible to select a display method based on the selected mode.

《第１のモード》
具体的には、３０Ｈｚ以上、好ましくは６０Ｈｚ以上の頻度で一の走査線に選択信号を供給し、選択信号に基づいて表示をする方法を、第１のモードに関連付けることができる。 《First mode》
Specifically, a method of supplying a selection signal to one scanning line at a frequency of 30 Hz or higher, preferably 60 Hz or higher, and displaying based on the selection signal can be associated with the first mode.

例えば、３０Ｈｚ以上、好ましくは６０Ｈｚ以上の頻度で選択信号を供給すると、動画像の動きを滑らかに表示することができる。 For example, if the selection signal is supplied at a frequency of 30 Hz or higher, preferably 60 Hz or higher, the movement of the moving image can be displayed smoothly.

例えば、３０Ｈｚ以上、好ましくは６０Ｈｚ以上の頻度で画像を更新すると、使用者の操作に滑らかに追従するように変化する画像を、使用者が操作中の情報処理装置２００に表示することができる。 For example, when the image is updated at a frequency of 30 Hz or higher, preferably 60 Hz or higher, an image that changes so as to smoothly follow the user's operation can be displayed on the information processing device 200 being operated by the user.

《第２のモード》
具体的には、３０Ｈｚ未満、好ましくは１Ｈｚ未満、より好ましくは１分に１回未満の頻度で一の走査線に選択信号を供給し、選択信号に基づいて表示をする方法を、第２のモードに関連付けることができる。 《Second mode》
Specifically, a second method is to supply a selection signal to one scanning line at a frequency of less than 30 Hz, preferably less than 1 Hz, more preferably less than once a minute, and display based on the selection signal. Can be associated with a mode.

３０Ｈｚ未満、好ましくは１Ｈｚ未満、より好ましくは１分に１回未満の頻度で選択信号を供給すると、フリッカーまたはちらつきが抑制された表示をすることができる。また、消費電力を低減することができる。 When the selection signal is supplied at a frequency of less than 30 Hz, preferably less than 1 Hz, and more preferably less than once a minute, a display in which flicker or flicker is suppressed can be obtained. In addition, power consumption can be reduced.

例えば、情報処理装置２００を時計に用いる場合、１秒に１回の頻度または１分に１回の頻度等で表示を更新することができる。 For example, when the information processing device 200 is used for a clock, the display can be updated at a frequency of once per second, once per minute, or the like.

ところで、例えば、発光素子を表示素子に用いる場合、発光素子をパルス状に発光させて、画像情報を表示することができる。具体的には、パルス状に有機ＥＬ素子を発光させて、その残光を表示に用いることができる。有機ＥＬ素子は優れた周波数特性を備えるため、発光素子を駆動する時間を短縮し、消費電力を低減することができる場合がある。または、発熱が抑制されるため、発光素子の劣化を軽減することができる場合がある。 By the way, for example, when a light emitting element is used as a display element, the light emitting element can emit light in a pulse shape to display image information. Specifically, the organic EL element can be made to emit light in a pulse shape, and the afterglow can be used for display. Since the organic EL element has excellent frequency characteristics, it may be possible to shorten the time for driving the light emitting element and reduce the power consumption. Alternatively, since heat generation is suppressed, deterioration of the light emitting element may be reduced.

［第４のステップ］
第４のステップにおいて、終了命令が供給された場合は第５のステップに進み、終了命令が供給されなかった場合は第３のステップに進むように選択する（図１５Ａ（Ｓ４）参照）。 [Fourth step]
In the fourth step, if the end command is supplied, the process proceeds to the fifth step, and if the end command is not supplied, the process proceeds to the third step (see FIG. 15A (S4)).

例えば、割り込み処理において供給された終了命令を判断に用いてもよい。 For example, the end instruction supplied in the interrupt processing may be used for the determination.

［第５のステップ］
第５のステップにおいて、終了する（図１５Ａ（Ｓ５）参照）。 [Fifth step]
The fifth step ends (see FIG. 15A (S5)).

《割り込み処理》
割り込み処理は以下の第６のステップ乃至第８のステップを備える（図１５Ｂ参照）。 << Interrupt processing >>
The interrupt processing includes the following sixth to eighth steps (see FIG. 15B).

［第６のステップ］
第６のステップにおいて、例えば、検知部２５０を用いて、情報処理装置２００が使用される環境の照度を検出する（図１５Ｂ（Ｓ６）参照）。なお、環境の照度に代えて環境光の色温度や色度を検出してもよい。 [Sixth step]
In the sixth step, for example, the detection unit 250 is used to detect the illuminance of the environment in which the information processing apparatus 200 is used (see FIG. 15B (S6)). The color temperature and chromaticity of the ambient light may be detected instead of the illuminance of the environment.

［第７のステップ］
第７のステップにおいて、検出した照度情報に基づいて表示方法を決定する（図１５Ｂ（Ｓ７）参照）。例えば、表示の明るさを暗すぎないように、または明るすぎないように決定する。 [7th step]
In the seventh step, the display method is determined based on the detected illuminance information (see FIG. 15B (S7)). For example, determine the brightness of the display so that it is not too dark or too bright.

なお、第６のステップにおいて環境光の色温度や環境光の色度を検出した場合は、表示の色味を調節してもよい。 When the color temperature of the ambient light or the chromaticity of the ambient light is detected in the sixth step, the tint of the display may be adjusted.

［第８のステップ］
第８のステップにおいて、割り込み処理を終了する（図１５Ｂ（Ｓ８）参照）。 [8th step]
In the eighth step, interrupt processing is terminated (see FIG. 15B (S8)).

＜情報処理装置の構成例３＞
本発明の一態様の情報処理装置の別の構成について、図１６を参照しながら説明する。 <Configuration example 3 of information processing device>
Another configuration of the information processing apparatus according to one aspect of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.

図１６Ａは、本発明の一態様のプログラムを説明するフローチャートである。図１６Ａは、図１５Ｂに示す割り込み処理とは異なる割り込み処理を説明するフローチャートである。 FIG. 16A is a flowchart illustrating a program of one aspect of the present invention. FIG. 16A is a flowchart illustrating interrupt processing different from the interrupt processing shown in FIG. 15B.

なお、情報処理装置の構成例３は、供給された所定のイベントに基づいて、モードを変更するステップを割り込み処理に有する点が、図１５Ｂを参照しながら説明する割り込み処理とは異なる。ここでは、異なる部分について詳細に説明し、同様の構成を用いることができる部分について上記の説明を援用する。 Note that the configuration example 3 of the information processing device is different from the interrupt processing described with reference to FIG. 15B in that the interrupt processing includes a step of changing the mode based on the supplied predetermined event. Here, the different parts will be described in detail, and the above description will be incorporated for parts where the same configuration can be used.

《割り込み処理》
割り込み処理は以下の第６のステップ乃至第８のステップを備える（図１６Ａ参照）。 << Interrupt processing >>
The interrupt processing includes the following sixth to eighth steps (see FIG. 16A).

［第６のステップ］
第６のステップにおいて、所定のイベントが供給された場合は、第７のステップに進み、所定のイベントが供給されなかった場合は、第８のステップに進む（図１６Ａ（Ｕ６）参照）。例えば、所定の期間に所定のイベントが供給されたか否かを条件に用いることができる。具体的には、５秒以下、１秒以下または０．５秒以下好ましくは０．１秒以下であって０秒より長い期間を所定の期間とすることができる。 [Sixth step]
In the sixth step, if the predetermined event is supplied, the process proceeds to the seventh step, and if the predetermined event is not supplied, the process proceeds to the eighth step (see FIG. 16A (U6)). For example, it can be used as a condition whether or not a predetermined event is supplied in a predetermined period. Specifically, a period of 5 seconds or less, 1 second or less, 0.5 seconds or less, preferably 0.1 seconds or less, and longer than 0 seconds can be set as a predetermined period.

［第７のステップ］
第７のステップにおいて、モードを変更する（図１６Ａ（Ｕ７）参照）。具体的には、第１のモードを選択していた場合は、第２のモードを選択し、第２のモードを選択していた場合は、第１のモードを選択する。 [7th step]
In the seventh step, the mode is changed (see FIG. 16A (U7)). Specifically, when the first mode is selected, the second mode is selected, and when the second mode is selected, the first mode is selected.

例えば、表示部２３０の一部の領域について、表示モードを変更することができる。具体的には、駆動回路ＧＤＡ、駆動回路ＧＤＢおよび駆動回路ＧＤＣを備える表示部２３０の一の駆動回路が選択信号を供給する領域について、表示モードを変更することができる（図１６Ｂ参照）。 For example, the display mode can be changed for a part of the display unit 230. Specifically, the display mode can be changed for a region in which one drive circuit of the display unit 230 including the drive circuit GDA, the drive circuit GDB, and the drive circuit GDC supplies a selection signal (see FIG. 16B).

例えば、駆動回路ＧＤＢが選択信号を供給する領域と重なる領域にある入力部２４０に、所定のイベントが供給された場合に、駆動回路ＧＤＢが選択信号を供給する領域の表示モードを変更することができる（図１６Ｂおよび図１６Ｃ参照）。具体的には、指等を用いてタッチパネルに供給する「タップ」イベントに応じて、駆動回路ＧＤＢが供給する選択信号の頻度を変更することができる。 For example, when a predetermined event is supplied to the input unit 240 in the area where the drive circuit GDB supplies the selection signal, the display mode of the area in which the drive circuit GDB supplies the selection signal can be changed. Yes (see FIGS. 16B and 16C). Specifically, the frequency of the selection signal supplied by the drive circuit GDB can be changed according to the "tap" event supplied to the touch panel using a finger or the like.

なお、信号ＧＣＬＫは駆動回路ＧＤＢの動作を制御するクロック信号であり、信号ＰＷＣ１および信号ＰＷＣ２は駆動回路ＧＤＢの動作を制御するパルス幅制御信号である。駆動回路ＧＤＢは、信号ＧＣＬＫ、信号ＰＷＣ１および信号ＰＷＣ２等に基づいて、選択信号を導電膜Ｇ２（ｍ＋１）乃至導電膜Ｇ２（２ｍ）に供給する。 The signal GCLK is a clock signal that controls the operation of the drive circuit GDB, and the signals PWC1 and the signal PWC2 are pulse width control signals that control the operation of the drive circuit GDB. The drive circuit GDB supplies the selection signal to the conductive film G2 (m + 1) to the conductive film G2 (2 m) based on the signal GCLK, the signal PWC1, the signal PWC2, and the like.

これにより、例えば、駆動回路ＧＤＡおよび駆動回路ＧＤＣが選択信号を供給することなく、駆動回路ＧＤＢが選択信号を供給することができる。または、駆動回路ＧＤＡおよび駆動回路ＧＤＣが選択信号を供給する領域の表示を変えることなく、駆動回路ＧＤＢが選択信号を供給する領域の表示を更新することができる。または、駆動回路が消費する電力を抑制することができる。 Thereby, for example, the drive circuit GDB can supply the selection signal without the drive circuit GDA and the drive circuit GDC supplying the selection signal. Alternatively, the display of the area to which the drive circuit GDB supplies the selection signal can be updated without changing the display of the area to which the drive circuit GDA and the drive circuit GDC supply the selection signal. Alternatively, the power consumed by the drive circuit can be suppressed.

［第８のステップ］
第８のステップにおいて、割り込み処理を終了する（図１６Ａ（Ｕ８）参照）。なお、主の処理を実行している期間に割り込み処理を繰り返し実行してもよい。 [8th step]
In the eighth step, interrupt processing is terminated (see FIG. 16A (U8)). Note that the interrupt processing may be repeatedly executed during the period during which the main processing is being executed.

《所定のイベント》
例えば、マウス等のポインティング装置を用いて供給する、「クリック」や「ドラッグ」等のイベント、指等をポインタに用いてタッチパネルに供給する、「タップ」、「ドラッグ」または「スワイプ」等のイベントを用いることができる。 《Predetermined event》
For example, an event such as "click" or "drag" that is supplied using a pointing device such as a mouse, or an event such as "tap", "drag" or "swipe" that is supplied to the touch panel using a finger or the like as a pointer. Can be used.

また、例えば、ポインタが指し示すスライドバーの位置、スワイプの速度、ドラッグの速度等を用いて、所定のイベントに関連付けられた命令の引数を与えることができる。 Further, for example, the position of the slide bar pointed to by the pointer, the speed of swiping, the speed of dragging, and the like can be used to give arguments of instructions associated with a predetermined event.

例えば、検知部２５０が検知した情報をあらかじめ設定された閾値と比較して、比較結果をイベントに用いることができる。 For example, the information detected by the detection unit 250 can be compared with a preset threshold value, and the comparison result can be used for the event.

具体的には、筐体に押し込むことができるように配設されたボタン等に接する感圧検知器等を検知部２５０に用いることができる。 Specifically, a pressure-sensitive detector or the like in contact with a button or the like arranged so as to be pushed into the housing can be used for the detection unit 250.

《所定のイベントに関連付ける命令》
例えば、終了命令を、所定のイベントに関連付けることができる。 << Instructions associated with a given event >>
For example, an end instruction can be associated with a given event.

例えば、表示されている一の画像情報から他の画像情報に表示を切り替える「ページめくり命令」を、所定のイベントに関連付けることができる。なお、「ページめくり命令」を実行する際に用いるページをめくる速度などを決定する引数を、所定のイベントを用いて与えることができる。 For example, a "page turning command" for switching the display from one displayed image information to another image information can be associated with a predetermined event. It should be noted that an argument for determining the page turning speed or the like used when executing the "page turning command" can be given by using a predetermined event.

例えば、一の画像情報の表示されている一部分の表示位置を移動して、一部分に連続する他の部分を表示する「スクロール命令」などを、所定のイベントに関連付けることができる。なお、「スクロール命令」を実行する際に用いる表示を移動する速度などを決定する引数を、所定のイベントを用いて与えることができる。 For example, a "scroll command" that moves the display position of a part of one image information displayed and displays another part continuous with the part can be associated with a predetermined event. It should be noted that an argument for determining the speed of moving the display used when executing the "scroll instruction" can be given by using a predetermined event.

例えば、表示方法を設定する命令または画像情報を生成する命令などを、所定のイベントに関連付けることができる。なお、生成する画像の明るさを決定する引数を所定のイベントに関連付けることができる。また、生成する画像の明るさを決定する引数を、検知部２５０が検知する環境の明るさに基づいて決定してもよい。 For example, a command for setting a display method or a command for generating image information can be associated with a predetermined event. It should be noted that an argument that determines the brightness of the generated image can be associated with a predetermined event. Further, the argument for determining the brightness of the generated image may be determined based on the brightness of the environment detected by the detection unit 250.

例えば、プッシュ型のサービスを用いて配信される情報を、通信部２９０を用いて取得する命令などを、所定のイベントに関連付けることができる。 For example, an instruction for acquiring information distributed using a push-type service using the communication unit 290 can be associated with a predetermined event.

なお、情報を取得する資格の有無を、検知部２５０が検知する位置情報を用いて判断してもよい。具体的には、所定の教室、学校、会議室、企業、建物等の内部または領域にいる場合に、情報を取得する資格を有すると判断してもよい。これにより、例えば、学校または大学等の教室で配信される教材を受信して、情報処理装置２００を教科書等に用いることができる（図１４Ｃ参照）。または、企業等の会議室で配信される資料を受信して、会議資料に用いることができる。 It should be noted that the presence or absence of the qualification to acquire the information may be determined by using the position information detected by the detection unit 250. Specifically, if you are inside or in a predetermined classroom, school, conference room, company, building, etc., you may judge that you are qualified to acquire information. As a result, for example, the information processing apparatus 200 can be used as a textbook or the like by receiving teaching materials distributed in a classroom such as a school or a university (see FIG. 14C). Alternatively, it is possible to receive materials distributed in a conference room of a company or the like and use them as conference materials.

＜情報処理装置の構成例４＞
本発明の一態様の情報処理装置の別の構成について、図１７を参照しながら説明する。 <Configuration example 4 of information processing device>
Another configuration of the information processing apparatus according to one aspect of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG.

図１７Ａは、本発明の一態様のプログラムを説明するフローチャートである。図１７Ａは、図１５Ｂに示す割り込み処理とは異なる割り込み処理を説明するフローチャートである。図１７Ｂは、図１７Ａに示すプログラムの動作を説明する模式図であり、図１７Ｃは、撮影した指紋の模式図である。 FIG. 17A is a flowchart illustrating a program of one aspect of the present invention. FIG. 17A is a flowchart illustrating interrupt processing different from the interrupt processing shown in FIG. 15B. FIG. 17B is a schematic diagram illustrating the operation of the program shown in FIG. 17A, and FIG. 17C is a schematic diagram of a photographed fingerprint.

なお、図１７Ａを参照しながら説明する情報処理装置の構成例４は、図１５Ｂを参照しながら説明する構成例とは、割り込み処理が異なる。具体的には、供給された所定のイベントに基づいて、領域を特定するステップ、画像を生成するステップ、画像を表示するステップ、撮像するステップを、割り込み処理が有する。ここでは、異なる部分について詳細に説明し、同様の構成を用いることができる部分について上記の説明を援用する。 Note that the configuration example 4 of the information processing apparatus described with reference to FIG. 17A is different from the configuration example described with reference to FIG. 15B in interrupt processing. Specifically, the interrupt process includes a step of identifying a region, a step of generating an image, a step of displaying an image, and a step of capturing an image based on a predetermined event supplied. Here, the different parts will be described in detail, and the above description will be incorporated for parts where the same configuration can be used.

《割り込み処理》
割り込み処理は、第６のステップ乃至第１１のステップを備える（図１７Ａ参照）。 << Interrupt processing >>
The interrupt processing includes a sixth step to an eleventh step (see FIG. 17A).

［第６のステップ］
第６のステップにおいて、所定のイベントが供給された場合は、第７のステップに進み、所定のイベントが供給されなかった場合は、第１１のステップに進む（図１７Ａ（Ｖ６）参照）。 [Sixth step]
In the sixth step, if the predetermined event is supplied, the process proceeds to the seventh step, and if the predetermined event is not supplied, the process proceeds to the eleventh step (see FIG. 17A (V6)).

例えば、検知部２５０を用いて、所定のイベントを供給することができる。具体的には、情報処理装置を持ち上げる等の運動を所定のイベントに用いることができる。例えば、角加速度センサまたは加速度センサを用いて、情報処理装置の運動を検知することができる。または、タッチセンサを用いて、指などの被写体の接触または近接を検知することができる。 For example, the detection unit 250 can be used to supply a predetermined event. Specifically, an exercise such as lifting an information processing device can be used for a predetermined event. For example, an angular acceleration sensor or an acceleration sensor can be used to detect the motion of the information processing device. Alternatively, a touch sensor can be used to detect contact or proximity of a subject such as a finger.

［第７のステップ］
第７のステップにおいて、第１の領域ＳＨを特定する（図１７Ａ（Ｖ７）参照）。 [7th step]
In the seventh step, the first region SH is specified (see FIG. 17A (V7)).

例えば、本発明の一態様の入出力装置２２０に、指などの被写体が接触または近接した領域を、第１の領域ＳＨにすることができる。または、使用者等があらかじめ設定した領域を第１の領域ＳＨに用いることができる。 For example, the region in which a subject such as a finger is in contact with or is close to the input / output device 220 of one aspect of the present invention can be set as the first region SH. Alternatively, a region preset by the user or the like can be used for the first region SH.

具体的には、本発明の一態様の情報処理装置に用いることができる機能パネルに接触または近接する指ＴＨＭなどを、画素７０３（ｉ，ｊ）を用いて撮影し、画像処理をして、第１の領域ＳＨを特定することができる（図１７Ｂ参照）。 Specifically, a finger THM or the like that comes into contact with or is close to a functional panel that can be used in the information processing apparatus of one aspect of the present invention is photographed using pixels 703 (i, j), image-processed, and then image-processed. The first region SH can be identified (see FIG. 17B).

例えば、指ＴＨＭなどの被写体の接触または近接により、外光が遮られて生じた陰を、本発明の一態様の情報処理装置に用いることができる機能パネルの画素７０３（ｉ，ｊ）を用いて撮影し、画像処理をして、第１の領域ＳＨを特定することができる。 For example, the pixels 703 (i, j) of the functional panel that can be used in the information processing apparatus of one aspect of the present invention are used for the shadow generated by blocking the external light due to the contact or proximity of a subject such as a finger THM. The first region SH can be specified by taking a picture of the image and performing image processing.

または、本発明の一態様の情報処理装置に用いることができる機能パネルの画素７０３（ｉ，ｊ）を用いて、接触または近接する指ＴＨＭなどの被写体に光を照射し、当該被写体が反射する光を、画素７０３（ｉ，ｊ）を用いて撮影し、画像処理をして、第１の領域ＳＨを特定することができる。 Alternatively, using the pixels 703 (i, j) of the functional panel that can be used in the information processing apparatus of one aspect of the present invention, light is applied to a subject such as a finger THM that is in contact with or close to the subject, and the subject is reflected. Light can be photographed using pixels 703 (i, j) and image processed to identify the first region SH.

または、タッチセンサを用いて、指ＴＨＭなどの被写体が触れた領域を第１の領域ＳＨに特定することができる。 Alternatively, the touch sensor can be used to identify the area touched by the subject such as the finger THM as the first area SH.

［第８のステップ］
第８のステップにおいて、第１の領域ＳＨに基づいて、第２の領域および第３の領域を含む画像ＦＩを生成する（図１７Ａ（Ｖ８）および図１７Ｂ参照）。例えば、第１の領域ＳＨの形状を第２の領域の形状に用い、第１の領域ＳＨを除く領域を、第３の領域に用いる。 [8th step]
In the eighth step, an image FI containing the second region and the third region is generated based on the first region SH (see FIGS. 17A (V8) and 17B). For example, the shape of the first region SH is used for the shape of the second region, and the region excluding the first region SH is used for the third region.

［第９のステップ］
第９のステップにおいて、第２の領域が第１の領域ＳＨに重なるように、画像ＦＩを表示する（図１７Ａ（Ｖ９）および図１７Ｂ参照）。 [9th step]
In the ninth step, the image FI is displayed so that the second region overlaps the first region SH (see FIGS. 17A (V9) and 17B).

例えば、画像ＦＩから画像信号を生成し、領域２３１に供給し、画素７０３（ｉ，ｊ）から光を発する。または、第１の選択信号をＧ１（ｉ）に供給している期間に、生成した画像信号を導電膜Ｓ１ｇ（ｊ）に供給し、画素７０３（ｉ，ｊ）に画像信号を書き込むことができる。または、生成した画像信号を導電膜Ｓ１ｇ（ｊ）および導電膜Ｓ２ｇ（ｊ）に供給し、画素７０３（ｉ，ｊ）に強調された画像信号を書き込むことができる。または、強調された画像信号を用いて、輝度を高めて表示することができる。 For example, an image signal is generated from the image FI, supplied to the area 231 and emits light from the pixels 703 (i, j). Alternatively, while the first selection signal is being supplied to the G1 (i), the generated image signal can be supplied to the conductive film S1g (j) and the image signal can be written to the pixels 703 (i, j). .. Alternatively, the generated image signal can be supplied to the conductive film S1g (j) and the conductive film S2g (j), and the emphasized image signal can be written to the pixels 703 (i, j). Alternatively, the enhanced image signal can be used to increase the brightness for display.

これにより、指などの被写体が触れた領域２３１の領域または近接した領域ＳＨに重ねて、画像ＦＩを表示することができる。または、指などの被写体が触れた領域に、画素７０３（ｉ，ｊ）を用いて光を照射することができる。または、接触または近接する指ＴＨＭなどの被写体に照明を当てることができる。または、使用者等があらかじめ設定した領域に、指などの被写体を接触または近接するように、促すことができる。 As a result, the image FI can be displayed by superimposing the area 231 on the area 231 touched by the subject such as a finger or the area SH in the vicinity of the area 231. Alternatively, the area touched by the subject such as a finger can be irradiated with light using the pixels 703 (i, j). Alternatively, it is possible to illuminate a subject such as a finger THM that is in contact with or in close proximity. Alternatively, it is possible to urge the user or the like to touch or approach a subject such as a finger in a preset area.

［第１０のステップ］
第１０のステップにおいて、画像ＦＩを表示しながら、第１の領域ＳＨに接触または近接する被写体を撮像する（図１７Ａ（Ｖ１０）および図１７Ｂ参照）。 [10th step]
In the tenth step, while displaying the image FI, an image of a subject in contact with or close to the first region SH is taken (see FIGS. 17A (V10) and 17B).

例えば、領域２３１に近接する指ＴＨＭなどに光を照射しながら、当該指などを撮影する。具体的には、領域２３１に接する指ＴＨＭの指紋ＦＰを撮影することができる（図１７Ｃ参照）。 For example, while irradiating a finger THM or the like close to the area 231 with light, the finger or the like is photographed. Specifically, the fingerprint FP of the finger THM in contact with the region 231 can be photographed (see FIG. 17C).

例えば、画素７０３（ｉ，ｊ）に画像を表示した状態で、第１の選択信号の供給を停止することができる。例えば、画素回路５３０Ｇ（ｉ，ｊ）に対する選択信号の供給を停止した状態で、画素７０３（ｉ，ｊ）を用いて撮像することができる。 For example, the supply of the first selection signal can be stopped while the image is displayed on the pixels 703 (i, j). For example, the pixel 703 (i, j) can be used for imaging with the supply of the selection signal to the pixel circuit 530G (i, j) stopped.

これにより、接触または近接する指などの被写体を、照明しながら撮像することができる。または、第１の選択信号が供給されていない期間に撮像することができる。または、撮像時のノイズを抑制することができる。または、指紋の鮮明な画像を取得することができる。または、使用者の認証に用いることができる画像を取得することができる。または、領域２３１のどこであっても、領域２３１に触れる指の指紋を、鮮明に撮影することができる。その結果、利便性、有用性または信頼性に優れた新規な情報処理装置を提供することができる。 This makes it possible to take an image of a subject such as a finger in contact with or in close proximity while illuminating the subject. Alternatively, the image can be taken during the period when the first selection signal is not supplied. Alternatively, noise during imaging can be suppressed. Alternatively, a clear image of the fingerprint can be obtained. Alternatively, an image that can be used for user authentication can be acquired. Alternatively, the fingerprint of the finger touching the area 231 can be clearly photographed anywhere in the area 231. As a result, it is possible to provide a new information processing apparatus having excellent convenience, usefulness, or reliability.

［第１１のステップ］
第１１のステップにおいて、割り込み処理を終了する（図１７Ａ（Ｖ１１）参照）。 [11th step]
In the eleventh step, interrupt processing is terminated (see FIG. 17A (V11)).

なお、本実施の形態は、本明細書で示す他の実施の形態と適宜組み合わせることができる。 It should be noted that this embodiment can be appropriately combined with other embodiments shown in the present specification.

（実施の形態７）
本実施の形態では、本発明の一態様の情報処理装置の構成について、図１８乃至図２１を参照しながら説明する。 (Embodiment 7)
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the information processing apparatus according to one aspect of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 21.

図１８乃至図２１は、本発明の一態様の情報処理装置の構成を説明する図である。図１８Ａは情報処理装置のブロック図であり、図１８Ｂ乃至図１８Ｅは情報処理装置の構成を説明する斜視図である。また、図１９Ａ乃至図１９Ｅは情報処理装置の構成を説明する斜視図である。また、図２０Ａおよび図２０Ｂは情報処理装置の構成を説明する斜視図である。また、図２１は情報処理装置の構成を説明する斜視図である。 18 to 21 are views for explaining the configuration of the information processing apparatus according to one aspect of the present invention. 18A is a block diagram of the information processing device, and FIGS. 18B to 18E are perspective views illustrating the configuration of the information processing device. 19A to 19E are perspective views illustrating the configuration of the information processing apparatus. 20A and 20B are perspective views illustrating the configuration of the information processing apparatus. Further, FIG. 21 is a perspective view illustrating the configuration of the information processing apparatus.

＜情報処理装置＞
本実施の形態で説明する情報処理装置５２００Ｂは、演算装置５２１０と、入出力装置５２２０と、を有する（図１８Ａ参照）。 <Information processing device>
The information processing device 5200B described in the present embodiment includes an arithmetic unit 5210 and an input / output device 5220 (see FIG. 18A).

演算装置５２１０は、操作情報を供給される機能を備え、操作情報に基づいて画像情報を供給する機能を備える。 The arithmetic unit 5210 has a function of supplying operation information, and has a function of supplying image information based on the operation information.

入出力装置５２２０は、表示部５２３０、入力部５２４０、検知部５２５０、通信部５２９０、操作情報を供給する機能および画像情報を供給される機能を備える。また、入出力装置５２２０は、検知情報を供給する機能、通信情報を供給する機能および通信情報を供給される機能を備える。 The input / output device 5220 includes a display unit 5230, an input unit 5240, a detection unit 5250, a communication unit 5290, a function of supplying operation information, and a function of supplying image information. Further, the input / output device 5220 includes a function of supplying detection information, a function of supplying communication information, and a function of supplying communication information.

入力部５２４０は操作情報を供給する機能を備える。例えば、入力部５２４０は、情報処理装置５２００Ｂの使用者の操作に基づいて操作情報を供給する。 The input unit 5240 has a function of supplying operation information. For example, the input unit 5240 supplies operation information based on the operation of the user of the information processing device 5200B.

具体的には、キーボード、ハードウェアボタン、ポインティングデバイス、タッチセンサ、照度センサ、撮像装置、音声入力装置、視線入力装置、姿勢検出装置などを、入力部５２４０に用いることができる。 Specifically, a keyboard, a hardware button, a pointing device, a touch sensor, an illuminance sensor, an image pickup device, a voice input device, a line-of-sight input device, an attitude detection device, and the like can be used for the input unit 5240.

表示部５２３０は機能パネルおよび画像情報を表示する機能を備える。例えば、実施の形態２または実施の形態３において説明する機能パネルを表示部５２３０に用いることができる。 The display unit 5230 includes a function panel and a function of displaying image information. For example, the functional panel described in the second embodiment or the third embodiment can be used for the display unit 5230.

検知部５２５０は検知情報を供給する機能を備える。例えば、情報処理装置が使用されている周辺の環境を検知して、検知情報として供給する機能を備える。 The detection unit 5250 has a function of supplying detection information. For example, it has a function of detecting the surrounding environment in which the information processing device is used and supplying it as detection information.

具体的には、照度センサ、撮像装置、姿勢検出装置、圧力センサ、人感センサなどを検知部５２５０に用いることができる。 Specifically, an illuminance sensor, an image pickup device, a posture detection device, a pressure sensor, a motion sensor, and the like can be used for the detection unit 5250.

通信部５２９０は通信情報を供給される機能および供給する機能を備える。例えば、無線通信または有線通信により、他の電子機器または通信網と接続する機能を備える。具体的には、無線構内通信、電話通信、近距離無線通信などの機能を備える。 The communication unit 5290 has a function of supplying communication information and a function of supplying communication information. For example, it has a function of connecting to another electronic device or communication network by wireless communication or wired communication. Specifically, it has functions such as wireless premises communication, telephone communication, and short-range wireless communication.

《情報処理装置の構成例１》
例えば、円筒状の柱などに沿った外形を表示部５２３０に適用することができる（図１８Ｂ参照）。また、使用環境の照度に応じて、表示方法を変更する機能を備える。また、人の存在を検知して、表示内容を変更する機能を備える。これにより、例えば、建物の柱に設置することができる。または、広告または案内等を表示することができる。または、デジタル・サイネージ等に用いることができる。 << Configuration example 1 of information processing device >>
For example, an outer shape along a cylindrical pillar or the like can be applied to the display unit 5230 (see FIG. 18B). It also has a function to change the display method according to the illuminance of the usage environment. It also has a function to detect the presence of a person and change the displayed contents. Thereby, for example, it can be installed on a pillar of a building. Alternatively, advertisements, information, etc. can be displayed. Alternatively, it can be used for digital signage and the like.

《情報処理装置の構成例２》
例えば、使用者が使用するポインタの軌跡に基づいて画像情報を生成する機能を備える（図１８Ｃ参照）。具体的には、対角線の長さが２０インチ以上、好ましくは４０インチ以上、より好ましくは５５インチ以上の機能パネルを用いることができる。または、複数の機能パネルを並べて１つの表示領域に用いることができる。または、複数の機能パネルを並べてマルチスクリーンに用いることができる。これにより、例えば、電子黒板、電子掲示板、電子看板等に用いることができる。 << Configuration example 2 of information processing device >>
For example, it has a function of generating image information based on the locus of a pointer used by the user (see FIG. 18C). Specifically, a functional panel having a diagonal length of 20 inches or more, preferably 40 inches or more, and more preferably 55 inches or more can be used. Alternatively, a plurality of function panels can be arranged side by side and used in one display area. Alternatively, a plurality of function panels can be arranged side by side and used for multi-screen. Thereby, for example, it can be used for an electronic blackboard, an electronic bulletin board, an electronic signboard, and the like.

《情報処理装置の構成例３》
他の装置から情報を受信して、表示部５２３０に表示することができる（図１８Ｄ参照）。または、いくつかの選択肢を表示できる。または、使用者は選択肢からいくつかを選択し、当該情報の送信元に返信できる。または、例えば、使用環境の照度に応じて、表示方法を変更する機能を備える。これにより、例えば、スマートウオッチの消費電力を低減することができる。または、例えば、晴天の屋外等の外光の強い環境においても好適に使用できるように、画像をスマートウオッチに表示することができる。 << Configuration example 3 of information processing device >>
Information can be received from another device and displayed on the display unit 5230 (see FIG. 18D). Alternatively, you can view several options. Alternatively, the user can select some of the options and reply to the source of the information. Alternatively, for example, it has a function of changing the display method according to the illuminance of the usage environment. Thereby, for example, the power consumption of the smart watch can be reduced. Alternatively, the image can be displayed on the smart watch so that it can be suitably used even in an environment with strong external light such as outdoors in fine weather.

《情報処理装置の構成例４》
表示部５２３０は、例えば、筐体の側面に沿って緩やかに曲がる曲面を備える（図１８Ｅ参照）。または、表示部５２３０は機能パネルを備え、機能パネルは、例えば、前面、側面、上面および背面に表示する機能を備える。これにより、例えば、携帯電話の前面だけでなく、側面、上面および背面に情報を表示することができる。 << Configuration example 4 of information processing device >>
The display unit 5230 includes, for example, a curved surface that gently bends along the side surface of the housing (see FIG. 18E). Alternatively, the display unit 5230 includes a function panel, and the function panel has, for example, a function of displaying on the front surface, the side surface, the top surface, and the back surface. Thereby, for example, information can be displayed not only on the front surface of the mobile phone but also on the side surface, the top surface and the back surface.

《情報処理装置の構成例５》
例えば、インターネットから情報を受信して、表示部５２３０に表示することができる（図１９Ａ参照）。または、作成したメッセージを表示部５２３０で確認することができる。または、作成したメッセージを他の装置に送信できる。または、例えば、使用環境の照度に応じて、表示方法を変更する機能を備える。これにより、スマートフォンの消費電力を低減することができる。または、例えば、晴天の屋外等の外光の強い環境においても好適に使用できるように、画像をスマートフォンに表示することができる。 << Configuration example 5 of information processing device >>
For example, information can be received from the Internet and displayed on the display unit 5230 (see FIG. 19A). Alternatively, the created message can be confirmed on the display unit 5230. Alternatively, the created message can be sent to another device. Alternatively, for example, it has a function of changing the display method according to the illuminance of the usage environment. As a result, the power consumption of the smartphone can be reduced. Alternatively, for example, an image can be displayed on a smartphone so that it can be suitably used even in an environment with strong external light such as outdoors in fine weather.

《情報処理装置の構成例６》
リモートコントローラーを入力部５２４０に用いることができる（図１９Ｂ参照）。または、例えば、放送局またはインターネットから情報を受信して、表示部５２３０に表示することができる。または、検知部５２５０を用いて使用者を撮影できる。または、使用者の映像を送信できる。または、使用者の視聴履歴を取得して、クラウド・サービスに提供できる。または、クラウド・サービスから、レコメンド情報を取得して、表示部５２３０に表示できる。または、レコメンド情報に基づいて、番組または動画を表示できる。または、例えば、使用環境の照度に応じて、表示方法を変更する機能を備える。これにより、晴天の日に屋内に差し込む強い外光が当たっても好適に使用できるように、映像をテレビジョンシステムに表示することができる。 << Configuration example 6 of information processing device >>
A remote controller can be used for the input unit 5240 (see FIG. 19B). Alternatively, for example, information can be received from a broadcasting station or the Internet and displayed on the display unit 5230. Alternatively, the user can be photographed using the detection unit 5250. Alternatively, the user's video can be transmitted. Alternatively, the viewing history of the user can be acquired and provided to the cloud service. Alternatively, the recommendation information can be acquired from the cloud service and displayed on the display unit 5230. Alternatively, the program or video can be displayed based on the recommendation information. Alternatively, for example, it has a function of changing the display method according to the illuminance of the usage environment. As a result, the image can be displayed on the television system so that the image can be suitably used even when exposed to strong external light that is inserted indoors on a sunny day.

《情報処理装置の構成例７》
例えば、インターネットから教材を受信して、表示部５２３０に表示することができる（図１９Ｃ参照）。または、入力部５２４０を用いて、レポートを入力し、インターネットに送信することができる。または、クラウド・サービスから、レポートの添削結果または評価を取得して、表示部５２３０に表示できる。または、評価に基づいて、好適な教材を選択し、表示できる。 << Configuration example 7 of information processing device >>
For example, the teaching material can be received from the Internet and displayed on the display unit 5230 (see FIG. 19C). Alternatively, the input unit 5240 can be used to input a report and send it to the Internet. Alternatively, the correction result or evaluation of the report can be obtained from the cloud service and displayed on the display unit 5230. Alternatively, suitable teaching materials can be selected and displayed based on the evaluation.

例えば、他の情報処理装置から画像信号を受信して、表示部５２３０に表示することができる。または、スタンドなどに立てかけて、表示部５２３０をサブディスプレイに用いることができる。これにより、例えば、晴天の屋外等の外光の強い環境においても好適に使用できるように、画像をタブレットコンピュータに表示することができる。 For example, an image signal can be received from another information processing device and displayed on the display unit 5230. Alternatively, the display unit 5230 can be used as a sub-display by leaning against a stand or the like. As a result, the image can be displayed on the tablet computer so that it can be suitably used even in an environment with strong external light such as outdoors in fine weather.

《情報処理装置の構成例８》
情報処理装置は、例えば、複数の表示部５２３０を備える（図１９Ｄ参照）。例えば、検知部５２５０で撮影しながら表示部５２３０に表示することができる。または、撮影した映像を検知部に表示することができる。または、入力部５２４０を用いて、撮影した映像に装飾を施せる。または、撮影した映像にメッセージを添付できる。または、インターネットに送信できる。または、使用環境の照度に応じて、撮影条件を変更する機能を備える。これにより、例えば、晴天の屋外等の外光の強い環境においても好適に閲覧できるように、被写体をデジタルカメラに表示することができる。 << Configuration example 8 of information processing device >>
The information processing device includes, for example, a plurality of display units 5230 (see FIG. 19D). For example, it can be displayed on the display unit 5230 while being photographed by the detection unit 5250. Alternatively, the captured image can be displayed on the detection unit. Alternatively, the input unit 5240 can be used to decorate the captured image. Alternatively, you can attach a message to the captured video. Or you can send it to the internet. Alternatively, it has a function to change the shooting conditions according to the illuminance of the usage environment. Thereby, for example, the subject can be displayed on the digital camera so that the subject can be suitably viewed even in an environment with strong external light such as outdoors in fine weather.

《情報処理装置の構成例９》
例えば、他の情報処理装置をスレイブに用い、本実施の形態の情報処理装置をマスターに用いて、他の情報処理装置を制御することができる（図１９Ｅ参照）。または、例えば、画像情報の一部を表示部５２３０に表示し、画像情報の他の一部を他の情報処理装置の表示部に表示することができる。画像信号を供給することができる。または、通信部５２９０を用いて、他の情報処理装置の入力部から書き込む情報を取得できる。これにより、例えば、携帯可能なパーソナルコンピュータを用いて、広い表示領域を利用することができる。 << Configuration example 9 of information processing device >>
For example, another information processing device can be used for the slave, and the information processing device of the present embodiment can be used as the master to control the other information processing device (see FIG. 19E). Alternatively, for example, a part of the image information can be displayed on the display unit 5230, and another part of the image information can be displayed on the display unit of another information processing device. An image signal can be supplied. Alternatively, the communication unit 5290 can be used to acquire information to be written from the input unit of another information processing device. Thereby, for example, a wide display area can be used by using a portable personal computer.

《情報処理装置の構成例１０》
情報処理装置は、例えば、加速度または方位を検知する検知部５２５０を備える（図２０Ａ参照）。または、検知部５２５０は、使用者の位置または使用者が向いている方向に係る情報を供給することができる。または、情報処理装置は、使用者の位置または使用者が向いている方向に基づいて、右目用の画像情報および左目用の画像情報を生成することができる。または、表示部５２３０は、右目用の表示領域および左目用の表示領域を備える。これにより、例えば、没入感を得られる仮想現実空間の映像を、ゴーグル型の情報処理装置に表示することができる。 << Configuration Example 10 of Information Processing Device >>
The information processing device includes, for example, a detection unit 5250 that detects acceleration or direction (see FIG. 20A). Alternatively, the detection unit 5250 can supply information relating to the position of the user or the direction in which the user is facing. Alternatively, the information processing device can generate image information for the right eye and image information for the left eye based on the position of the user or the direction in which the user is facing. Alternatively, the display unit 5230 includes a display area for the right eye and a display area for the left eye. As a result, for example, an image of a virtual reality space that gives an immersive feeling can be displayed on a goggle-type information processing device.

《情報処理装置の構成例１１》
情報処理装置は、例えば、撮像装置、加速度または方位を検知する検知部５２５０を備える（図２０Ｂ参照）。または、検知部５２５０は、使用者の位置または使用者が向いている方向に係る情報を供給することができる。または、情報処理装置は、使用者の位置または使用者が向いている方向に基づいて、画像情報を生成することができる。これにより、例えば、現実の風景に情報を添付して表示することができる。または、拡張現実空間の映像を、めがね型の情報処理装置に表示することができる。 << Configuration Example 11 of Information Processing Device >>
The information processing device includes, for example, an image pickup device and a detection unit 5250 that detects acceleration or direction (see FIG. 20B). Alternatively, the detection unit 5250 can supply information relating to the position of the user or the direction in which the user is facing. Alternatively, the information processing device can generate image information based on the position of the user or the direction in which the user is facing. As a result, for example, information can be attached and displayed on a real landscape. Alternatively, the image of the augmented reality space can be displayed on a glasses-type information processing device.

《情報処理装置の構成例１２》
情報処理装置は、例えば、表示部５２３０および入力部５２４０を備える（図２１参照）。表示部５２３０および入力部５２４０は、例えば、折りたたむことができる。また、情報処理装置は、通信部５２９０を備える。通信部５２９０は、例えば、近距離無線通信をすることができる。また、情報処理装置は、検知部５２５０を備える。これにより、筐体の大きさに比べて大きな表示部５２３０に情報を表示することができる。筐体の大きさに比べて大きな入力部５２４０を用いて情報を入力することができる。または、例えば、他の情報処理装置と情報を交換することができる。具体的には、身に着けた指輪状の情報処理装置から個体識別信号を受信することができる。または、個体識別信号をセキュリティシステムに供給することができる。 << Configuration Example 12 of Information Processing Device >>
The information processing device includes, for example, a display unit 5230 and an input unit 5240 (see FIG. 21). The display unit 5230 and the input unit 5240 can be folded, for example. The information processing device also includes a communication unit 5290. The communication unit 5290 can perform short-range wireless communication, for example. The information processing device also includes a detection unit 5250. As a result, information can be displayed on the display unit 5230, which is larger than the size of the housing. Information can be input using the input unit 5240, which is larger than the size of the housing. Alternatively, for example, information can be exchanged with other information processing devices. Specifically, the individual identification signal can be received from the ring-shaped information processing device worn. Alternatively, the individual identification signal can be supplied to the security system.

なお、本実施の形態は、本明細書で示す他の実施の形態と適宜組み合わせることができる。 It should be noted that this embodiment can be appropriately combined with other embodiments shown in the present specification.

例えば、本明細書等において、ＸとＹとが接続されている、と明示的に記載されている場合は、ＸとＹとが電気的に接続されている場合と、ＸとＹとが機能的に接続されている場合と、ＸとＹとが直接接続されている場合とが、本明細書等に開示されているものとする。したがって、所定の接続関係、例えば、図または文章に示された接続関係に限定されず、図または文章に示された接続関係以外のものも、図または文章に開示されているものとする。 For example, in the present specification and the like, when it is explicitly stated that X and Y are connected, the case where X and Y are electrically connected and the case where X and Y function. It is assumed that the case where X and Y are directly connected and the case where X and Y are directly connected are disclosed in the present specification and the like. Therefore, it is not limited to the predetermined connection relationship, for example, the connection relationship shown in the figure or text, and other than the connection relationship shown in the figure or text, it is assumed that the connection relationship is disclosed in the figure or text.

ここで、Ｘ、Ｙは、対象物（例えば、装置、素子、回路、配線、電極、端子、導電膜、層、など）であるとする。 Here, X and Y are assumed to be objects (for example, devices, elements, circuits, wirings, electrodes, terminals, conductive films, layers, etc.).

ＸとＹとが直接的に接続されている場合の一例としては、ＸとＹとの電気的な接続を可能とする素子（例えば、スイッチ、トランジスタ、容量素子、インダクタ、抵抗素子、ダイオード、表示素子、発光素子、負荷など）が、ＸとＹとの間に接続されていない場合であり、ＸとＹとの電気的な接続を可能とする素子（例えば、スイッチ、トランジスタ、容量素子、インダクタ、抵抗素子、ダイオード、表示素子、発光素子、負荷など）を介さずに、ＸとＹとが、接続されている場合である。 As an example of the case where X and Y are directly connected, an element (for example, a switch, a transistor, a capacitive element, an inductor, a resistance element, a diode, a display) that enables an electrical connection between X and Y is used. Elements (eg, switches, transistors, capacitive elements, inductors) that allow an electrical connection between X and Y when the element, light emitting element, load, etc. are not connected between X and Y. , A resistance element, a diode, a display element, a light emitting element, a load, etc.), and X and Y are connected to each other.

ＸとＹとが電気的に接続されている場合の一例としては、ＸとＹとの電気的な接続を可能とする素子（例えば、スイッチ、トランジスタ、容量素子、インダクタ、抵抗素子、ダイオード、表示素子、発光素子、負荷など）が、ＸとＹとの間に１個以上接続されることが可能である。なお、スイッチは、オンオフが制御される機能を有している。つまり、スイッチは、導通状態（オン状態）、または、非導通状態（オフ状態）になり、電流を流すか流さないかを制御する機能を有している。または、スイッチは、電流を流す経路を選択して切り替える機能を有している。なお、ＸとＹとが電気的に接続されている場合は、ＸとＹとが直接的に接続されている場合を含むものとする。 As an example of the case where X and Y are electrically connected, an element (for example, a switch, a transistor, a capacitance element, an inductor, a resistance element, a diode, a display) that enables an electrical connection between X and Y is used. One or more elements, light emitting elements, loads, etc.) can be connected between X and Y. The switch has a function of controlling on / off. That is, the switch is in a conductive state (on state) or a non-conducting state (off state), and has a function of controlling whether or not a current flows. Alternatively, the switch has a function of selecting and switching the path through which the current flows. It should be noted that the case where X and Y are electrically connected includes the case where X and Y are directly connected.

ＸとＹとが機能的に接続されている場合の一例としては、ＸとＹとの機能的な接続を可能とする回路（例えば、論理回路（インバータ、ＮＡＮＤ回路、ＮＯＲ回路など）、信号変換回路（ＤＡ変換回路、ＡＤ変換回路、ガンマ補正回路など）、電位レベル変換回路（電源回路（昇圧回路、降圧回路など）、信号の電位レベルを変えるレベルシフタ回路など）、電圧源、電流源、切り替え回路、増幅回路（信号振幅または電流量などを大きく出来る回路、オペアンプ、差動増幅回路、ソースフォロワ回路、バッファ回路など）、信号生成回路、記憶回路、制御回路など）が、ＸとＹとの間に１個以上接続されることが可能である。なお、一例として、ＸとＹとの間に別の回路を挟んでいても、Ｘから出力された信号がＹへ伝達される場合は、ＸとＹとは機能的に接続されているものとする。なお、ＸとＹとが機能的に接続されている場合は、ＸとＹとが直接的に接続されている場合と、ＸとＹとが電気的に接続されている場合とを含むものとする。 As an example of the case where X and Y are functionally connected, a circuit that enables functional connection between X and Y (for example, a logic circuit (inverter, NAND circuit, NOR circuit, etc.), signal conversion, etc.) Circuits (DA conversion circuit, AD conversion circuit, gamma correction circuit, etc.), potential level conversion circuit (power supply circuit (boost circuit, step-down circuit, etc.), level shifter circuit that changes the signal potential level, etc.), voltage source, current source, switching Circuits, amplifier circuits (circuits that can increase signal amplitude or current amount, operational amplifiers, differential amplifier circuits, source follower circuits, buffer circuits, etc.), signal generation circuits, storage circuits, control circuits, etc.) are X and Y. It is possible to connect one or more in between. As an example, even if another circuit is sandwiched between X and Y, if the signal output from X is transmitted to Y, it is assumed that X and Y are functionally connected. To do. When X and Y are functionally connected, it includes a case where X and Y are directly connected and a case where X and Y are electrically connected.

なお、ＸとＹとが電気的に接続されている、と明示的に記載されている場合は、ＸとＹとが電気的に接続されている場合（つまり、ＸとＹとの間に別の素子又は別の回路を挟んで接続されている場合）と、ＸとＹとが機能的に接続されている場合（つまり、ＸとＹとの間に別の回路を挟んで機能的に接続されている場合）と、ＸとＹとが直接接続されている場合（つまり、ＸとＹとの間に別の素子又は別の回路を挟まずに接続されている場合）とが、本明細書等に開示されているものとする。つまり、電気的に接続されている、と明示的に記載されている場合は、単に、接続されている、とのみ明示的に記載されている場合と同様な内容が、本明細書等に開示されているものとする。 When it is explicitly stated that X and Y are electrically connected, it is different when X and Y are electrically connected (that is, between X and Y). When X and Y are functionally connected (that is, when they are connected by sandwiching another circuit between X and Y) and when they are functionally connected by sandwiching another circuit between X and Y. (That is, when X and Y are directly connected (that is, when another element or another circuit is not sandwiched between X and Y)). It shall be disclosed in documents, etc. That is, when it is explicitly stated that it is electrically connected, the same contents as when it is explicitly stated that it is simply connected are disclosed in the present specification and the like. It is assumed that it has been done.

なお、例えば、トランジスタのソース（又は第１の端子など）が、Ｚ１を介して（又は介さず）、Ｘと電気的に接続され、トランジスタのドレイン（又は第２の端子など）が、Ｚ２を介して（又は介さず）、Ｙと電気的に接続されている場合や、トランジスタのソース（又は第１の端子など）が、Ｚ１の一部と直接的に接続され、Ｚ１の別の一部がＸと直接的に接続され、トランジスタのドレイン（又は第２の端子など）が、Ｚ２の一部と直接的に接続され、Ｚ２の別の一部がＹと直接的に接続されている場合では、以下のように表現することが出来る。 Note that, for example, the source of the transistor (or the first terminal, etc.) is electrically connected to X via (or not) Z1, and the drain of the transistor (or the second terminal, etc.) connects to Z2. Through (or not), if electrically connected to Y, or if the source of the transistor (or the first terminal, etc.) is directly connected to one part of Z1 and another part of Z1. Is directly connected to X, the drain of the transistor (or the second terminal, etc.) is directly connected to one part of Z2, and another part of Z2 is directly connected to Y. Then, it can be expressed as follows.

例えば、「ＸとＹとトランジスタのソース（又は第１の端子など）とドレイン（又は第２の端子など）とは、互いに電気的に接続されており、Ｘ、トランジスタのソース（又は第１の端子など）、トランジスタのドレイン（又は第２の端子など）、Ｙの順序で電気的に接続されている。」と表現することができる。または、「トランジスタのソース（又は第１の端子など）は、Ｘと電気的に接続され、トランジスタのドレイン（又は第２の端子など）はＹと電気的に接続され、Ｘ、トランジスタのソース（又は第１の端子など）、トランジスタのドレイン（又は第２の端子など）、Ｙは、この順序で電気的に接続されている」と表現することができる。または、「Ｘは、トランジスタのソース（又は第１の端子など）とドレイン（又は第２の端子など）とを介して、Ｙと電気的に接続され、Ｘ、トランジスタのソース（又は第１の端子など）、トランジスタのドレイン（又は第２の端子など）、Ｙは、この接続順序で設けられている」と表現することができる。これらの例と同様な表現方法を用いて、回路構成における接続の順序について規定することにより、トランジスタのソース（又は第１の端子など）と、ドレイン（又は第２の端子など）とを、区別して、技術的範囲を決定することができる。 For example, "X and Y, the source (or the first terminal, etc.) and the drain (or the second terminal, etc.) of the transistor are electrically connected to each other, and the X, the source of the transistor (or the first terminal, etc.) (Terminals, etc.), transistor drains (or second terminals, etc.), and Y are electrically connected in this order. " Alternatively, "the source of the transistor (or the first terminal, etc.) is electrically connected to X, the drain of the transistor (or the second terminal, etc.) is electrically connected to Y, and the X, the source of the transistor (such as the second terminal). Or the first terminal, etc.), the drain of the transistor (or the second terminal, etc.), and Y are electrically connected in this order. " Alternatively, "X is electrically connected to Y via the source (or first terminal, etc.) and drain (or second terminal, etc.) of the transistor, and X, the source (or first terminal, etc.) of the transistor. The terminals, etc.), the drain of the transistor (or the second terminal, etc.), and Y are provided in this connection order. " By defining the order of connections in the circuit configuration using the same representation method as these examples, the source (or first terminal, etc.) and drain (or second terminal, etc.) of the transistor can be separated. Separately, the technical scope can be determined.

または、別の表現方法として、例えば、「トランジスタのソース（又は第１の端子など）は、少なくとも第１の接続経路を介して、Ｘと電気的に接続され、前記第１の接続経路は、第２の接続経路を有しておらず、前記第２の接続経路は、トランジスタを介した、トランジスタのソース（又は第１の端子など）とトランジスタのドレイン（又は第２の端子など）との間の経路であり、前記第１の接続経路は、Ｚ１を介した経路であり、トランジスタのドレイン（又は第２の端子など）は、少なくとも第３の接続経路を介して、Ｙと電気的に接続され、前記第３の接続経路は、前記第２の接続経路を有しておらず、前記第３の接続経路は、Ｚ２を介した経路である。」と表現することができる。または、「トランジスタのソース（又は第１の端子など）は、少なくとも第１の接続経路によって、Ｚ１を介して、Ｘと電気的に接続され、前記第１の接続経路は、第２の接続経路を有しておらず、前記第２の接続経路は、トランジスタを介した接続経路を有し、トランジスタのドレイン（又は第２の端子など）は、少なくとも第３の接続経路によって、Ｚ２を介して、Ｙと電気的に接続され、前記第３の接続経路は、前記第２の接続経路を有していない。」と表現することができる。または、「トランジスタのソース（又は第１の端子など）は、少なくとも第１の電気的パスによって、Ｚ１を介して、Ｘと電気的に接続され、前記第１の電気的パスは、第２の電気的パスを有しておらず、前記第２の電気的パスは、トランジスタのソース（又は第１の端子など）からトランジスタのドレイン（又は第２の端子など）への電気的パスであり、トランジスタのドレイン（又は第２の端子など）は、少なくとも第３の電気的パスによって、Ｚ２を介して、Ｙと電気的に接続され、前記第３の電気的パスは、第４の電気的パスを有しておらず、前記第４の電気的パスは、トランジスタのドレイン（又は第２の端子など）からトランジスタのソース（又は第１の端子など）への電気的パスである。」と表現することができる。これらの例と同様な表現方法を用いて、回路構成における接続経路について規定することにより、トランジスタのソース（又は第１の端子など）と、ドレイン（又は第２の端子など）とを、区別して、技術的範囲を決定することができる。 Alternatively, as another expression, for example, "the source of the transistor (or the first terminal, etc.) is electrically connected to X via at least the first connection path, and the first connection path is. It does not have a second connection path, and the second connection path is between the source of the transistor (or the first terminal, etc.) and the drain of the transistor (or the second terminal, etc.) via the transistor. The first connection path is a path via Z1, and the drain of the transistor (or the second terminal, etc.) is electrically connected to Y via at least a third connection path. It is connected, and the third connection path does not have the second connection path, and the third connection path is a path via Z2. " Alternatively, "the source of the transistor (or the first terminal, etc.) is electrically connected to X via Z1 by at least the first connection path, and the first connection path is the second connection path. The second connection path has a connection path via a transistor, and the drain of the transistor (or a second terminal or the like) is via Z2 by at least a third connection path. , Y is electrically connected, and the third connection path does not have the second connection path. " Alternatively, "the source of the transistor (or the first terminal, etc.) is electrically connected to X via Z1 by at least the first electrical path, the first electrical path being the second. It does not have an electrical path, and the second electrical path is an electrical path from the source of the transistor (or the first terminal, etc.) to the drain of the transistor (or the second terminal, etc.). The drain (or second terminal, etc.) of the transistor is electrically connected to Y via Z2 by at least a third electrical path, the third electrical path being a fourth electrical path. The fourth electrical path is an electrical path from the drain of the transistor (or the second terminal, etc.) to the source of the transistor (or the first terminal, etc.). " can do. By defining the connection path in the circuit configuration using the same expression method as these examples, the source (or the first terminal, etc.) of the transistor and the drain (or the second terminal, etc.) can be distinguished. , The technical scope can be determined.

なお、これらの表現方法は、一例であり、これらの表現方法に限定されない。ここで、Ｘ、Ｙ、Ｚ１、Ｚ２は、対象物（例えば、装置、素子、回路、配線、電極、端子、導電膜、層、など）であるとする。 It should be noted that these expression methods are examples and are not limited to these expression methods. Here, it is assumed that X, Y, Z1 and Z2 are objects (for example, devices, elements, circuits, wirings, electrodes, terminals, conductive films, layers, etc.).

なお、回路図上は独立している構成要素同士が電気的に接続しているように図示されている場合であっても、１つの構成要素が、複数の構成要素の機能を併せ持っている場合もある。例えば配線の一部が電極としても機能する場合は、一の導電膜が、配線の機能、及び電極の機能の両方の構成要素の機能を併せ持っている。したがって、本明細書における電気的に接続とは、このような、一の導電膜が、複数の構成要素の機能を併せ持っている場合も、その範疇に含める。 Even if the circuit diagram shows that the independent components are electrically connected to each other, the case where one component has the functions of a plurality of components together. There is also. For example, when a part of the wiring also functions as an electrode, one conductive film has the functions of both the wiring function and the electrode function. Therefore, the electrical connection in the present specification also includes the case where one conductive film has the functions of a plurality of components in combination.

ＡＣＦ１：導電材料、ＡＮＯ：導電膜、Ｃ２１：容量、Ｃ２２：容量、Ｃ３１：容量、ＣＩ：制御情報、ＣＬ：導電膜、ＣＰ：導電材料、ＤＳ：検知情報、ＦＤ：ノード、Ｇ１：導電膜、Ｇ２：導電膜、ＧＣＬＫ：信号、ＩＩ：入力情報、ＩＮ：端子、Ｍ２１：トランジスタ、Ｍ３１：トランジスタ、Ｍ３２：トランジスタ、Ｎ２１：ノード、Ｎ２２：ノード、ＯＵＴ：端子、Ｐ１：位置情報、ＰＷＣ１：信号、ＰＷＣ２：信号、ＲＳ：導電膜、Ｓ１ｇ：導電膜、Ｓ２ｇ：導電膜、ＳＥ：導電膜、ＳＨ：領域、ＳＷ２１：スイッチ、ＳＷ２２：スイッチ、ＳＷ２３：スイッチ、ＳＷ３１：スイッチ、ＳＷ３２：スイッチ、ＳＷ３３：スイッチ、ＴＸ：導電膜、Ｖ０：導電膜、Ｖ１１：情報、ＶＣＯＭ２：導電膜、ＶＣＰ：導電膜、ＶＩ：画像情報、ＶＩＶ：導電膜、ＶＬＥＮ：導電膜、ＶＰＤ：導電膜、ＶＰＩ：導電膜、ＶＲ：導電膜、ＷＸ：導電膜、ＦＰＣ１：フレキシブルプリント基板、２００：情報処理装置、２１０（１）：面、２１０（２）：面、２１０（３）：面、２１０（４）：面、２１０（５）：面、２１０：演算装置、２１１：演算部、２１２：記憶部、２１３：人工知能部、２１４：伝送路、２１５：入出力インターフェース、２２０：入出力装置、２３０：表示部、２３１：領域、２３３：制御回路、２３４：伸張回路、２３５：画像処理回路、２３８：制御部、２４０：入力部、２４１：検知領域、２４８：制御部、２５０：検知部、２９０：通信部、５０１Ｃ：絶縁膜、５０１Ｄ：絶縁膜、５０４：導電膜、５０６：絶縁膜、５０８：半導体膜、５０８Ａ：領域、５０８Ｂ：領域、５０８Ｃ：領域、５１０：基材、５１２Ａ：導電膜、５１２Ｂ：導電膜、５１２Ｃ：導電膜、５１２Ｄ：導電膜、５１２Ｅ：導電膜、５１２Ｆ：導電膜、５１６：絶縁膜、５１８：絶縁膜、５１９Ｂ：端子、５２０：機能層、５２１：絶縁膜、５２４：導電膜、５２８：絶縁膜、５３０Ｇ：画素回路、５３０Ｓ：画素回路、５５０：発光素子、５５０Ｇ：発光素子、５５１Ｇ：電極、５５１Ｓ：電極、５５２：電極、５５３Ｇ：発光性の材料を含む層、５５３Ｓ：光電変換材料を含む層、５７３：絶縁膜、５７３Ａ：絶縁膜、５７３Ｂ：絶縁膜、５９１Ｇ：開口部、５９１Ｓ：開口部、７００：機能パネル、７００ＴＰ：入出力パネル、７０２Ｂ：画素、７０２Ｇ：画素、７０２Ｒ：画素、７０２Ｓ：画素、７０２Ｎ：画素、７０３：画素、７０５：封止材、７２０：機能層、７７０：基材、７７０Ｐ：機能膜、７７１：絶縁膜、８０２：検知器、５２００Ｂ：情報処理装置、５２１０：演算装置、５２２０：入出力装置、５２３０：表示部、５２４０：入力部、５２５０：検知部、５２９０：通信部 ACF1: Conductive material, ANO: Conductive material, C21: Capacity, C22: Capacity, C31: Capacity, CI: Control information, CL: Conductive material, CP: Conductive material, DS: Detection information, FD: Node, G1: Conductive material , G2: Conductive, GCLK: Signal, II: Input information, IN: Terminal, M21: Transistor, M31: Transistor, M32: Transistor, N21: Node, N22: Node, OUT: Terminal, P1: Position information, PWC1: Signal, PWC2: Signal, RS: Conductive, S1g: Conductive, S2g: Conductive, SE: Conductive, SH: Region, SW21: Switch, SW22: Switch, SW23: Switch, SW31: Switch, SW32: Switch, SW33: Switch, TX: Conductive, V0: Conductive, V11: Information, VCOM2: Conductive, VCP: Conductive, VI: Image information, VIV: Conductive, VLEN: Conductive, VPD: Conductive, VPI: Conductive, VR: Conductive, WX: Conductive, FPC1: Flexible printed substrate, 200: Information processing device, 210 (1): Surface, 210 (2): Surface, 210 (3): Surface, 210 (4) : Surface, 210 (5): Surface, 210: Arithmetic device, 211: Arithmetic unit, 212: Storage unit, 213: Artificial intelligence unit, 214: Conductor, 215: Input / output interface, 220: Input / output device, 230: Display unit, 231: area, 233: control circuit, 234: extension circuit, 235: image processing circuit, 238: control unit, 240: input unit, 241: detection area, 248: control unit, 250: detection unit, 290: Communication unit, 501C: Insulation film, 501D: Insulation film, 504: Conductive film, 506: Insulation film, 508: Semiconductor film, 508A: Region, 508B: Region, 508C: Region, 510: Substrate, 512A: Conductive conductor, 512B: Conductive, 512C: Conductive, 512D: Conductive, 512E: Conductive, 512F: Conductive, 516: Insulating film, 518: Insulating film, 319B: Terminal, 520: Functional layer, 521: Insulating film, 524 : Conductive conductor, 528: Insulating film, 530G: Pixel circuit, 530S: Pixel circuit, 550: Light emitting element, 550G: Light emitting element, 551G: Electrode, 551S: Electrode, 552: Electrode, 555G: Layer containing luminescent material 5,53S: Layer containing photoelectric conversion material, 573: Insulation film, 573A: Insulation film, 573B: Insulation film, 591G: Opening, 591S: Opening, 700: Functional panel, 700TP: Input / output panel, 702B: Pixel, 702G: Pixel, 702R: Pixel, 702S: Pixel, 702N : Pixel, 703: Pixel, 705: Encapsulant, 720: Functional layer, 770: Substrate, 770P: Functional film, 771: Insulating film, 802: Detector, 5200B: Information processing device, 5210: Arithmetic logic unit, 5220 : Input / output device, 5230: Display unit, 5240: Input unit, 5250: Detection unit, 5290: Communication unit

Claims (15)

　機能パネルと、
　第１の面と、
　第２の面と、
　第３の面と、
　第４の面と、
　第５の面と、を有し、
　前記機能パネルは、領域を備え、
　前記領域は、第１の領域、第２の領域、第３の領域、第４の領域および第５の領域を備え、
　前記第２の領域は、一の方向に表示する機能を備え、
　前記第３の領域は、前記第１の領域および前記第２の領域の間に挟まれ、
　前記第３の領域は、屈曲することができ、
　前記第５の領域は、前記第１の領域および前記第４の領域の間に挟まれ、
　前記第５の領域は、屈曲することができ、
　前記第４の領域は、前記第３の領域および前記第５の領域が屈曲した状態において、前記一の方向に表示する機能を備え、
　前記第１の面は、前記第１の領域および発光素子を備え、
　前記発光素子は、光を射出し、
　前記第２の面は、前記第２の領域および光電変換素子を備え、
　前記光電変換素子は、前記光を電気信号に変換する機能を備え、
　前記第３の面は、前記第１の面および前記第２の面の間に挟まれ、
　前記第３の面は、屈曲することができ、
　前記第３の面は、前記第３の領域を備え、
　前記第４の面は、前記第４の領域を備え、
　前記第５の面は、前記第１の面および前記第４の面の間に挟まれ、
　前記第５の面は、屈曲することができ、
　前記第５の面は、前記第５の領域を備え、
　前記光電変換素子は、前記第３の面の屈曲に伴い、前記発光素子と対向する、情報処理装置。 Function panel and
The first side and
The second side and
The third side and
The fourth side and
Has a fifth surface,
The functional panel comprises an area
The region comprises a first region, a second region, a third region, a fourth region and a fifth region.
The second area has a function of displaying in one direction, and has a function of displaying in one direction.
The third region is sandwiched between the first region and the second region.
The third region can be bent and
The fifth region is sandwiched between the first region and the fourth region.
The fifth region can be bent and
The fourth region has a function of displaying in the one direction when the third region and the fifth region are bent.
The first surface comprises the first region and a light emitting element.
The light emitting element emits light and
The second surface comprises the second region and a photoelectric conversion element.
The photoelectric conversion element has a function of converting the light into an electric signal.
The third surface is sandwiched between the first surface and the second surface.
The third surface can be bent and
The third surface comprises the third region.
The fourth surface comprises the fourth region.
The fifth surface is sandwiched between the first surface and the fourth surface.
The fifth surface can be bent and
The fifth surface comprises the fifth region.
The photoelectric conversion element is an information processing device that faces the light emitting element as the third surface bends. 　前記光は、６５０ｎｍ以上１０００ｎｍ以下の波長を備える光を含む、請求項１に記載の情報処理装置。 The information processing device according to claim 1, wherein the light includes light having a wavelength of 650 nm or more and 1000 nm or less. 　前記発光素子は、発光性の有機化合物を含む、請求項１または請求項２に記載の情報処理装置。 The information processing device according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the light emitting element contains a luminescent organic compound. 　前記光電変換素子は、フラーレンを含む、請求項１乃至請求項３のいずれか一に記載の情報処理装置。 The information processing device according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the photoelectric conversion element includes fullerenes. 　前記機能パネルは、
　第１の駆動回路と、
　第２の駆動回路と、
　前記領域と、を備え、
　前記第１の駆動回路は、第１の選択信号を供給し、
　前記第２の駆動回路は、第２の選択信号および第３の選択信号を供給し、
　前記第２の領域は、第１の画素を備え、
　前記第１の画素は、第１の画素回路、発光素子、第２の画素回路および光電変換素子を備え、
　前記第１の画素回路は、前記第１の選択信号を供給され、
　前記第１の画素回路は、前記第１の選択信号に基づいて、画像信号を取得し、
　前記発光素子は、前記第１の画素回路と電気的に接続され、
　前記発光素子は、前記画像信号に基づいて、発光し、
　前記第２の画素回路は、前記第１の選択信号を供給されていない期間に、前記第２の選択信号および前記第３の選択信号を供給され、
　前記第２の画素回路は、前記第２の選択信号に基づいて、撮像信号を取得し、
　前記第２の画素回路は、前記第３の選択信号に基づいて、前記撮像信号を供給し、
　前記光電変換素子は、前記第２の画素回路と電気的に接続され、
　前記光電変換素子は、前記撮像信号を生成する、請求項１乃至請求項４のいずれか一に記載の情報処理装置。 The functional panel
The first drive circuit and
The second drive circuit and
With the above area
The first drive circuit supplies a first selection signal and
The second drive circuit supplies a second selection signal and a third selection signal.
The second region comprises a first pixel.
The first pixel includes a first pixel circuit, a light emitting element, a second pixel circuit, and a photoelectric conversion element.
The first pixel circuit is supplied with the first selection signal.
The first pixel circuit acquires an image signal based on the first selection signal.
The light emitting element is electrically connected to the first pixel circuit.
The light emitting element emits light based on the image signal.
The second pixel circuit is supplied with the second selection signal and the third selection signal during the period when the first selection signal is not supplied.
The second pixel circuit acquires an image pickup signal based on the second selection signal.
The second pixel circuit supplies the imaging signal based on the third selection signal.
The photoelectric conversion element is electrically connected to the second pixel circuit and is connected to the second pixel circuit.
The information processing device according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the photoelectric conversion element generates the imaging signal. 　前記機能パネルは、第１の導電膜と、第２の導電膜と、第３の導電膜と、第４の導電膜と、第５の導電膜と、第６の導電膜と、第７の導電膜と、を備え、
　前記第１の導電膜は、第２の選択信号を供給され、
　前記第７の導電膜は、第３の選択信号を供給され、
　前記第２の画素回路は、第１のスイッチ、第２のスイッチ，第３のスイッチ、第１のトランジスタ、第１の容量および第１のノードを備え、
　前記第１のスイッチは、前記光電変換素子と電気的に接続される第１の端子と、前記第１のノードと電気的に接続される第２の端子と、前記第１の導電膜の電位に基づいて、導通状態または非導通状態を制御する機能を備え、
　前記第２のスイッチは、前記第１のノードと電気的に接続される第１の端子と、前記第２の導電膜と電気的に接続される第２の端子と、前記第３の導電膜の電位に基づいて、導通状態または非導通状態を制御する機能を備え、
　前記第１の容量は、前記第１のノードと電気的に接続される導電膜と、前記第４の導電膜と電気的に接続される導電膜を備え、
　前記第１のトランジスタは、前記第１のノードと電気的に接続されるゲート電極と、前記第５の導電膜と電気的に接続される第１の電極と、を備え、
　前記第３のスイッチは、前記第１のトランジスタの第２の電極と電気的に接続される第１の端子と、前記第６の導電膜と電気的に接続される第２の端子と、前記第７の導電膜の電位に基づいて、導通状態または非導通状態を制御する機能を備える、請求項５に記載の情報処理装置。 The functional panel includes a first conductive film, a second conductive film, a third conductive film, a fourth conductive film, a fifth conductive film, a sixth conductive film, and a seventh conductive film. With conductive film,
The first conductive film is supplied with a second selection signal.
The seventh conductive film is supplied with a third selection signal.
The second pixel circuit comprises a first switch, a second switch, a third switch, a first transistor, a first capacitance and a first node.
The first switch has a first terminal electrically connected to the photoelectric conversion element, a second terminal electrically connected to the first node, and a potential of the first conductive film. It has a function to control the conductive state or the non-conductive state based on
The second switch has a first terminal electrically connected to the first node, a second terminal electrically connected to the second conductive film, and the third conductive film. It has a function to control the conducting state or the non-conducting state based on the potential of
The first capacitance includes a conductive film that is electrically connected to the first node and a conductive film that is electrically connected to the fourth conductive film.
The first transistor includes a gate electrode electrically connected to the first node and a first electrode electrically connected to the fifth conductive film.
The third switch includes a first terminal electrically connected to the second electrode of the first transistor, a second terminal electrically connected to the sixth conductive film, and the like. The information processing apparatus according to claim 5, further comprising a function of controlling a conductive state or a non-conductive state based on the potential of the seventh conductive film. 　前記機能パネルは、第８の導電膜と、第９の導電膜と、第１０の導電膜と、第１１の導電膜と、第１２の導電膜と、を備え、
　前記第８の導電膜は、第１の選択信号を供給され、
　前記第１の画素回路は、第４のスイッチ、第５のスイッチ、第２のトランジスタ、第２の容量および第２のノードを備え、
　前記第２のトランジスタは、前記第２のノードと電気的に接続されるゲート電極と、前記発光素子と電気的に接続される第１の電極と、前記第１２の導電膜と電気的に接続される第２の電極と、を備え、
　前記第４のスイッチは、前記第２のノードと電気的に接続される第１の端子と、前記第１０の導電膜と電気的に接続される第２の端子と、前記第８の導電膜の電位に基づいて、導通状態または非導通状態を制御する機能を備え、
　前記第５のスイッチは、前記第１１の導電膜と電気的に接続される第１の端子と、前記第９の導電膜の電位に基づいて、導通状態または非導通状態を制御する機能を備え、
　前記第２の容量は、前記第２のノードと電気的に接続される導電膜と、前記第５のスイッチの第２の電極と電気的に接続される導電膜を備える、請求項５または請求項６に記載の情報処理装置。 The functional panel includes an eighth conductive film, a ninth conductive film, a tenth conductive film, an eleventh conductive film, and a twelfth conductive film.
The eighth conductive film is supplied with the first selection signal.
The first pixel circuit comprises a fourth switch, a fifth switch, a second transistor, a second capacitance and a second node.
The second transistor is electrically connected to the gate electrode electrically connected to the second node, the first electrode electrically connected to the light emitting element, and the twelfth conductive film. With a second electrode, which is
The fourth switch includes a first terminal electrically connected to the second node, a second terminal electrically connected to the tenth conductive film, and the eighth conductive film. It has a function to control the conducting state or the non-conducting state based on the potential of
The fifth switch has a first terminal electrically connected to the eleventh conductive film and a function of controlling a conductive state or a non-conductive state based on the potential of the ninth conductive film. ,
5. The second capacitance comprises a conductive film electrically connected to the second node and a conductive film electrically connected to the second electrode of the fifth switch. Item 6. The information processing apparatus according to item 6. 　前記機能パネルは、読み出し回路と、第１３の導電膜と、第１４の導電膜と、第１５の導電膜と、を備え、
　前記読み出し回路は、増幅回路およびサンプリング回路を備え、
　前記増幅回路は第３のトランジスタを含み、
　前記第３のトランジスタは、前記第１３の導電膜と電気的に接続されるゲート電極と、前記第６の導電膜と電気的に接続される第１の電極と、前記第１４の導電膜と電気的に接続される第２の電極と、を備え、
　前記サンプリング回路は、第１の端子、第２の端子および第３の端子を備え、
　前記第１の端子は、第６の導電膜と電気的に接続され、
　前記第２の端子は、第１５の導電膜と電気的に接続され、
　前記第３の端子は、第１の端子の電位に基づいて変化する信号を供給する機能を備える、請求項５乃至請求項７のいずれか一に記載の情報処理装置。 The functional panel includes a readout circuit, a thirteenth conductive film, a fourteenth conductive film, and a fifteenth conductive film.
The read circuit includes an amplifier circuit and a sampling circuit.
The amplifier circuit includes a third transistor.
The third transistor includes a gate electrode electrically connected to the thirteenth conductive film, a first electrode electrically connected to the sixth conductive film, and the fourteenth conductive film. With a second electrode, which is electrically connected,
The sampling circuit includes a first terminal, a second terminal, and a third terminal.
The first terminal is electrically connected to the sixth conductive film and is connected to the sixth conductive film.
The second terminal is electrically connected to the fifteenth conductive film.
The information processing apparatus according to any one of claims 5 to 7, wherein the third terminal has a function of supplying a signal that changes based on the potential of the first terminal. 　前記機能パネルは、機能層を備え、
　前記機能層は、前記第１の画素回路および前記第２の画素回路を備える、請求項５乃至請求項８のいずれか一に記載の情報処理装置。 The functional panel comprises a functional layer and
The information processing apparatus according to any one of claims 5 to 8, wherein the functional layer includes the first pixel circuit and the second pixel circuit. 　前記領域は、一群の画素および他の一群の画素を備え、
　前記一群の画素は、行方向に配設され、
　前記一群の画素は、前記第１の画素を含み、
　前記一群の画素は、前記第８の導電膜と電気的に接続され、
　前記一群の画素は、前記第１の導電膜と電気的に接続され、
　前記他の一群の画素は、前記行方向と交差する列方向に配設され、
　前記他の一群の画素は、前記第１の画素を含み、
　前記他の一群の画素は、前記第１０の導電膜と電気的に接続され、
　前記他の一群の画素は、前記第６の導電膜と電気的に接続される、請求項５乃至請求項９に記載の情報処理装置。 The region comprises a group of pixels and another group of pixels.
The group of pixels is arranged in the row direction.
The group of pixels includes the first pixel.
The group of pixels is electrically connected to the eighth conductive film.
The group of pixels is electrically connected to the first conductive film and
The other group of pixels is arranged in a column direction that intersects the row direction.
The other group of pixels includes the first pixel.
The other group of pixels is electrically connected to the tenth conductive film.
The information processing apparatus according to claim 5, wherein the other group of pixels is electrically connected to the sixth conductive film. 　前記第１の領域は、第２の画素を備え、
　前記第２の画素は、前記発光素子を含む、請求項１乃至請求項１０のいずれか一に記載の情報処理装置。 The first region comprises a second pixel.
The information processing device according to any one of claims 1 to 10, wherein the second pixel includes the light emitting element. 　制御部を有し、
　前記制御部は、画像情報および制御情報を供給され、
　前記制御部は、前記画像情報に基づいて情報を生成し、
　前記制御部は、前記制御情報に基づいて制御信号を生成し、
　前記制御部は、前記情報および制御信号を供給し、
　前記機能パネルは、前記情報および前記制御信号を供給され、
　前記第１の画素は、前記情報に基づいて発光し、
　前記第２の画素は、前記情報に基づいて発光する、請求項１乃至請求項１１のいずれか一に記載の情報処理装置。 Has a control unit
The control unit is supplied with image information and control information.
The control unit generates information based on the image information,
The control unit generates a control signal based on the control information.
The control unit supplies the information and control signals,
The functional panel is supplied with the information and the control signal.
The first pixel emits light based on the information.
The information processing device according to any one of claims 1 to 11, wherein the second pixel emits light based on the information. 　入力部と、
　表示部と、を有し、
　前記表示部は、前記機能パネルを備え、
　前記入力部は、検知領域を備え、
　前記入力部は、前記検知領域に近接するものを検知し、
　前記検知領域は、前記第１の画素と重なる領域を備える、請求項１乃至請求項１２のいずれか一に記載の情報処理装置。 Input section and
Has a display and
The display unit includes the function panel.
The input unit includes a detection area.
The input unit detects an object close to the detection area and
The information processing device according to any one of claims 1 to 12, wherein the detection area includes an area that overlaps with the first pixel. 　演算装置と、
　入出力装置と、を有し、
　前記演算装置は、入力情報または検知情報を供給され、
　前記演算装置は、前記入力情報または前記検知情報に基づいて、制御情報および画像情報を生成し、
　前記演算装置は、前記制御情報および前記画像情報を供給し、
　前記入出力装置は、前記入力情報および前記検知情報を供給し、
　前記入出力装置は、前記制御情報および前記画像情報を供給され、
　前記入出力装置は、前記表示部、入力部および検知部を備え、
　前記表示部は、前記機能パネルを備え、
　前記表示部は、前記制御情報に基づいて、前記画像情報を表示し、
　前記入力部は、前記入力情報を生成し、
　前記検知部は、前記検知情報を生成する、請求項１乃至請求項１２のいずれか一に記載の情報処理装置。 Arithmetic logic unit and
Has an input / output device,
The arithmetic unit is supplied with input information or detection information.
The arithmetic unit generates control information and image information based on the input information or the detection information.
The arithmetic unit supplies the control information and the image information,
The input / output device supplies the input information and the detection information,
The input / output device is supplied with the control information and the image information.
The input / output device includes the display unit, the input unit, and the detection unit.
The display unit includes the function panel.
The display unit displays the image information based on the control information.
The input unit generates the input information and generates the input information.
The information processing device according to any one of claims 1 to 12, wherein the detection unit generates the detection information. 　キーボード、ハードウェアボタン、ポインティングデバイス、タッチセンサ、照度センサ、撮像装置、音声入力装置、視線入力装置、姿勢検出装置、のうち一以上と、を含む、請求項１乃至請求項１２のいずれか一に記載の情報処理装置。 Any one of claims 1 to 12, including one or more of a keyboard, a hardware button, a pointing device, a touch sensor, an illuminance sensor, an imaging device, a voice input device, a line-of-sight input device, and an attitude detection device. The information processing device described in.
PCT/IB2020/053907 2019-05-10 2020-04-27 Information processing device Ceased WO2020229910A1 (en)

Priority Applications (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2021519017A JPWO2020229910A1 (en) 2019-05-10 2020-04-27
CN202080035047.5A CN113811936A (en) 2019-05-10 2020-04-27 data processing device
US17/609,115 US11886250B2 (en) 2019-05-10 2020-04-27 Data processing device
KR1020217036914A KR102894646B1 (en) 2019-05-10 2020-04-27 information processing device
JP2025002807A JP2025061105A (en) 2019-05-10 2025-01-08 Information processing device

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2019-089759 2019-05-10
JP2019089761 2019-05-10
JP2019089759 2019-05-10
JP2019-089761 2019-05-10

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020229910A1 true WO2020229910A1 (en) 2020-11-19

Family

ID=73289608

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/IB2020/053907 Ceased WO2020229910A1 (en) 2019-05-10 2020-04-27 Information processing device

Country Status (4)

Country Link
US (1) US11886250B2 (en)
JP (2) JPWO2020229910A1 (en)
CN (1) CN113811936A (en)
WO (1) WO2020229910A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR102876639B1 (en) 2019-08-02 2025-10-28 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 Function panel, display device, input/output device, information processing device
KR102872042B1 (en) * 2024-02-14 2025-10-16 (주)하나기술 Reading device for secondary cell barcode

Citations (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2008286905A (en) * 2007-05-16 2008-11-27 Sony Corp Display device, display device driving method, and electronic apparatus
JP2015005280A (en) * 2013-05-20 2015-01-08 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 Imaging panel, imaging device
US20160147362A1 (en) * 2014-11-24 2016-05-26 Lg Electronics Inc. Mobile terminal and method for controlling the same
JP2016210750A (en) * 2015-05-13 2016-12-15 国立大学法人 東京大学 Fullerene compound, semiconductor device, solar cell and solar cell module
JP2017005713A (en) * 2015-06-12 2017-01-05 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 IMAGING DEVICE, OPERATION METHOD THEREOF, AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE
US20180122863A1 (en) * 2016-11-02 2018-05-03 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Display device
US20180151121A1 (en) * 2016-11-29 2018-05-31 Lg Display Co., Ltd. Organic light-emitting display and driving method thereof
US20180241856A1 (en) * 2015-08-20 2018-08-23 Lg Electronics Inc. Mobile terminal having card unit and method for controlling same
JP2018147877A (en) * 2017-03-08 2018-09-20 三星ディスプレイ株式會社Ｓａｍｓｕｎｇ Ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ Ｃｏ．，Ｌｔｄ． Light emitting display device
WO2018185585A1 (en) * 2017-04-03 2018-10-11 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 Display device, input-output device, and information processing device

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR101074799B1 (en) * 2009-08-18 2011-10-19 삼성모바일디스플레이주식회사 Touch screen display apparatus, and the manufacturing method of the same
KR102660456B1 (en) * 2015-09-10 2024-04-23 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 Imaging device, module, electronic device, and method of operating the imaging device
US11610529B2 (en) 2019-01-25 2023-03-21 Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. Functional panel, display device, input/output device, data processing device, method for driving data processing device

Patent Citations (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2008286905A (en) * 2007-05-16 2008-11-27 Sony Corp Display device, display device driving method, and electronic apparatus
JP2015005280A (en) * 2013-05-20 2015-01-08 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 Imaging panel, imaging device
US20160147362A1 (en) * 2014-11-24 2016-05-26 Lg Electronics Inc. Mobile terminal and method for controlling the same
JP2016210750A (en) * 2015-05-13 2016-12-15 国立大学法人 東京大学 Fullerene compound, semiconductor device, solar cell and solar cell module
JP2017005713A (en) * 2015-06-12 2017-01-05 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 IMAGING DEVICE, OPERATION METHOD THEREOF, AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE
US20180241856A1 (en) * 2015-08-20 2018-08-23 Lg Electronics Inc. Mobile terminal having card unit and method for controlling same
US20180122863A1 (en) * 2016-11-02 2018-05-03 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Display device
US20180151121A1 (en) * 2016-11-29 2018-05-31 Lg Display Co., Ltd. Organic light-emitting display and driving method thereof
JP2018147877A (en) * 2017-03-08 2018-09-20 三星ディスプレイ株式會社Ｓａｍｓｕｎｇ Ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ Ｃｏ．，Ｌｔｄ． Light emitting display device
WO2018185585A1 (en) * 2017-04-03 2018-10-11 株式会社半導体エネルギー研究所 Display device, input-output device, and information processing device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US11886250B2 (en) 2024-01-30
JP2025061105A (en) 2025-04-10
US20220214717A1 (en) 2022-07-07
KR20220004084A (en) 2022-01-11
JPWO2020229910A1 (en) 2020-11-19
CN113811936A (en) 2021-12-17

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP7431178B2 (en) function panel
JP2020201484A (en) Function panel, display device, input/output device, and information processing device
JP7733191B2 (en) Function Panel
JP7669564B2 (en) Function Panel
JP2024149544A (en) Function Panel
JP2025061105A (en) Information processing device
JP7411554B2 (en) Display panel, display device, input/output device, information processing device
JP2025090650A (en) Function Panel
JP2025078676A (en) display device
KR102894646B1 (en) information processing device
JP7474256B2 (en) Light-emitting device, functional panel, display device, input/output device, information processing device
WO2021069999A1 (en) Function panel, display device, i/o device, and information processing device
KR20250166337A (en) Information processing device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20805219

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2021519017

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20805219

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1